MB-300 MICROSOFT DYNAMICS 365 FOR FINANCE & OPERATIONS, CORE STUDY GUIDE by Dynamics Companions

CERTIFICATION EXAM STUDY GUIDE EXAM MB-300: MICROSOFT DYNAMICS 365 UNIFIED OPERATIONS CORE

This study guide contains all exam prep content, including walkthroughs, practice exercises and sample questions following core courses that are recommended for the MB-300 certification.

Murray Fife

EXAM MB-300: MICROSOFT DYNAMICS 365 UNIFIED OPERATIONS CORE Murray Fife

DYNAMICS COMPANIONS CERTIFICATION EXAM STUDY GUIDE

EXAM MB-300: MICROSOFT DYNAMICS 365 UNIFIED OPERATIONS CORE

Preface What You Need for this Guide All the examples shown in this blueprint were done with the Microsoft Dynamics 365 Finance & Operations virtual machine image that was downloaded from the Lifecycle Services site. If you don't have your own installation of Microsoft Dynamics 365 Finance & Operations, you can also use the images found on the Microsoft Learning Download Center or deployed through Lifecycle Services. The following list of software from the virtual image was leveraged within this guide: Microsoft Dynamics 365 for Finance & Operations Even though all the preceding software was used during the development and testing of the recipes in this book, they may also work on earlier versions of the software with minor tweaks and adjustments and should also work on later versions without any changes.

Errata Although we have taken every care to ensure the accuracy of our content, mistakes do happen. If you find a mistake in one of our books—maybe a mistake in the text or the code—we would be grateful if you would report this to us. By doing so, you can save other readers from frustration and help us improve subsequent versions of this book. If you find any errata, please report them by emailing editor@dynamicscompanions.com.

Piracy Piracy of copyright material on the Internet is an ongoing problem across all media. If you come across any illegal copies of our works, in any form, on the Internet, please provide us with the location address or website name immediately so that we can pursue a remedy. Please contact us at legal@dynamicscompanions.com with a link to the suspected pirated material. We appreciate your help in protecting our authors, and our ability to bring you valuable content.

Questions You can contact us at help@dynamicscompanions.com if you are having a problem with any aspect of the book, and we will do our best to address it.

www.dynamicscompanions.com Dynamics Companions

-1-

DYNAMICS COMPANIONS CERTIFICATION EXAM STUDY GUIDE

www.dynamicscompanions.com Dynamics Companions

EXAM MB-300: MICROSOFT DYNAMICS 365 UNIFIED OPERATIONS CORE

-2-

DYNAMICS COMPANIONS CERTIFICATION EXAM STUDY GUIDE

EXAM MB-300: MICROSOFT DYNAMICS 365 UNIFIED OPERATIONS CORE

Table of Contents Preface ...................................................................................................................................................................................................... 1 Table of Contents ................................................................................................................................................................................. 3 Exam MB-300: Microsoft Dynamics 365 Unified Operations Core ................................................................................ 10 Skills measured......................................................................................................................................................................... 10 Course MB-300T01-A: Core common features of Dynamics 365 for Finance and Operations ......................... 13 Module 1: Get Started with Dynamics 365 for Finance and Operations ................................................................ 14 Introduction to Dynamics 365 for Finance and Operations ........................................................................................ 15 Introduction ............................................................................................................................................................................... 15 Industry focus in Finance and Operations ..................................................................................................................... 16 Financial management .......................................................................................................................................................... 18 Employee management ........................................................................................................................................................ 20 Supply chain management .................................................................................................................................................. 22 Check your knowledge.......................................................................................................................................................... 24 Summary ..................................................................................................................................................................................... 24 Module 2: Get Started with Lifecycle Services .................................................................................................................. 26 Get started with Lifecycle Services for Dynamics 365 for Finance and Operations ........................................... 27 Introduction ............................................................................................................................................................................... 27 Understand the functionality and tools of LCS ........................................................................................................... 28 LCS security................................................................................................................................................................................ 34 Reuse existing assets, copy and share data .................................................................................................................. 35 Perform actions in the Asset library ................................................................................................................................. 38 Work with the Task recorder .............................................................................................................................................. 40 Business process modeler (BPM) ...................................................................................................................................... 47 LCS issue search and support............................................................................................................................................. 49 Get product updates from LCS .......................................................................................................................................... 53 Exercise - use the Task recorder to create and edit a recording .......................................................................... 54 Exercise - create a business process in the business process modeler ............................................................. 56 Exercise - create a support incident................................................................................................................................. 58 Check your knowledge.......................................................................................................................................................... 59 Summary ..................................................................................................................................................................................... 60 www.dynamicscompanions.com Dynamics Companions

-3-

DYNAMICS COMPANIONS CERTIFICATION EXAM STUDY GUIDE

EXAM MB-300: MICROSOFT DYNAMICS 365 UNIFIED OPERATIONS CORE

Module 3: Use Lifecycle Services to Design and Plan .................................................................................................... 62 Design and plan an implementation of Dynamics 365 for Finance and Operations ........................................ 63 Introduction ............................................................................................................................................................................... 63 Use implementation methodologies for a successful implementation ............................................................. 64 Cloud implementation – analysis ...................................................................................................................................... 65 Cloud implementation - design and develop .............................................................................................................. 67 Cloud implementation – test .............................................................................................................................................. 69 Cloud implementation - deploy and operate .............................................................................................................. 71 On-premises implementation – analysis ........................................................................................................................ 72 On-premises implementation - design and develop ................................................................................................ 74 On-premises implementation - test, deploy and operate ...................................................................................... 75 Gathering and analyzing the requirements .................................................................................................................. 77 Create functional design documents (FDD).................................................................................................................. 79 Check your knowledge.......................................................................................................................................................... 82 Summary ..................................................................................................................................................................................... 83 Module 4: Overview of Reporting and Analytics ............................................................................................................. 84 Work with analytics and reporting in Finance and Operations ................................................................................. 85 Introduction to working with analytics and reporting in Finance and Operations ....................................... 85 Understand different types of reports and inquiries................................................................................................. 86 Financial reporting .................................................................................................................................................................. 87 Find inquiries and reports .................................................................................................................................................... 93 Configure Finance and Operations for Microsoft Power Platform ...................................................................... 94 Exercise - Generate and explore a financial report .................................................................................................... 98 Exercise - Add account properties to a report design............................................................................................ 100 Exercise - Create a multidimensional report by using a reporting tree .......................................................... 102 Exercise - Create a consolidated report by using an organization hierarchy................................................ 103 Exercise - Create a side-by-side departmental report............................................................................................ 104 Exercise – Print customer and vendor account statements.................................................................................. 105 Work with analytics and reporting in Finance and Operations knowledge check ...................................... 106 Summary ................................................................................................................................................................................... 106 Module 5: Build and Test Mobile Apps ............................................................................................................................. 107 Design and build mobile apps for Dynamics 365 for Finance and Operations ................................................. 108 Introduction ............................................................................................................................................................................. 108 www.dynamicscompanions.com Dynamics Companions

-4-

DYNAMICS COMPANIONS CERTIFICATION EXAM STUDY GUIDE

EXAM MB-300: MICROSOFT DYNAMICS 365 UNIFIED OPERATIONS CORE

Overview of the Dynamics 365 Unified Operations mobile app ........................................................................ 109 Page design guidelines ....................................................................................................................................................... 113 Action design guidelines .................................................................................................................................................... 115 Form design requirements ................................................................................................................................................ 117 Design considerations ......................................................................................................................................................... 117 Understand use cases for mobile apps ........................................................................................................................ 118 Get the Dynamics 365 Unified Operations mobile app ......................................................................................... 120 Build and use mobile apps ................................................................................................................................................ 121 Exercise - Create and test a mobile app ...................................................................................................................... 121 Check your knowledge........................................................................................................................................................ 122 Summary ................................................................................................................................................................................... 123 Module 6: Create, Maintain and Use Workflows ........................................................................................................... 124 Work with workflows in Dynamics 365 for Finance and Operations ..................................................................... 125 Introduction ............................................................................................................................................................................. 125 Workflow types for business processes ....................................................................................................................... 126 Create and set up workflows ............................................................................................................................................ 134 Assign users to workflow elements................................................................................................................................ 142 Use work items functionality ............................................................................................................................................ 146 Exercise - Create a purchase requisition workflow .................................................................................................. 147 Check your knowledge........................................................................................................................................................ 148 Summary ................................................................................................................................................................................... 149 Course MB-300T02-A: Core configuration in Dynamics 365 for Finance and Operations ................................ 150 Module 1: Set Up and Configure Legal Entities ............................................................................................................. 151 Plan and implement legal entities in Dynamics 365 for Finance and Operations ............................................ 152 Introduction ............................................................................................................................................................................. 152 Create a legal entity ............................................................................................................................................................. 153 Create a number sequence ............................................................................................................................................... 154 Understand organizational hierarchies and operating units ............................................................................... 156 Plan your organizational hierarchy................................................................................................................................. 158 Decide whether to model internal organizations as legal entities or operating units .............................. 158 Decide whether to model internal organizations as legal entities or operating units (cont.) ................ 162 Best practices for modeling organizations and hierarchies ................................................................................. 164 Apply purposes and policies ............................................................................................................................................. 165 www.dynamicscompanions.com Dynamics Companions

-5-

DYNAMICS COMPANIONS CERTIFICATION EXAM STUDY GUIDE

EXAM MB-300: MICROSOFT DYNAMICS 365 UNIFIED OPERATIONS CORE

Distributed order management (DOM) policy .......................................................................................................... 166 Configure calendars and date intervals ........................................................................................................................ 167 Exercise - Configure a new legal entity ........................................................................................................................ 170 Exercise - Create an operating unit ................................................................................................................................ 171 Exercise - Create an organization hierarchy ............................................................................................................... 172 Exercise - Set up a number sequence ........................................................................................................................... 172 Check your knowledge........................................................................................................................................................ 173 Summary ................................................................................................................................................................................... 174 Module 2: Manage users and security ............................................................................................................................... 175 Plan and implement security in Dynamics 365 for Finance and Operations ...................................................... 176 Introduction ............................................................................................................................................................................. 176 Understand the security architecture ............................................................................................................................ 177 Manage users and security ................................................................................................................................................ 180 Set up and apply segregation of duties ....................................................................................................................... 181 Run security reports ............................................................................................................................................................. 182 Exercise - Create a new user and assign a security role ........................................................................................ 187 Exercise - Import a user and assign security role ..................................................................................................... 187 Exercise - Import users in bulk as a batch job ........................................................................................................... 188 Exercise - Assign users to security roles dynamically ............................................................................................. 189 Exercise - Exclude users from a role assignment ...................................................................................................... 189 Exercise - Set up segregation of duties ........................................................................................................................ 190 Check your knowledge........................................................................................................................................................ 191 Summary ................................................................................................................................................................................... 192 Module 3: Perform Personalization ..................................................................................................................................... 193 Personalize Dynamics 365 for Finance and Operations .............................................................................................. 194 Introduction ............................................................................................................................................................................. 194 Understand the differences between customization and personalization ..................................................... 194 Apply user options ................................................................................................................................................................ 195 Implicit personalization ....................................................................................................................................................... 200 Explicit personalization ....................................................................................................................................................... 201 Demonstration - work with personalization ............................................................................................................... 203 Personalize a workspace..................................................................................................................................................... 206 Personalize a dashboard .................................................................................................................................................... 209 www.dynamicscompanions.com Dynamics Companions

-6-

DYNAMICS COMPANIONS CERTIFICATION EXAM STUDY GUIDE

EXAM MB-300: MICROSOFT DYNAMICS 365 UNIFIED OPERATIONS CORE

Personalize inventory dimensions .................................................................................................................................. 210 Administrate personalization............................................................................................................................................ 211 Create and maintain record templates ......................................................................................................................... 214 Exercise - Personalize user options ................................................................................................................................ 215 Exercise - Create and use a record template ............................................................................................................. 216 Check your knowledge........................................................................................................................................................ 217 Summary ................................................................................................................................................................................... 217 Module 4: Implement Common Integration Features ................................................................................................. 219 Implement common integration features in Dynamics 365 for Finance and Operations ............................. 220 Introduction ............................................................................................................................................................................. 220 Microsoft Office integration in Finance and Operations ....................................................................................... 221 Excel workbook designer ................................................................................................................................................... 227 Document management .................................................................................................................................................... 228 Configure email (SMTP/Exchange) ................................................................................................................................. 230 Create an email template ................................................................................................................................................... 235 Power BI in Finance and Operations.............................................................................................................................. 236 Set up network printing ...................................................................................................................................................... 239 Integrate data from multiple sources into Common Data Service for Apps ................................................. 245 Exercise â&#x20AC;&#x201C; Work with Microsoft Office integration .................................................................................................. 246 Exercise - Use the Excel workbook designer .............................................................................................................. 249 Check your knowledge........................................................................................................................................................ 250 Summary ................................................................................................................................................................................... 251 Course MB-300T03-A: Data migration and preparing for go-live with Dynamics 365 for Finance and Operations.......................................................................................................................................................................................... 252 Module 1: Prepare Data for Migration and Migrate Data.......................................................................................... 253 Prepare data for migration to Dynamics 365 for Finance and Operations ......................................................... 254 Introduction ............................................................................................................................................................................. 254 Select a data integration (import/export) strategy .................................................................................................. 255 Common migration scenarios and tools...................................................................................................................... 257 Bring your own database (BYOD) ................................................................................................................................... 258 Test a data migration and validate output ................................................................................................................. 264 Check your knowledge........................................................................................................................................................ 270 Summary ................................................................................................................................................................................... 271

www.dynamicscompanions.com Dynamics Companions

-7-

DYNAMICS COMPANIONS CERTIFICATION EXAM STUDY GUIDE

EXAM MB-300: MICROSOFT DYNAMICS 365 UNIFIED OPERATIONS CORE

Module 2: Use Data Management ...................................................................................................................................... 272 Work with data management in Dynamics 365 for Finance and Operations .................................................... 273 Introduction ............................................................................................................................................................................. 273 Data management concepts............................................................................................................................................. 274 Use data entities for data management and integration ...................................................................................... 277 Work with the Data management workspace ........................................................................................................... 280 Using Standard and Enhanced views for tiles ............................................................................................................ 288 Use templates in data management ............................................................................................................................. 291 Export, import, and copy data into a legal entity ..................................................................................................... 296 Exercise â&#x20AC;&#x201C; Explore the Data management workspace ............................................................................................ 298 Exercise - Export and import data to Finance and Operations ........................................................................... 299 Check your knowledge........................................................................................................................................................ 301 Summary ................................................................................................................................................................................... 302 Module 3: Perform User Acceptance Testing.................................................................................................................. 303 Perform user acceptance testing (UAT) in Dynamics 365 for Finance and Operations ................................. 304 Introduction ............................................................................................................................................................................. 304 Create user acceptance test libraries by using task recordings and BPM ...................................................... 305 Record test cases and save to BPM ............................................................................................................................... 306 Synchronize and configure your test plan in Azure DevOps ............................................................................... 311 Run your tests ......................................................................................................................................................................... 311 Data task automation .......................................................................................................................................................... 313 Exercise - Build test scripts to test business functionality..................................................................................... 314 Check your knowledge........................................................................................................................................................ 317 Summary ................................................................................................................................................................................... 318 Module 4: Prepare to Go Live ................................................................................................................................................ 319 Prepare to go-live with Dynamics 365 for Finance and Operations ...................................................................... 320 Introduction ............................................................................................................................................................................. 320 Understand the go-live process ...................................................................................................................................... 321 Complete the LCS methodology ..................................................................................................................................... 323 Perform user acceptance testing (UAT) for your solution..................................................................................... 323 FastTrack go-live assessment ........................................................................................................................................... 324 Request the production environment ........................................................................................................................... 325 Check your knowledge........................................................................................................................................................ 326 www.dynamicscompanions.com Dynamics Companions

-8-

DYNAMICS COMPANIONS CERTIFICATION EXAM STUDY GUIDE

EXAM MB-300: MICROSOFT DYNAMICS 365 UNIFIED OPERATIONS CORE

Summary ................................................................................................................................................................................... 327

www.dynamicscompanions.com Dynamics Companions

-9-

DYNAMICS COMPANIONS CERTIFICATION EXAM STUDY GUIDE

EXAM MB-300: MICROSOFT DYNAMICS 365 UNIFIED OPERATIONS CORE

Exam MB-300: Microsoft Dynamics 365 Unified Operations Core Link: https://www.microsoft.com/en-us/learning/exam-MB-300.aspx Candidates for this exam are functional consultants who analyze business requirements and translates those requirements into fully realized business processes and solutions that implement industry best practices. Candidates serve as a key resource in implementing and configuring applications to meet business requirements. Candidates for this exam have a fundamental understanding of accounting principles and financial operations of businesses, customer service, field service, manufacturing, retail, and supply chain management concepts. Candidates for this exam typically specialize in one or more feature sets of Microsoft Dynamics 365 Finance and Operations, including finance, manufacturing, and supply chain management.

Skills measured

Use common functionality and implementation tools (20-25%) Identify common Microsoft Dynamics 365 Finance and Operations features and functionality •

determine when to use workspaces

•

identify use cases for mobile workspaces, Power Apps, and Flow

•

identify and differentiate between the global address book and other address books

•

determine when and how to use the Data Expansion Tool

•

demonstrate Work Items functionality

•

demonstrate Microsoft Dynamics 365 Finance and Operations navigation techniques

•

identify Inquiry and Report types available in a default installation

Implement Lifecycle Services (LCS) tools •

identify opportunities to re-use existing assists

•

analyze Business Process Modeler results and identify gaps in functionality

•

use the LCS tools including Issue search and analyze results

www.dynamicscompanions.com Dynamics Companions

- 10 -

DYNAMICS COMPANIONS CERTIFICATION EXAM STUDY GUIDE

EXAM MB-300: MICROSOFT DYNAMICS 365 UNIFIED OPERATIONS CORE

Configure security, processes, and options (45-50%) Implement security •

identify and distinguish between standard Finance and Operations security roles

•

distinguish between duties, privileges, and permissions

•

assign users to security roles based on given scenarios

Design and create workflows •

identify opportunities for automation and controls based on customer workflows

•

configure workflow properties and elements

•

troubleshoot workflows

Configure options •

set up and configure legal entities

•

configure base number sequences

•

import or create postal data

•

configure the calendars and date intervals

•

configure units of measure and conversions

•

configure posting profiles and definitions

•

create organization hierarchies

•

apply purposes and policies

•

describe and apply user options

Implement Microsoft Dynamics 365 Finance and Operations common features •

synchronize Microsoft Office information with Microsoft Dynamics 365 Finance and Operations

•

configure email (SMTP/Exchange)

•

create and maintain email and record templates

•

set up a Power BI connector

•

create, export, and import personalizations

•

set up network printing

Implement business processes for the solution •

define use case scenarios

•

participate in phase-based planning processes and the solution design

•

design and create workflows

•

set up batch jobs and alerts

www.dynamicscompanions.com Dynamics Companions

- 11 -

DYNAMICS COMPANIONS CERTIFICATION EXAM STUDY GUIDE

•

EXAM MB-300: MICROSOFT DYNAMICS 365 UNIFIED OPERATIONS CORE

use business process workspace

Perform data migration (15-20%) Plan a migration strategy •

identify common migration scenarios and tools in Microsoft Dynamics 365 Finance and Operations

•

determine migration scope

•

identify relevant data entities and elements based on given scenarios

•

establish migration strategy processes

Prepare data for migration and migrate data •

identify and extract source data

•

generate field mapping between source and target data structures

•

support the transition between the existing and migrated systems

•

perform a test migration and validate output from the process

Validate and support the solution (15-20%) Implement and validate the solution within Microsoft Dynamics 365 Finance and Operations •

perform user acceptance testing (UAT)

•

build test scripts to test business functionality

•

demonstrate the correlation between test scripts and business requirements

•

monitor validation test progress and make ad hoc changes during validation testing to correct identified issues

Support Application Lifecycle Management (ALM) by using LCS •

perform a solution gap analysis

•

use LCS tools to identify, report, and resolve issues

www.dynamicscompanions.com Dynamics Companions

- 12 -

DYNAMICS COMPANIONS CERTIFICATION EXAM STUDY GUIDE

EXAM MB-300: MICROSOFT DYNAMICS 365 UNIFIED OPERATIONS CORE

Course MB-300T01: Core common features of Dynamics 365 for Finance and Operations Link: https://www.microsoft.com/en-us/learning/course.aspx?cid=MB-300T01 Organizations use Dynamics 365 for Finance and Operations to reduce operational costs and rapidly respond to changing business needs. This solution lets organizations achieve these goals. This course discusses core components of Microsoft Dynamics 365 for Finance and Operations.

www.dynamicscompanions.com Dynamics Companions

- 13 -

DYNAMICS COMPANIONS CERTIFICATION EXAM STUDY GUIDE

EXAM MB-300: MICROSOFT DYNAMICS 365 UNIFIED OPERATIONS CORE

Module 1: Get Started with Dynamics 365 for Finance and Operations This module provides an understanding of what Dynamics 365 for Finance and Operations is, and the industries that it supports. It describes the modules in Finance and Operations, and the purpose of the features in those modules and how they support the industry-specific areas. Lessons •

Introduction

•

Industry focus

•

Introduction to financial management

•

Introduction to employee management

•

Introduction to supply chain management

•

Module summary

You will have an understanding of what Finance and Operations is, and the industries that it supports. You will be familiar with the modules in Finance and Operations, and the purpose of the features in those modules and how they support the industry-specific areas.

www.dynamicscompanions.com Dynamics Companions

- 14 -

DYNAMICS COMPANIONS CERTIFICATION EXAM STUDY GUIDE

EXAM MB-300: MICROSOFT DYNAMICS 365 UNIFIED OPERATIONS CORE

Introduction to Dynamics 365 for Finance and Operations Link: https://docs.microsoft.com/en-us/learn/modules/introduction-to-dynamics-365-financeops/index Microsoft Dynamics 365 for Finance and Operations is a business management solution that unifies your view of global financials and business operations, automates and streamlines business processes, and helps you manage your business and make fast, informed decisions. Finance and Operations helps businesses adapt quickly to changing market demands and drive rapid business growth. In this module, you will learn about: •

The specific industries which Finance and Operations focuses on.

•

Financial management

•

Employee management

•

Supply chain management

Introduction Link: https://docs.microsoft.com/en-us/learn/modules/introduction-to-dynamics-365-financeops/1-intro-to-f-and-o-introduction Organizations use Dynamics 365 for Finance and Operations to reduce operational costs and rapidly respond to changing business needs. This solution lets organizations achieve these goals.

Elevate your financial performance By using Finance and Operations you can close books faster, deliver robust reporting, increase profitability with business intelligence, and ensure global compliance at global scale. Finance and Operations increases your business profitability by driving margin revenue growth with a centralized, global financial management solution that delivers robust financial intelligence and embedded analytics in real time. You can empower employees with role-based workspaces that provide intelligent automation, task prioritization, and integration with Microsoft Office 365 applications to maximize efficiency for superior business outcome. Also, you will minimize operational costs across business geographies with financial process automation, encumbrance, budget planning, budget control, and three-way matching.

www.dynamicscompanions.com Dynamics Companions

- 15 -

DYNAMICS COMPANIONS CERTIFICATION EXAM STUDY GUIDE

EXAM MB-300: MICROSOFT DYNAMICS 365 UNIFIED OPERATIONS CORE

Finance and Operations adjusts to changing financial requirements with a flexible, guided, rules-based chart of accounts, dimensions, and global tax engine. It also efficiently tracks values and reduces reporting errors with centralized, automated processes for managing your capitalized assets from acquisition through disposal.

Run smarter with connected operations Finance and Operations gives you the flexibility to create an ideal manufacturing mix from discrete, lean, and process in a single, unified solution to support your processes across the supply chain. It optimizes manufacturing parameters for each product family, including make to stock, make to order, pull to order, configure to order, and engineer to order. It simplifies resource management by streamlining scheduling with real-time visibility into resources, using a unified resource model and scheduling engine. All of this means that the flow of manufacturing material and finished goods is optimized with advanced warehouse and logistics management.

Automate and streamline your supply chain Finance and Operations modernizes business logistics by optimizing fulfillment and reducing costs by synchronizing logistics across sites, warehouses, and transportation modes. It enables businesses to deliver timely and faster response to customer demand by automating a seamless coordination of order-to-cash processes. By using Finance and Operations you get ahead with predictive insights, gain visibility, and control across all sites and warehouses for proactive responses to issues using dynamics financial analysis. it also reduces procurement costs and helps gain greater control by automating procure-to-pay processes. You can seamlessly connect sales and purchasing with logistics, production, and warehouse management for a 360-degree view of your supply chain. Finance and Operations accelerates time to market and adapts the application to your needs with nocode visual editors and tools that make it easy to build and deploy web and mobile apps. This no-code approach enables users to easily configure frequently changing legal requirements for regulatory reports, e-invoices, payment formats, and tax rules.

Industry focus in Finance and Operations Link: https://docs.microsoft.com/en-us/learn/modules/introduction-to-dynamics-365-financeops/2-industry-focus-in-f-and-o Finance and Operations helps businesses adapt quickly to changing market demands and drive rapid business growth. It supports global organizations by managing multisite operations through shared master data and business processes in a single instance. It is designed to support operational workloads for different industries as illustrated below.

www.dynamicscompanions.com Dynamics Companions

- 16 -

DYNAMICS COMPANIONS CERTIFICATION EXAM STUDY GUIDE

EXAM MB-300: MICROSOFT DYNAMICS 365 UNIFIED OPERATIONS CORE

Manufacturing Finance and Operations provides rich functionality for production control and master planning in the process manufacturing, discrete manufacturing, and lean manufacturing industries. In addition, a blended approach can be taken so all three technologies and methodologies are used in one implementation, which is called unified manufacturing also known as mixed mode manufacturing.

Distribution For the distribution industry, Finance and Operations offers rich warehouse and transportation management functionality to help with trucking and warehouse operations such as picking through wireless devices. The Inventory management module offers rich functionality to help configure items and warehouses to maximize productivity.

Retail For the retail industry, Finance and Operations supports brick and mortar stores by offering a rich pointof-sale application out of the box. There is deep functionality for call centers, including customer service and payment functionality embedded right into the application. Additionally, the e-Commerce solution offers a website platform and out-of-the-box sites that can kickstart e-Commerce integrations.

www.dynamicscompanions.com Dynamics Companions

- 17 -

DYNAMICS COMPANIONS CERTIFICATION EXAM STUDY GUIDE

EXAM MB-300: MICROSOFT DYNAMICS 365 UNIFIED OPERATIONS CORE

Financial management The financial management functionality in Finance and Operations provides fast, reliable, and comprehensive accounting, financial reporting, and analysis. It also provides the functionality that organizations need to efficiently update accounts and comply with reporting requirements.

Public sector For the public sector, there are many features that have been designed specifically to help meet the demanding requirements for financials such as fund accounting, grants, and advanced project accounting functionality.

Services For the services industry, there are tools for advanced dispatching, subscriptions, and project accounting to help pull everything together into one place to allow easier management.

Employee management An agile employee management system can help companies quickly develop their organization to meet the challenges of a fluctuating business environment. Finance and Operations streamlines many routine record-keeping tasks and automates several processes that are related to staffing your organization. It also provides a framework for Human Resources (HR) staff to manage areas of oversight. These areas include employee recruitment and retention, benefits administration, training, performance reviews, and change management. In a single solution, Finance and Operations helps enterprises meet their business requirements easily with deliberately built capabilities for the following industries: Manufacturing, Finance, Distribution, Financial management, Retail, Employee management, Public sector, and Services. In addition, the same single solution can support specific business requirements easily by extending the industry foundation with packaged vertical solutions from the Microsoft Partner Network.

Financial management Link: https://docs.microsoft.com/en-us/learn/modules/introduction-to-dynamics-365-financeops/3-financial-management-intro The financial management functionality in Finance and Operations provides fast, reliable, and comprehensive accounting, financial reporting, and analysis. It also provides all the functionality that you need to update accounts efficiently and comply with reporting requirements. It consists of the following modules:

www.dynamicscompanions.com Dynamics Companions

- 18 -

DYNAMICS COMPANIONS CERTIFICATION EXAM STUDY GUIDE

EXAM MB-300: MICROSOFT DYNAMICS 365 UNIFIED OPERATIONS CORE

•

General ledger - Use General ledger to define and manage the legal entity’s financial records. The general ledger is a register of debit and credit entries.

•

Cash and bank management - You can use Cash and bank management to maintain the legal entity’s bank accounts and the financial instruments that are associated with those bank accounts. These instruments include deposit slips, checks, bills of exchange, and promissory notes. You can also reconcile bank statements and print bank data on standard reports.

•

Tax - The sales tax framework supports many types of indirect taxes, such as sales tax, valueadded tax (VAT), goods and services tax (GST), unit-based fees, and withholding tax. These taxes are calculated and documented during purchase and sales transactions. Periodically, they must be reported and paid to tax authorities.

•

Accounts payable - You can set up Accounts payable, configure vendor invoices, and vendor payments, and perform settlements.

•

Accounts receivable - You can set up Accounts receivable, credit and collections, payments, and perform settlements.

•

Credit and collections - Credit and collections managers can use this central view to manage collections. Collections agents can begin the collections process from customer lists that are generated by using predefined collection criteria, or from the Customers page.

•

Budgeting - With proper budgeting process, businesses can benefit from forecasting and financial insights to compare actuals against allocated budget. You can use this module for basic budgeting, budget planning, and budget control.

•

Fixed assets - Fixed assets are items of value, such as buildings, vehicles, land, and equipment, which are owned by an individual or organization.

•

Consolidations - Financial reporting can consolidate multiple companies during report generation. Although the data is stored in a data mart, is versioned, and can be exported, every source company is the owner and container of the data. The report can be run at any time, even every minute (for example). It provides many additional benefits, such as the ability to drill down to all companies and dimensions.

•

Cost accounting - Cost accounting lets you collect data from various sources, such as the general ledger, sub-ledgers, budgets, and statistical information. You can then analyze, summarize, and evaluate cost data, so that management can make the best possible decisions for price updates, budgets, cost control, and so on.

•

Cost management - Cost management lets you work with the valuation and accounting of raw materials, semi-finished goods, finished goods, and work-in-progress assets. It is the process of defining, managing, and reporting Inventory accounting and Manufacturing accounting. You can define cost policies in the following areas: o o o o o

Predetermined cost Inventory accounting Manufacturing accounting Indirect cost accounting Ledger integration

www.dynamicscompanions.com Dynamics Companions

- 19 -

DYNAMICS COMPANIONS CERTIFICATION EXAM STUDY GUIDE

EXAM MB-300: MICROSOFT DYNAMICS 365 UNIFIED OPERATIONS CORE

Employee management Link: https://docs.microsoft.com/en-us/learn/modules/introduction-to-dynamics-365-financeops/4-employee-management-intro

Finance and Operations streamlines many routine record-keeping tasks and automates several processes that are related to staffing your organization. It also provides a framework for Human Resources (HR) staff to manage areas of oversight. These areas include employee recruitment and retention, benefits administration, training, performance reviews, and change management. You can use Finance and Operations to perform these tasks: •

Administer organizational structures.

•

Maintain comprehensive worker information from hire to retire.

•

Define and administer benefit plans, enroll workers, assign dependent coverage, and designate beneficiaries.

•

Establish long-term leave policies.

•

Implement and track profile-based time management and generate pay information to export to a payroll system.

•

Manage worker competencies.

•

Review performance and implement worker goals.

•

Set up, deliver, and analyze training courses that include agendas, sessions, and tracks.

•

Recruit workers, and track applicants.

www.dynamicscompanions.com Dynamics Companions

- 20 -

DYNAMICS COMPANIONS CERTIFICATION EXAM STUDY GUIDE

EXAM MB-300: MICROSOFT DYNAMICS 365 UNIFIED OPERATIONS CORE

Typically, after a company sets a budget for new positions, it will create jobs and positions in Finance and Operations. Depending on the system setup, this process might already be done at that point. When jobs and positions are created, a recruitment project can be created to help set up applications for the positions. Applicants will complete their applications in the system. After a hiring decision is made, a worker can be hired. After a worker is hired, several tasks must be performed to maintain the worker's information. Here are some examples: •

Entering benefits and compensation.

•

Creating goals for the worker.

•

Entering competencies for the worker.

•

Creating an injury or illness case if an incident occurs.

Expense management Use expense management in Finance and Operations to create an integrated workflow where you can store payment method information, import credit card transactions, and track the money that employees are spending when they incur expenses for your business. You can also define expense policies and automate the reimbursement of travel expenses.

Time and attendance Time registration workers can enter different types of time registrations, for example, clock in, clock out, register indirect activities, and absence registration.

Questionnaire You can customize a questionnaire to fit your specific requirements by using various features that are available in Finance and Operations. Here are some examples of how questionnaires can be used: •

Test the professional skills of employees and applicants.

•

Evaluate whether course participants learned the course material.

•

Evaluate a course (for example, the facilities, content, and instructor).

•

Survey employee and customer satisfaction.

•

Evaluate employee job performance.

Payroll The Payroll functionality and module in Finance and Operations is currently only available in the United States. www.dynamicscompanions.com Dynamics Companions

- 21 -

DYNAMICS COMPANIONS CERTIFICATION EXAM STUDY GUIDE

EXAM MB-300: MICROSOFT DYNAMICS 365 UNIFIED OPERATIONS CORE

Supply chain management Link: https://docs.microsoft.com/en-us/learn/modules/introduction-to-dynamics-365-financeops/5-supply-chain-management-intro Supply chain management in Finance and Operations helps businesses manage materials, information, and transactions as they move through the process from the vendor to the manufacturer, and then to the retailer, and finally to the end customer. The three goals of supply chain management are: •

Reducing inventory

•

Lowering costs

•

Improving time-to-market

The following modules in Finance and Operations support the supply chain management flow.

Procurement and sourcing Procurement and sourcing covers all the steps from identifying a need for product and services through procuring the product, receipt, invoicing, and processing of payment with vendors. Procurement processes can be configured toward specific business needs by defining purchasing policies and workflows.

Sales and marketing You can use sales and marketing to obtain, store, and use various types of data in the sales flow. This data includes the original sales initiative, future follow-up action, and additional sales.

Product information management Product information is the backbone of supply chain and retail applications across all industries. It refers to processes and technologies that focus on centrally managing information about products (for example, across supply chains). It's important that shared product definitions, documentation, attributes, and identifiers be used. In the various modules of a business solution, product-specific information and configuration are required to manage the business processes that are related to specific products, product families, or product categories.

Master planning Master planning allows companies to determine and balance the future need for raw materials and capacity to meet company goals.

www.dynamicscompanions.com Dynamics Companions

- 22 -

DYNAMICS COMPANIONS CERTIFICATION EXAM STUDY GUIDE

EXAM MB-300: MICROSOFT DYNAMICS 365 UNIFIED OPERATIONS CORE

Master planning assesses the following: •

What raw materials and capacities are currently available?

•

What raw materials and capacities are required to complete production?

For example, what must be manufactured, purchased, transferred, or set aside as safety stock before you can complete production.

Production control Finance and Operations provides rich functionality for production control and master planning in the process manufacturing, discrete manufacturing, and lean manufacturing environments. A blended approach can be taken so all three technologies and methodologies are used in one implementation, this is known as unified manufacturing or mixed mode manufacturing.

Inventory management You can control inbound and outbound operations, as well as perform quality control, management, and inventory control.

Warehouse management Warehouse management is fully integrated with other business processes in Finance and Operations such as transportation, manufacturing, quality control, purchase, transfer, sales, and returns.

Transportation management Transportation management lets you use your company’s transportation, and lets you identify vendor and routing solutions for inbound and outbound orders. For example, you can identify the fastest route or the least expensive rate for a shipment.

Project management and accounting Project management and accounting provides a strong platform to help companies effectively administer projects and achieve the results that they want. As the demand for faster and better service increases, so does the pressure to automate processes and balance costs associated with projects and service requests. For the growing number of companies that provide services to customers, either as their core business or in addition to their products, the challenge is to effectively manage knowledge, opportunities, and resources. Project accounting provides a strong platform to help companies effectively administer projects and achieve the results that they want.

www.dynamicscompanions.com Dynamics Companions

- 23 -

DYNAMICS COMPANIONS CERTIFICATION EXAM STUDY GUIDE

EXAM MB-300: MICROSOFT DYNAMICS 365 UNIFIED OPERATIONS CORE

Audit workbench You can use audit policies to evaluate expense reports, vendor invoices, and purchase orders to make sure that they comply with policy rules that you create. All the rules that are associated with an audit policy are run in batch mode, according to a schedule that you specify. Each policy rule is an instance of a policy rule type. For each policy rule type, only one policy rule can be active at a time.

Check your knowledge Link: https://docs.microsoft.com/en-us/learn/modules/introduction-to-dynamics-365-financeops/7-intro-to-f-and-o-knowledge-check

Introduction to Dynamics 365 for Finance and Operations knowledge check 1.

Which module in Finance and Operations enables companies to view the violation of vendor invoices or expense reports? a.

Accounts payable

b. Audit workbench c.

Expense management

d. Procurement and sourcing 2.

Which feature in Finance and Operations includes the basic capabilities of general ledger, tax, accounts receivable, accounts payable, bank management, and budgeting? a.

Financial management

b. Supply chain management c.

Project and service

Summary Link: https://docs.microsoft.com/en-us/learn/modules/introduction-to-dynamics-365-financeops/6-intro-to-f-and-o-summary You now have an understanding of what Finance and Operations is, and the industries that it supports. You learned about the modules in Finance and Operations, and the purpose of the features in those modules and how they support the industry-specific areas. Continue to the next module to learn how to navigate in Finance and Operations, and quickly find the pages that you need to complete your tasks.

www.dynamicscompanions.com Dynamics Companions

- 24 -

DYNAMICS COMPANIONS CERTIFICATION EXAM STUDY GUIDE

www.dynamicscompanions.com Dynamics Companions

EXAM MB-300: MICROSOFT DYNAMICS 365 UNIFIED OPERATIONS CORE

- 25 -

DYNAMICS COMPANIONS CERTIFICATION EXAM STUDY GUIDE

EXAM MB-300: MICROSOFT DYNAMICS 365 UNIFIED OPERATIONS CORE

Module 2: Get Started with Lifecycle Services Microsoft Dynamics Lifecycle Services (LCS) is a collaborative workspace that customers and their partners use to manage Dynamics 365 for Finance and Operations projects from pre-sales to implementation and finally to the production environment either on the cloud or on-premise. It provides checklists and tools that help you manage the project including methodologies that can help you manage your implementation process. Lessons •

Understand the functionality and tools of Lifecycle Services

•

Reuse existing assets, copy and share data

•

Understand Task recorder functionality

•

Create a business process model

•

Run the LCS Issue Search tool and analyze results

•

Learn how to use Regression Suite Automation Tool

•

Practice Labs

•

Module Summary

You will be able to: •

Understand the functionality and tools of Lifecycle services (LCS) for Finance and Operations.

•

Reuse existing assets, copy, and share data.

•

Understand Task recorder functionality.

•

Create a business process model.

•

Identify and analyze gaps using the Business process modeler (BPM).

•

Run the LCS Issue Search tool and analyze results.

www.dynamicscompanions.com Dynamics Companions

- 26 -

DYNAMICS COMPANIONS CERTIFICATION EXAM STUDY GUIDE

EXAM MB-300: MICROSOFT DYNAMICS 365 UNIFIED OPERATIONS CORE

Get started with Lifecycle Services for Dynamics 365 for Finance and Operations Link: https://docs.microsoft.com/en-us/learn/modules/get-started-with-lcs/ To install and maintain Microsoft Dynamics 365 for Finance and Operations in the Microsoft Azure cloud or on-premises you need to use Microsoft Dynamics Lifecycle Services (LCS) to manage the process. Let’s get started by looking at the overall functionality and tools available within LCS. In this module, you will: •

Understand the functionality and tools of Lifecycle services (LCS) for Finance and Operations

•

Reuse existing assets, copy and share data

•

Understand Task recorder functionality

•

Create a business process model

•

Identify and analyze gaps using the Business Process Modeler

•

Run the LCS Issue Search tool and analyze results

Introduction Link: https://docs.microsoft.com/en-us/learn/modules/get-started-with-lcs/1-get-started-with-lcsintroduction Microsoft Dynamics Lifecycle Services (LCS) is a collaborative workspace that customers and their partners use to manage Dynamics 365 for Finance and Operations projects from pre-sales to implementation and finally to the production environment either on the cloud or on-premise. It provides checklists and tools that help you manage the project including methodologies that can help you manage your implementation process. The goal of LCS is to deliver the right information, at the right time, to the right people, and to help ensure repeatable, predictable success with each roll-out of an implementation, update, or upgrade. LCS is available to customers and partners by default with their subscriptions. You need to sign in to LCS here: https://lcs.dynamics.com/v2 . We recommend that you make the most of your investment in the Microsoft Dynamics 365 platform by signing up for the customer success service from Microsoft, known as FastTrack for Dynamics 365. To learn more about FastTrack see: https://www.microsoft.com/fasttrack/?rtc=1 .

www.dynamicscompanions.com Dynamics Companions

- 27 -

DYNAMICS COMPANIONS CERTIFICATION EXAM STUDY GUIDE

EXAM MB-300: MICROSOFT DYNAMICS 365 UNIFIED OPERATIONS CORE

Learning objectives In this module, you will: •

Understand the functionality and tools of Lifecycle services (LCS) for Finance and Operations.

•

Reuse existing assets, copy, and share data.

•

Understand Task recorder functionality.

•

Create a business process model.

•

Identify and analyze gaps using the Business process modeler (BPM).

•

Run the LCS Issue Search tool and analyze results.

Understand the functionality and tools of LCS Link: https://docs.microsoft.com/en-us/learn/modules/get-started-with-lcs/2-functionality-andtools-of-lcs Lifecycles Services (LCS) is the central repository for most of the tools that you use to prepare and deploy a project for Finance and Operations. LCS is a cloud-based collaboration workspace where all the key information about a project is stored. This information can include information about project phases and a collective repository named the Asset library. All this information can be made available to project members. The LCS Project workspace provides an outlined methodology showing each phase of your project and provides high-level milestones that are used to track deliverables and project goals. As the project progresses, environments can be deployed from within LCS. The project deployment tools allow environments of different sizes to be deployed and controlled from within the project. The unified control of cloud-based environments within LCS allow environments deployed from within LCS to be monitored and controlled. LCS provides environment-aware tools to search for issues that may be occurring within the environment, search for knowledge base issues with known fixes, and apply the fixes to the environments in a controlled manner.

Tools that are provided in LCS Let’s get familiar with tools available in LCS. These tools assist you to manage the lifecycle of a Finance and Operations implementation. The following list highlights the tools that are provided in LCS and a description of the phases that each tool applies to. •

Projects - Projects are the key organizer for your experience in LCS and let you invite your colleagues, partners and customers to collaborate with you, and they also let you track progress.

www.dynamicscompanions.com Dynamics Companions

- 28 -

DYNAMICS COMPANIONS CERTIFICATION EXAM STUDY GUIDE

EXAM MB-300: MICROSOFT DYNAMICS 365 UNIFIED OPERATIONS CORE

When the required project requirements are defined in LCS methodology, it will help team members to understand expected deliverables at different phases of implementation. Every phase must have a milestone before it moves to the next phase, and its achievement should be measured by the deliverables that resulted in the phase. â&#x20AC;˘

Methodologies - Methodologies provide a tool that you can use to ensure more repeatable, predictable implementation projects. You can use one of our methodologies or create your own. By using a methodology, you can easily track and report on your progress.

A methodology is a systematic analysis of methods applied to achieve one or many goals. There are many methodologies available in LCS that you can benefit from, such as cloud and on-premises implementation, and upgrade to the latest release versions of the Finance and Operations.

www.dynamicscompanions.com Dynamics Companions

- 29 -

DYNAMICS COMPANIONS CERTIFICATION EXAM STUDY GUIDE

EXAM MB-300: MICROSOFT DYNAMICS 365 UNIFIED OPERATIONS CORE

You can create your own methodologies and use them in a project in LCS to streamline the tasks and activities throughout the implementation life cycle. A methodology should be refined over the course of the cycle to ensure that it adapts to any changes in the Finance and Operations environment. A methodology comprises various tools, such as phased workflows, individual process workflows, process procedures, templates, samples, aids, instructions, responsibility, accountability, authority, risks, and issues, all carried out to deliver the product or service. By using a methodology that covers all the important goals of the implementation phase, your team gains efficiency, works smarter, and can build an environment of continuous process improvement. It also provides clear expectations and increases the probability and likelihood of a successful implementation of Finance and Operations. â&#x20AC;˘

Preview feature management - Previews are intended to be used for development and testing purposes only. Public previews are enabled by default for users who want to evaluate them.

www.dynamicscompanions.com Dynamics Companions

- 30 -

DYNAMICS COMPANIONS CERTIFICATION EXAM STUDY GUIDE

EXAM MB-300: MICROSOFT DYNAMICS 365 UNIFIED OPERATIONS CORE

•

Organization users - Users can access organization-specific information such as business process libraries and methodologies. Organization users do not have access to specific projects until they have been invited to join them.

•

Solution management - This is a collection of different artifacts, such as deployable software packages, logos, and custom reports, that can be applied to a new project, so when the environment will be deployed it will include all the artifacts.

•

Shared asset library: This is a repository of packages and database backups that can be applied to a deployed environment such as Cortana intelligence application, Software deployable package, and Power BI report model.

www.dynamicscompanions.com Dynamics Companions

- 31 -

DYNAMICS COMPANIONS CERTIFICATION EXAM STUDY GUIDE

EXAM MB-300: MICROSOFT DYNAMICS 365 UNIFIED OPERATIONS CORE

•

Manage incidents - By using this tool you can view and export all incidents for a selected LCS project.

•

Set up Visual Studio Team Services - Connects Azure DevOps (formerly known as Visual Studio Team Services, or Visual Studio Online) to a lifecycle service project. This allows a development environment to connect to a central repository for code and software deployable packages, and creates incidents for the team or submits an incident to the Microsoft support team.

•

Business process modeler - Business process modeler (BPM) lets you create, view, and modify standard process flows. By using BPM, you can achieve the following goals: o

Standardize process flows.

Align your business processes with industry-standard processes, as described by the American Productivity & Quality Center (APQC).

Identify fit and gaps between user requirements and the default functionality that Microsoft Dynamics products provide.

Some of the business processes have a corresponding diagram. You also can use Task recorder and save the result to LCS, and the diagram will automatically be created, as shown below.

www.dynamicscompanions.com Dynamics Companions

- 32 -

DYNAMICS COMPANIONS CERTIFICATION EXAM STUDY GUIDE

EXAM MB-300: MICROSOFT DYNAMICS 365 UNIFIED OPERATIONS CORE

•

Cloud-hosted environments - Cloud-hosted environments is a tool that you can use to deploy Microsoft Dynamics environments on Microsoft Azure. When you use cloud-hosted environments, you must select the type of environment to deploy, such as a demo, developer/test, or production environment.

•

Support - Cloud-powered support helps you manage support incidents.

•

Report production outage - This feature is available to all customers who have purchased Finance and Operations and have implementation projects with a production environment deployed in LCS.

www.dynamicscompanions.com Dynamics Companions

- 33 -

DYNAMICS COMPANIONS CERTIFICATION EXAM STUDY GUIDE

EXAM MB-300: MICROSOFT DYNAMICS 365 UNIFIED OPERATIONS CORE

The Report production outage feature provides a quick and effective channel to escalate issues to Microsoft Support if the services in a production environment are degraded or become unavailable. It allows users to report service degradation or performance issues in the production environment. •

Configuration and data manager - Configuration and data manager (preview) lets you copy a configuration from one instance to another. You can copy from and to environments that meet the following criteria: they are managed as part of an LCS project and they run the Data Import Export Framework (DIXF).

•

Code upgrade - Customization analysis validates model files against best practices and provides a report of potential areas for improvement.

•

Issue search - Issue search helps you find existing solutions and workarounds for known issues in Microsoft Dynamics products. You can see which issues have been fixed, which issues remain open, and which issues have been resolved as “won’t fix". There are two types of monitoring to view the health of an environment through LCS via availability and health monitoring: o

Environment monitoring - Telemetry data helps build a storyboard view that shows what that user and other users were doing when the issue was reported. It gives you information about the state spanning user load, activity load, SQL, server utilization, and so on spread across a configurable time scale.

Full system diagnostics: Monitors the deployed Finance and Operations environments for messages, status of jobs, report views. It also collects statistics of the collectors agents from Finance and Operations to analyze performance detail.

•

Translation service - Use Dynamics Translation Service to translate your solutions or add a new language for supported Dynamics products.

•

RFP responses - The RFP responses page helps partners respond to requests for proposals (RFPs).

•

Upgrade analysis - Upgrade analysis helps you plan your upgrade to the latest version of Finance and Operations by analyzing code artifacts from Microsoft Dynamics AX 4.0, Dynamics AX 2009, Dynamics AX 2012, or even earlier versions.

•

Work items - This shows all incidents as work item Azure DevOps that is connected to an LCS project

•

Azure DevOps - You must create a Visual Studio Online project, then in LCS click Setup Visual Studio Team Services to connect and authorize the LCS to connect to your Visual Studio project. This is necessary in order to create work items. (Azure DevOps is also known as VSTS.)

LCS security Link: https://docs.microsoft.com/en-us/learn/modules/get-started-with-lcs/3-lcs-security This unit will help you understand how you can add users to projects within Lifecycle Services (LCS) and which users might require access to certain features within LCS.

www.dynamicscompanions.com Dynamics Companions

- 34 -

DYNAMICS COMPANIONS CERTIFICATION EXAM STUDY GUIDE

EXAM MB-300: MICROSOFT DYNAMICS 365 UNIFIED OPERATIONS CORE

To create a user in LCS, you must first identify where the user comes from. The user might be present in the customer's Azure Active Directory (AD) domain as a native user. The user might be invited to the customer's Azure AD as a guest. Or, the user might come from a foreign Azure AD tenancy. You will need to invite the user to the LCS project by using the user's Azure AD login ID. This will not always be the same as their email address but often is. After the user is invited to the LCS project, that user is automatically created in the LCS organization. Before you begin to add users to Finance and Operations, you must know what domain that user is in. This user could be in a Microsoft account or another external Azure AD domain, or the user could be in the same tenant as the Azure AD presence of the application. You can get this information from your network administrator. You must know the user's email. In Finance and Operations each user must be assigned an internal user ID. This user ID must not exceed 20 characters and may not be duplicated within the environment. This user ID can match the prefix of the user's email. If the user is in the same Azure AD tenant, the Import button can be used to load the user directly into Finance and Operations from Azure AD. All users in an LCS project can collaborate with each other during the implementation, follow the methodology, share artifacts using Microsoft OneDrive or SharePoint folders.

Microsoft Azure subscription To deploy Finance and Operations to Microsoft Azure via an LCS project, you must have an Azure subscription, grant appropriate access permissions to the Azure resource named Dynamics Deployment Services, and finally you must enable the Azure resource manager (ARM). To use Azure resource manager (ARM) based deployment, the tenant administrator of the organization that owns the subscription must grant access to the applications on the tenant. To do this, or to verify if this exercise has already been completed, click the Authorize link for the tenant that owns the subscription that you will use for deployment. If access has not been granted, or if you are not the administrator of the tenant, ask your administrator to complete the activity so that you can deploy ARMbased topologies through LCS. After the Dynamics Deployment Services [wsfed-enabled] was assigned a role as contributor, you can continue with downloading the certificate. This certificate must be uploaded to your Azure subscription, to establish connectivity between LCS and Azure portal. Without this link you cannot deploy Finance and Operations in Azure cloud.

Reuse existing assets, copy and share data Link: https://docs.microsoft.com/en-us/learn/modules/get-started-with-lcs/4-reuse-existingassets-copy-and-share-data

www.dynamicscompanions.com Dynamics Companions

- 35 -

DYNAMICS COMPANIONS CERTIFICATION EXAM STUDY GUIDE

EXAM MB-300: MICROSOFT DYNAMICS 365 UNIFIED OPERATIONS CORE

The Asset library is the data framework that ties everything together in a Lifecycle Services (LCS) project for Finance and Operations. It stores various types of assets for the project or organization level. The assets can be deployed through environments. A shared Asset library and project-level Asset libraries are available in LCS for your use. •

Shared asset library – The Shared asset library is used by Microsoft and partners to share assets across multiple tenants, projects, and environments in LCS. This library can be accessed by any user who signs in to LCS. To access the Shared asset library, sign in to LCS, and then click the Shared asset library tile.

•

Project-level asset library – The project-level Asset library is used to share assets across environments within a project in LCS. This library can be accessed by all users within a project. To access the project-level Asset library, sign in to LCS, and open a project. Then, on the hamburger menu, click Asset library.

You can access the project-level Asset library by signing in to https://lcs.dynamics.com/v2 . Select a project and then click the Asset library tile.

Each project in LCS will have a separate Asset library. The Asset library is the data framework that houses various types of assets, such as data packages and software updates. You will also see the Asset library tile on the right side when you initially sign in to LCS before you select a project. Assets can be transferred between certain projects, asset libraries, and your personal Asset library.

www.dynamicscompanions.com Dynamics Companions

- 36 -

DYNAMICS COMPANIONS CERTIFICATION EXAM STUDY GUIDE

EXAM MB-300: MICROSOFT DYNAMICS 365 UNIFIED OPERATIONS CORE

Your Shared asset library contains assets that are visible to others in your organization. This Asset library contains updates from Microsoft. Assets can be imported from your Shared asset library to a project Asset library.

Similarly, assets can be saved to your Shared asset library from a project’s Asset library.

Asset types The Asset library supports multiple types of assets. Here are some asset types that you can frequently use: •

Software deployable package – This asset type represents all the packages that are used to update an environment with the latest set of updates.

•

Data package – This asset type stores assets that are used for configuration and data management.

•

GER configuration – This asset type stores all localization and translation assets that are applied to the client.

•

Dynamics 365 for Retail SDK – This asset type stores all the latest scripts for the Retail software development kit (SDK).

Deployable package A deployable package is a unit of deployment that can be applied to any Finance and Operations environment. It can consist of a binary hot fix to the AOS runtime component, an updated Finance and Operations application package, or a new Dynamics 365 application package. A deployable package is initially created in the development environment in Visual Studio. These can also be released as updates by Microsoft, which would be made available for a download in LCS. A

www.dynamicscompanions.com Dynamics Companions

- 37 -

DYNAMICS COMPANIONS CERTIFICATION EXAM STUDY GUIDE

EXAM MB-300: MICROSOFT DYNAMICS 365 UNIFIED OPERATIONS CORE

deployment package can be used on one or many packages in the system. Each package can also contain one or more models. In Visual Studio you can select one or more models to your base package on the beginning of the export process. A zip file will be created that contains all the model elements, compiled code, as well as some generated scripts and DLLs. The user interface in LCS will allow you to deploy these packages to existing environments. LCS also supports the automated deployment of platform packages to new environments.

Asset scopes Every asset that the Asset library supports has multiple scopes. Here are some of the supported asset scopes: •

Me – When an asset is uploaded, it's set to the Me scope. An asset that has the Me scope is visible only to the person who uploaded the asset.

•

Project – When a project is imported from the Global scope to another project, it's set to the Project scope.

•

Organization – When an asset must be shared with multiple users within a tenant, the tenant admin can promote the asset to the Organization scope.

•

Global – Only Microsoft can upload assets to the Global scope. These assets are made publicly available to all LCS projects and users.

Asset status Every asset has one of two statuses: •

Draft – The asset can still be edited.

•

Published – The asset is published at an Organization or Global scope, and edits are completed.

Perform actions in the Asset library Link: https://docs.microsoft.com/en-us/learn/modules/get-started-with-lcs/5-perform-actions-inasset-library In this unit you will learn how to perform various actions in the Asset library.

Upload an asset to the Asset library 1.

Select the tab to upload the asset to.

Click the plus sign (+).

Enter a name and description for the asset.

www.dynamicscompanions.com Dynamics Companions

- 38 -

DYNAMICS COMPANIONS CERTIFICATION EXAM STUDY GUIDE

EXAM MB-300: MICROSOFT DYNAMICS 365 UNIFIED OPERATIONS CORE

Upload the file for the asset, and then click Confirm.

Upload a new version for a specific asset 1.

Select the asset in the Asset library.

On the toolbar, click the Upload button.

Repeat the steps in the previous procedure, "Upload an asset to the Asset library."

On the toolbar, click Versions to view multiple versions for a single asset.

Move assets from the global Asset library to the project-level Asset library There are two ways to move an asset from the global Asset library to the project-level Asset library: you can import the asset or copy it.

Import from the global Asset library Follow these steps to import an asset from the global Asset library to the project-level Asset library so that it can be applied across environments. 1.

In the project-level Asset library, select the tab for the asset type to import.

Click Import.

In the list of assets in the Shared asset library, select the asset to import, and then click Pick.

The selected asset is imported and put into the project-level Asset library. The status of the asset in the project-level Asset library is set to Published. This method is for packages that you don't plan to edit. If you want to edit an imported package, create a copy by using the following procedure. The status of the package will then be Draft.

Copy from the global Asset library Follow these steps to create a copy of an asset so that it can be edited. 1.

In the project-level Asset library, select the tab for the asset type to copy.

Select the asset to copy, and then, on the toolbar, click Copy. A copy of the published asset is created, and the status is set to Draft.

Save to my library After you've edited an asset, follow these steps to move the edited asset back to the Shared asset library so that it can be promoted to the Organization scope and shared with multiple customers. 1.

In the project-level Asset library, select the tab for the asset type to import. www.dynamicscompanions.com Dynamics Companions

- 39 -

DYNAMICS COMPANIONS CERTIFICATION EXAM STUDY GUIDE

EXAM MB-300: MICROSOFT DYNAMICS 365 UNIFIED OPERATIONS CORE

Select the asset that you want to save, and then click Save to my library. The asset is saved from the project-level Asset library back to the Shared asset library, and the scope is set to Me.

Work with the Task recorder Link: https://docs.microsoft.com/en-us/learn/modules/get-started-with-lcs/6-work-with-taskrecorder Task recorder is a tool in Finance and Operations that you can use to record actions that you take in the product user interface (UI). When you use Task recorder, all the events that you perform in the UI that are executed against the server, including adding values, changing settings, and removing data, are captured. Task recorder comes pre-installed with Finance and Operations, and you can begin recording business processes immediately after opening the web client . The steps that you record are collectively called a task recording. Any information that you enter into Finance and Operations while you are recording is captured and included in the recording file. If you decide to share the recording file, others may be able to see the information that was captured. Task recordings can be used in many ways. You can read the steps of the task recording in the Help pane of Finance and Operations, or you can choose to play the recording as a task guide so that it will guide you through the UI. A task guide is a controlled, guided, interactive experience through the steps of a business process. Task recordings can be saved to the Business Process Modeler (BPM) in Lifecycle Services (LCS). A list of steps and a business process flowchart will be generated from that recording. Task recordings that have been saved to a BPM library can be shown in Finance and Operations as help. Task recordings can also be saved as Microsoft Word documents or an XML file. This allows you to easily produce principle training guides. The Task recorder can take screen shots as you record a business process. These screen shots are used to generate the documents after you complete the recording. To have screen shots included in the generated document, an extension must be installed.

Task guides You can access task guides from the Help pane. Itâ&#x20AC;&#x2122;s important to note that task guides will not natively appear in the Help pane unless you have already connected to LCS. When you first click a task guide, the Help pane will show the step-by-step instructions for the task. To begin the guided, interactive experience, you can click Start task guide at the bottom of the Help pane. A pointer opens and indicates the action that you must perform. Follow the directions that appear in the UI, and enter data as directed.

www.dynamicscompanions.com Dynamics Companions

- 40 -

DYNAMICS COMPANIONS CERTIFICATION EXAM STUDY GUIDE

www.dynamicscompanions.com Dynamics Companions

EXAM MB-300: MICROSOFT DYNAMICS 365 UNIFIED OPERATIONS CORE

- 41 -

DYNAMICS COMPANIONS CERTIFICATION EXAM STUDY GUIDE

EXAM MB-300: MICROSOFT DYNAMICS 365 UNIFIED OPERATIONS CORE

To use Lifecycle Services, for your recordings, you must first authorize Finance and Operations to access LCS. Before connecting to the LCS project, you will want to make sure that a Business Process Modeler (BPM) library exists in the LCS project that you're working with.

After that, you can open Finance and Operations and go to System administration > Setup > System parameters. Click the Help tab to select an LCS project to connect to as shown in the following image.

www.dynamicscompanions.com Dynamics Companions

- 42 -

DYNAMICS COMPANIONS CERTIFICATION EXAM STUDY GUIDE

EXAM MB-300: MICROSOFT DYNAMICS 365 UNIFIED OPERATIONS CORE

You can select the BPM libraries within the selected project to retrieve task recordings. This is where it is important to already have an existing BPM library. You can set the display order of the BPM libraries. This determines the order in which task recordings from the library will appear in the help pane. When these steps have been completed, you can open the help pane in Finance and Operations and click the Task guides tab. You'll see the task guides that apply to the page that you're currently on in the system. If no task guides are found, you can enter keywords to refine your search.

Task recorder pane To open the task recorder, you can click the gear icon in the upper-right corner of Finance and Operations and select Task recorder. The Task recorder pane will open.

www.dynamicscompanions.com Dynamics Companions

- 43 -

DYNAMICS COMPANIONS CERTIFICATION EXAM STUDY GUIDE

EXAM MB-300: MICROSOFT DYNAMICS 365 UNIFIED OPERATIONS CORE

•

Create recording - This option allows you to create a new recording.

•

Play recording as guide - You can choose this option to see what your recording looks like when viewed as a Help topic or played as a task guide.

•

Edit recording - Select this option if you need to change the recording’s name, description, or the text that is displayed in the steps.

•

Playback recording - Choose this option if you need to move, add, or remove steps. You can also use this mode to automatically play a recording.

When you playback a task recording, there are several different options available to you. If no steps are currently playing, you will see the following options in the Task recorder pane.

www.dynamicscompanions.com Dynamics Companions

- 44 -

DYNAMICS COMPANIONS CERTIFICATION EXAM STUDY GUIDE

EXAM MB-300: MICROSOFT DYNAMICS 365 UNIFIED OPERATIONS CORE

•

Play next pending step - This option will cause Task recorder to execute and record the next pending step, which is indicated by the arrow in the Steps list.

•

Play to selected step - This option will cause Task recorder to begin playing and recording pending steps, beginning at the next pending step and pausing after playing the step that was selected in the list when this option was clicked. This option is greyed out when a step is not selected.

•

Play all pending steps - This option will cause Task recorder to play and record all remaining pending steps, until there are no remaining pending steps.

•

Start sub-task o

Delete step

www.dynamicscompanions.com Dynamics Companions

- 45 -

DYNAMICS COMPANIONS CERTIFICATION EXAM STUDY GUIDE

EXAM MB-300: MICROSOFT DYNAMICS 365 UNIFIED OPERATIONS CORE

Add developer placeholder

On the Task recorder pane, after selecting Play a recording, Edit recording, or Playback recording you will be asked where to access the task recording.

•

Open from this PC - This option allows you to open a recording that is saved on your computer.

•

Open from Lifecycle services - This option allows you to open a recording that has been saved to an LCS library.

•

Open from recents - This option allows you to pick from a list of Task recordings that you have recently created.

After your task recording is complete, you’ll be asked what you’d like to do with the recording. As you can see in the screenshot, there are four different options.

www.dynamicscompanions.com Dynamics Companions

- 46 -

DYNAMICS COMPANIONS CERTIFICATION EXAM STUDY GUIDE

EXAM MB-300: MICROSOFT DYNAMICS 365 UNIFIED OPERATIONS CORE

•

Save to this PC - This option allows you to save a recording to your computer.

•

Save to LCS - If you have proper rights in the Lifecycle Services project of the instance of Finance and Operations, this option allows you to save a recording to an LCS library.

•

Export as Word document - This option allows you to download a Word document that contains the list of steps in the recording.

•

Save as developer recording - You can also choose to download the recording as an XML file. This allows a developer to use the XML file as test file in Visual Studio.

Business process modeler (BPM) Link: https://docs.microsoft.com/en-us/learn/modules/get-started-with-lcs/7-business-processmodeler The Business process modeler (BPM) lets you create, view, and modify standard process flows inside Finance and Operations. BPM standardizes the process flows, documentation, and its usage throughout the implementation lifecycle. To create a business process model in Finance and Operations, you must use the Task recorder tool and save the task guide in the Lifecycle Services (LCS). The BPM tool includes public libraries, which you could create a copy of and use, or you can create a new one. You should use the existing business process libraries as a starting point and modify them according to your industry and organization needs.

www.dynamicscompanions.com Dynamics Companions

- 47 -

DYNAMICS COMPANIONS CERTIFICATION EXAM STUDY GUIDE

EXAM MB-300: MICROSOFT DYNAMICS 365 UNIFIED OPERATIONS CORE

Before connecting to an LCS project, it is important to first ensure that a BPM library exists in LCS. We recommend that you ensure a BPM library exists before selecting an LCS project to connect to. Setting the display order of BPM libraries is the last step in connecting to LCS. You can view the three types of libraries in BPM, as follows: •

Global libraries - These are available from Microsoft and can be used as a starting point to build your own.

•

Corporate libraries - These are libraries owned by your organization for any organization user to leverage.

•

My libraries - These are available to users within the LCS project with appropriate access.

The BPM library is divided into three sections: •

Views - You can author and edit, review, and merge your hierarchies with the configuration and data manager tool.

•

Process hierarchy - Here you can view/build your business process and requirements hierarchy.

•

Process details - Here you maintain more information for a specific reference/line in the hierarchy and include details such as countries applicable, industry applicable, and so on. Identify the fit and gaps between user requirements and the default functionality in Finance and Operations.

Business processes A business process is a collection of related, structural activities/requirements with interconnection among them, and which can be represented in a flowchart comprising decision points and dependencies. Many organizations follow the industry-specific terminology of business processes: •

Record to report - This describes the process of managing financial and ledger information for any organization.

•

Order to cash - This describes the process of receiving and processing customer sales and its entire lifecycle till their payment.

•

Procure to pay - This describes the process of ordering and processing vendor invoices and its entire lifecycle till payment settlement.

•

Plan to produce - This describes the process of creating and building products/services and its entire chain from demand to supply. Business processes are best described using flows and visuals and have several uses, such as training, testing, solution acceptance.

Each business process comprises one or many subprocesses in the functional domain. Sub-processes help in visualizing inter-dependencies within a business process and have links to other processes. A requirement is a series of activities/steps within a subprocess. Every organization must keep a goal of collecting the requirements as structured as possible, as it smooths out the rest of the project activities, to ensure success.

www.dynamicscompanions.com Dynamics Companions

- 48 -

DYNAMICS COMPANIONS CERTIFICATION EXAM STUDY GUIDE

EXAM MB-300: MICROSOFT DYNAMICS 365 UNIFIED OPERATIONS CORE

By using the Task recorder, you can capture a business process and save it into a node of a BPM library in LCS related to the project running the instance of Finance and Operations. This will automatically create the graphical representation of the business process. When your business processes are complete, you can export a business process node as a Microsoft Word document and use it as a training manual in the later phases of the project.

Gap analysis sessions During the gap analysis phase of implementation, you can use the BPM libraries and add your requirements associated with the customerâ&#x20AC;&#x2122;s business process. You can specify whether the requirement is out-of-box or a gap. Microsoft AppSource is a convenient place to find the right third-party solution for a specific gap functionality. You can then use the BPM library to view all the processes and gaps to identify the areas that require any customization or integration of a third-party solution from an independent software vendor (ISV). During the fit-gap analysis sessions, the consultant and the product experts should try to find workarounds for every possible gap. Use the BPM library to identify the common business processes and best practices. There are many common features in Finance and Operations that are applicable to any module. These features, if carefully examined, can address many gaps. In this section, we will briefly cover some of these common features. Microsoft Excel integration can be used as an option to fill the gaps related to data import/export and adhoc reporting done by business users. You can also use these features by building data entities for the custom features that you build as part of your solution.

LCS issue search and support Link: https://docs.microsoft.com/en-us/learn/modules/get-started-with-lcs/8-lcs-issue-search-andsupport Issue search helps you find existing solutions and workarounds for known issues in Finance and Operations. You can use Issue search to search for product issues and determine whether an issue has been resolved, is open, or has a workaround. You can also Issue search for regulatory features and determine whether a feature is available or is planned in a future release. Finally, you can find regulatory white papers, certifications, and registrations for Finance and Operations. To search for issues from within a Lifecycle Services (LCS) project, click the menu button and select Issue search. This will open the Issue search form.

www.dynamicscompanions.com Dynamics Companions

- 49 -

DYNAMICS COMPANIONS CERTIFICATION EXAM STUDY GUIDE

EXAM MB-300: MICROSOFT DYNAMICS 365 UNIFIED OPERATIONS CORE

Searching for issues When entering the search criteria, you can enter a keyword or group of keywords, or a Microsoft Knowledge Base (KB) number. You can also use a dollar sign ($) to indicate an Application Object Tree (AOT) object path in this format: $\ObjectType\Object or $\ObjectType\Object#element Standard search operators such as AND and OR are also supported. Support requests that are entered for Finance and Operations can be found in the LCS project, and these issues can be managed from within Lifecycle Services. When the list of support issues is available on the form, the issue details can be explored, and if necessary, the issue can be submitted to Microsoft Support as a support ticket. Clicking on the support issue will allow you to access Azure DevOps (also known as Visual Studio Team Services or VSTS) where the full details of the issue can be assigned and researched.

The Support feature uses several tools to empower users and implementation teams to collaborate on issues, resolutions, and quick turnarounds for closure. If a hotfix is available based on the search context, users can download it. www.dynamicscompanions.com Dynamics Companions

- 50 -

DYNAMICS COMPANIONS CERTIFICATION EXAM STUDY GUIDE

EXAM MB-300: MICROSOFT DYNAMICS 365 UNIFIED OPERATIONS CORE

If the issue relates to out-of-the-box product functionality, then in the LCS support listing, the issue should be flagged for submission to Microsoft. A selection of your support plan/SLA and contract needs to be made (for example, premier versus non-premier) while submitting the issue. Any interaction with the production environment can be done with a Microsoft service engineer and any communication with a Dynamics Service Engineer (DSE) needs to be tracked, organized, and be userfriendly. Therefore, there is a need for a service request so that the customer, partners, advisors, and implementation teams can raise a request for any service needs in the production environment. The support tool provides the following information in different tabs: •

Manage incidents - This is a single window to view all your support incidents raised with Microsoft from your organization across projects. These incidents are classified as premier and non-premier and are based on your support agreement with Microsoft.

•

Open work items - This provides a list of the currently open work items. Note: For Finance and Operations, the work items in LCS are only supported via Azure DevOps. After you configure the Azure DevOps integration in your LCS project, then you need to link it to a specific Azure DevOps project. When you create work items in the linked Azure DevOps project, the work items will be seen in your LCS project/work items. You can open the work items from LCS by clicking on the ID link.

•

Support issues - The project team or business users can submit an issue from within Finance and Operations, or manually create an issue in LCS. Issues can be investigated by a customer or partner team and can also be raised to Microsoft. The following options are available on the Support Issues tab. o

Active issues - On this tab, you can report issues as either an end user from the Finance and Operations client or as a developer in Azure DevOps. If needed, an active issue can be raised to Microsoft.

Submitted to Microsoft - It’s not required to create an active issue before you raise it to Microsoft. Users with appropriate permissions in LCS can submit an issue to Microsoft directly.

www.dynamicscompanions.com Dynamics Companions

- 51 -

DYNAMICS COMPANIONS CERTIFICATION EXAM STUDY GUIDE

EXAM MB-300: MICROSOFT DYNAMICS 365 UNIFIED OPERATIONS CORE

•

Service requests - All service requests are raised with a Dynamics Service Engineer (DSE) for any issue that is related to the production environment.

•

Extensibility support requests - If you discover a customization that cannot be implemented as an extension, you must log a request to Microsoft to ensure that appropriate extension support is added to the product for your scenario.

•

Hotfix requests - When business users encounter an issue while using Finance and Operations, they can search to find whether Microsoft has published any hotfixes regarding the same issue. If so, the business user can submit a request for a hotfix, which will be available under this section. The System administrator can assign the request to the IT team for further evaluation.

Send a support request to Microsoft To send your support requests to Microsoft, follow these steps: 1.

Open a new incident. In Lifecycle Services, go to the project for which you want to file a support incident, and then click the Support tile.

On the Submitted to Microsoft tab, click Submit an incident.

Select an issue category such as Financial Application or Retail.

Select an issue area, which is the module in Finance and Operations that has an issue for a specific functionality. The more detailed information that is submitted to Microsoft, the better to ease a fast resolution.

Fill in as much detail as you can in the Describe your issue window.

Enter the primary contact information. These contact details will be used by the customer support team to contact you about the case.

www.dynamicscompanions.com Dynamics Companions

- 52 -

DYNAMICS COMPANIONS CERTIFICATION EXAM STUDY GUIDE

EXAM MB-300: MICROSOFT DYNAMICS 365 UNIFIED OPERATIONS CORE

Select the support contract and the severity level.

Click Submit.

After you click Submit, an incident is created and added to the Incidents list. You will receive an email from the Microsoft Support Engineer assigned to your case and you will be provided with a support ticket. When you create an incident, Issue search will populate the top 10 "Possible issue solutions" search results based on your selection and input, and dynamically refresh these results as more details are provided during support case creation. Standalone Issue search is also accessible via the dropdown menu if you need to search for more solutions.

Get product updates from LCS Link: https://docs.microsoft.com/en-us/learn/modules/get-started-with-lcs/9-get-productupdates-from-lcs In Lifecycle Service (LCS), you can use the Updates tile to get and apply updates to your Finance and Operations instance. The following types of updates are available on the Environment page of the LCS project: •

Binary updates are pre-compiled and cumulative. Every subsequent binary update includes all previous updates. These updates don't have to be compiled in a development environment, and they can be applied directly to a non-development environment from LCS. If you're running an environment that has Retail functionality and a customized instance of cloud point of sale (POS), you must complete the additional steps that are listed under Retail SDK packaging. For Microsoft Dynamics 365 for Retail, all updates, even updates for application models, are released as binary updates.

•

X++ updates include updates to specific application functionality in application models. These updates can be independently downloaded and applied. You can select specific X++ updates to apply to your environment. Dependent X++ updates are automatically selected and downloaded. Any X++ updates are source code updates, before they can be applied to a non-development environment, they must be compiled in a developer environment and merged with any customizations. X++ updates apply only to Finance and Operations.

To view available updates: 1.

In the LCS project, select an environment.

On the Environment page, the Monitoring section shows four update tiles o o

All X++ updates - This tile shows all the granular X++ updates released by Microsoft. Critical X++ updates- This tile shows recommended Knowledge base articles (KBs) that are based on the telemetry data in your production environment. This tile will only show

www.dynamicscompanions.com Dynamics Companions

- 53 -

DYNAMICS COMPANIONS CERTIFICATION EXAM STUDY GUIDE

EXAM MB-300: MICROSOFT DYNAMICS 365 UNIFIED OPERATIONS CORE

Production environments and a subset of the updates shown under the All X++ updates tile that are recommended for your environments. o

All binary updates - This tile shows a combined cumulative binary update for both the Application and Platform.

Platform binary updates - This tile shows only the Platform binary updates. If you want to update only the platform, you can get the update from this tile.

Exercise - use the Task recorder to create and edit a recording Link: https://docs.microsoft.com/en-us/learn/modules/get-started-with-lcs/10-exercise-use-taskrecorder-to-create-and-edit-recording

Before you begin This exercise assumes that you already have a working Finance and Operations deployment. To get the most out of this exercise and the other exercises that are included with this module, we recommend that you have the standard sample data available in Finance and Operations that is installed via Lifecycle services. In this exercise, you will: •

Create a recording using Task recorder.

•

Save the recording.

•

Edit a recording.

Create a recording 1.

Open Finance and Operations and sign in. It's a good practice to refresh the browser before each new recording. This creates a new user session and restarts Task recorder, providing the most stable recording experience.

Select the company that you want to use while recording. If this is your first-time using Task recorder, you can follow along as this exercise creates a sample recording based on a Fleet Management business process. You will need to load the Fleet demo data to follow along.

Go to Dashboard > Fleet Management > Fleet setup.

Click Load demo data.

When the data is finished loading, click Close.

Go to the Dashboard by clicking Finance and Operations in the navigation bar.

www.dynamicscompanions.com Dynamics Companions

- 54 -

DYNAMICS COMPANIONS CERTIFICATION EXAM STUDY GUIDE

EXAM MB-300: MICROSOFT DYNAMICS 365 UNIFIED OPERATIONS CORE

Go to Settings > Task recorder.

The Task recorder pane opens. You can click the "X" in the upper-right corner to close the Task recorder pane before beginning a new recording. The pane can be reopened by following the previous steps.

Click Create a new recording.

10. Enter a name for the recording and click Start. Recording begins the moment Start is clicked. For the Fleet example in this exercise, you'll use the name "Create a new rental customer." 11. During recording, clicking the "X" in the upper-right corner will hide the pane without stopping the recording. The pane can be re-opened by clicking the Task recorder menu button that appears at the top of the screen. This icon only appears while recording is in progress. 12. The Task recorder enters Recording Mode. The pane now shows information and controls related to the process of recording. 13. In the Task recorder pane, click Start task. 14. Set Name to "Create a new rental customer". Leave the Comment field blank. 15. Click OK. 16. The task is added to the Steps list. 17. Go to Dashboard > Fleet Management > Reservation Management. 18. Go to All customers under the Summary tab. 19. In the Action Pane, click New. 20. Enter a first and last name for the customer.

Save a recording 1.

Click Save.

In the Task recorder pane, click End task.

To save the recording to your PC, select Save to this PC. Choose a location and save the file.

To save the recording to Lifecycle Services, select Save to Lifecycle Services. Note that you must have a BPM library in your LCS project. www.dynamicscompanions.com Dynamics Companions

- 55 -

DYNAMICS COMPANIONS CERTIFICATION EXAM STUDY GUIDE

EXAM MB-300: MICROSOFT DYNAMICS 365 UNIFIED OPERATIONS CORE

To save the recording as a Word document, select Export as Word document.

To save as a developer recording, select Save as developer recording.

Click Return to main menu.

Edit a recording 1.

Click Edit Recording.

Click Open from this PC and click Browse to load a recording from the location where you saved the file. The extension of this file ends with (.axtr).

Click Start and Task recorder begins recording in Maintenance mode.

Here you can insert, delete, and move steps with a task.

Click Done editing to finish editing.

To save the recording to your PC select Save to this PC. Select a location and save the file.

Click Return to main menu.

Exercise - create a business process in the business process modeler Link: https://docs.microsoft.com/en-us/learn/modules/get-started-with-lcs/11-exercise-create-abusiness-process-in-a-bpm You want to import a global business process library to your Lifecycle Services (LCS) project and modify the library to introduce new processes for order to cash, procure to pay, and core financials. To do this, you must: •

Copy a business process library.

•

Create your own business process library.

Copy a business process library 1.

Go to the LCS portal (https://lcs.dynamics.com/v2 ) and sign in to your Finance and Operations LCS project using your alias.

Click on your project that you created in the cloud environment that has been deployed on your Azure Pass subscription.

On the Project details page, go to the More tools section, and click the Business Process tile, or use the menu icon and select “Business process modeler”. Note: Depending on the type of LCS project, the Business process modeler menu can be accessed either from the Tools section (partner oriented) or from the menu icon.

Click View this page in the updated BPM experience.

www.dynamicscompanions.com Dynamics Companions

- 56 -

DYNAMICS COMPANIONS CERTIFICATION EXAM STUDY GUIDE

EXAM MB-300: MICROSOFT DYNAMICS 365 UNIFIED OPERATIONS CORE

Click the ellipsis (…) for the (March 2018 - All languages) APQC Unified Library for Microsoft Dynamics 365 for Finance and Operations (Cross industry) library and click Copy.

Rename the library and Create.

Your BPM library will be available in the Project libraries section, ready to be used in your LCS project.

Select your new library.

Review available processes.

Create your own business process library 1.

Click New Library.

Assign a name and click Create

Click your new library tile.

Select Sample Core Business process, and then click Edit Mode to make a change to the library.

In the right panel, change the name of the process to Order to Cash, click Save.

Click Add Process and select As Sibling. Click Edit Mode and change the name to ‘Procure to Pay’.

Repeat the previous step for ‘Core Financials’ and ‘Procure to Cash’.

Select Order to Cash and add a child-level process.

Click Add Process As Child > Edit Mode and change the name to “Free Text Invoice”, and then click Save.

10. Add the next process under Order to Cash for ‘Receipt Journal’. 11. You can change the sequence by selecting the option to move process. 12. Repeat the previous steps to add child processes to the other process as follows: Process

Child process

Order to Cash

Receipt journal, Free Text invoice

Procure to Pay

Purchase order, Vendor invoice, Vendor payment

Core Financials

General journal, Run Financial reports, Period end

www.dynamicscompanions.com Dynamics Companions

- 57 -

DYNAMICS COMPANIONS CERTIFICATION EXAM STUDY GUIDE

EXAM MB-300: MICROSOFT DYNAMICS 365 UNIFIED OPERATIONS CORE

Exercise - create a support incident Link: https://docs.microsoft.com/en-us/learn/modules/get-started-with-lcs/12-exercise-create-asupport-incident You will use the project environment that you created on the Azure subscription and log a support incident directly from Finance and Operations. You will be able to view the incident in Lifecycle Services (LCS) and Azure DevOps (also known as Visual Studio Team Services or VSTS), and view the associated environment health data.

Connect the environment to Lifecycle Services 1.

From the LCS portal (https://lcs.dynamics.com/v2 ), go to the details of your environment and start the environment if it is not already started.

Go to the Help tab. You may get a notification to connect to Lifecycle Services.

Click the link in the message, Click here to connect to Lifecycle services. In a new tab, a message appears indicating Success.

Return to the previous tab and click OK in the confirmation message.

On the Support contact tab, note that the LCS project used in this workshop is selected.

Click Save.

Create a support incident 1.

Click the ? icon in the upper-right corner and select Support.

In the lower-right corner, click Create.

Enter a value in the Issue field.

Enter a value in the Description field.

Enter a date in the Time when issue occurred field.

Answer if this issue stopping you from working.

Answer if this issue has a potential to create a company-wide work stoppage.

Alternatively, you can attach a task recording.

10. Answer if you want to share your email address. This must be set to Yes to allow you to submit an incident. 11. Click Submit. 12. You can now click Close.

www.dynamicscompanions.com Dynamics Companions

- 58 -

DYNAMICS COMPANIONS CERTIFICATION EXAM STUDY GUIDE

EXAM MB-300: MICROSOFT DYNAMICS 365 UNIFIED OPERATIONS CORE

View your support incident in LCS 1.

Select Support from the menu.

This list shows all the active issues logged within your project. From this screen you can add new issues, submit issues to Microsoft, or use Issue search.

Click incident title for your incident to open the Azure DevOps work item. Azure DevOps can be used to manage the assignment, status, and attachments of a support incident.

Scroll down to review the Discussion attached to the incident.

Check your knowledge Link: https://docs.microsoft.com/en-us/learn/modules/get-started-with-lcs/14-get-started-withlcs-quiz

Lifecycle services for Dynamics 365 for Finance and Operations knowledge check 1.

What provides an outlined methodology showing each phase of your project, and provides high level milestones that are used to track deliverables and project goals? a.

LCS central repository

b. LCS project workspace c. 2.

Unified control

Analyzing and monitoring the health of your environment using metrics such as component, environment, project, and organization is referred to as which of the following terms? a.

Health screening

b. Environment monitoring c.

System monitoring

d. Environmental analysis 3.

What type of LCS service request releases new code to a production environment? a.

Database refresh

b. Database point-in-time restore c.

Environment deployments

d. Package application

www.dynamicscompanions.com Dynamics Companions

- 59 -

DYNAMICS COMPANIONS CERTIFICATION EXAM STUDY GUIDE

EXAM MB-300: MICROSOFT DYNAMICS 365 UNIFIED OPERATIONS CORE

What is the recommended first step before connecting to an LCS project to retrieve task recordings? a.

Select the LCS project to connect to.

b. Set the display order of BPM libraries. c.

Ensure that a BPM library exists in LCS.

d. Select the BPM libraries to retrieve task recordings from. 5.

Which option in the Task recorder menu allows you to add, move, or remove steps from a task recording? a.

Create recording

b. Play recording as guide c.

Edit recording

d. Playback recording 6.

When selecting to save a task recording as a developer recording, what file type is chosen for the file? a.

.xml

b. .html c.

.docx

d. .txt

Summary Link: https://docs.microsoft.com/en-us/learn/modules/get-started-with-lcs/13-get-started-withlcs-summary You should now be familiar with some of the functionality and tools in Lifecycle Services (LCS) for Finance and Operations. You learned that by using the Asset library, a project owner can reuse existing assets, copy, and share data. You also learned how to use the Task recorder tool to create a business process model in LCS. This task guide can be used by a business user, by a developer to troubleshoot code, and saved to your PC for future use. By comparing the model generated from the Task recorder with what the customerâ&#x20AC;&#x2122;s business process requires, you can identify the missing component or functionality by identifying and analyzing gaps using the Business Process Modeler (BPM). In case of issues during business, you can run the LCS Issue search tool and analyze results, as well as submit an incident to Microsoft.

www.dynamicscompanions.com Dynamics Companions

- 60 -

DYNAMICS COMPANIONS CERTIFICATION EXAM STUDY GUIDE

www.dynamicscompanions.com Dynamics Companions

EXAM MB-300: MICROSOFT DYNAMICS 365 UNIFIED OPERATIONS CORE

- 61 -

DYNAMICS COMPANIONS CERTIFICATION EXAM STUDY GUIDE

EXAM MB-300: MICROSOFT DYNAMICS 365 UNIFIED OPERATIONS CORE

Module 3: Use Lifecycle Services to Design and Plan With proper planning, your Dynamics 365 for Finance and Operations implementation will be a success. After a customer signs the agreement to purchase licenses for Finance and Operations, your job as a functional consultant starts by managing the application lifecycle and moving toward a predictable, repeatable, high quality implementation. Lessons •

Introduction

•

Phases of a cloud implementation

•

Phases of an on-premises implementation

•

Create Functional Design Documents (FDD)

•

Module Summary

You will be able to: •

Prepare documentation for gathered requirements by using a methodology in Lifecycle Services (LCS).

•

Define use case scenarios.

•

Participate in the creation of functional requirements documents (FRD).

•

Understand the importance of creating and maintaining documented processes.

•

Participate in phase-based planning processes and solution design.

•

Describe the future state business processes based on a proposed solution.

•

Determine when to build versus buy.

•

Create functional design documents (FDD).

www.dynamicscompanions.com Dynamics Companions

- 62 -

DYNAMICS COMPANIONS CERTIFICATION EXAM STUDY GUIDE

EXAM MB-300: MICROSOFT DYNAMICS 365 UNIFIED OPERATIONS CORE

Design and plan an implementation of Dynamics 365 for Finance and Operations Link: https://docs.microsoft.com/en-us/learn/modules/design-plan-implementation-in-f-ando/index With proper planning, your Dynamics 365 for Finance and Operations implementation will be a success. After a customer signs the agreements to purchase licenses for Finance and Operations, your job as a functional consultant starts by managing the application lifecycle and moving toward predictable, repeatable, high quality implementation. In this module, you will: •

Prepare documentation for gathered requirements by using methodologies in Lifecycle Services (LCS).

•

Define use case scenarios.

•

Learn how to participate in the creation of functional requirements documents (FRD).

•

Understand the importance of creating and maintaining documented processes.

•

Participate in phase-based planning processes and solution design.

•

Describe the future state business processes based on a proposed solution.

•

Determine when to build versus buy.

•

Create Functional Design Documents (FDD).

Introduction Link: https://docs.microsoft.com/en-us/learn/modules/design-plan-implementation-in-f-and-o/1design-plan-implementation-in-f-and-o-introduction With proper planning, your Dynamics 365 for Finance and Operations implementation will be a success. After a customer signs the agreement to purchase licenses for Finance and Operations, your job as a functional consultant starts by managing the application lifecycle and moving toward a predictable, repeatable, high quality implementation. In this module, you will: •

Prepare documentation for gathered requirements by using a methodology in Lifecycle Services (LCS).

•

Define use case scenarios.

•

Learn how to participate in the creation of functional requirements documents (FRD).

www.dynamicscompanions.com Dynamics Companions

- 63 -

DYNAMICS COMPANIONS CERTIFICATION EXAM STUDY GUIDE

EXAM MB-300: MICROSOFT DYNAMICS 365 UNIFIED OPERATIONS CORE

•

Understand the importance of creating and maintaining documented processes.

•

Participate in phase-based planning processes and solution design.

•

Describe the future state business processes based on a proposed solution.

•

Determine when to build versus buy.

•

Create functional design documents (FDD).

Use implementation methodologies for a successful implementation Link: https://docs.microsoft.com/en-us/learn/modules/design-plan-implementation-in-f-and-o/2implementation-methodologies As a functional consultant for Finance and Operations, you need to create functional requirements documents (FRD). A functional consultant works closely with the solution architect. A solution architect is considered an expert and one of the responsibilities of a solution architect is to perform a requirements analysis. It is the solution architect who orchestrates the collaboration with the team to find a solution for the customer’s business problem in the form of workarounds or extensions when requirement can't be met with Finance and Operations out-of-the-box features.

Why methodologies are important? A correct sequence of tasks, and ensuring all required resources and artifacts are managed properly throughout the lifecycle of Finance and Operations, is essential for a successful implementation. Any successful implementation usually consists of five major phases: •

Analysis

•

Design and develop

•

Test

•

Deploy

•

Operate

In the next units, you’ll look at a summary of tasks in the implementation methodology. This will help you understand the overall phases of implementation. By collaborating with other project team members, you can better fulfill your duty and exceed the expectation of the customer to have a successful go-live. Regardless of deployment topology, either on the cloud or on-premises, the methodologies are very similar. Even though a cloud implementation is a much more reasonable solution for a better total cost of ownership (TCO), some businesses might still choose to use on-premises.

www.dynamicscompanions.com Dynamics Companions

- 64 -

DYNAMICS COMPANIONS CERTIFICATION EXAM STUDY GUIDE

EXAM MB-300: MICROSOFT DYNAMICS 365 UNIFIED OPERATIONS CORE

Cloud implementation – analysis Link: https://docs.microsoft.com/en-us/learn/modules/design-plan-implementation-in-f-and-o/3cloud-impl-analysis This unit is a summary of the steps in the analysis step of a cloud implementation of Finance and Operations.

Complete LCS project configuration Before you begin, you need to complete the required configuration for Lifecycle Services (LCS) to ensure the best experience. This includes configuring two key areas: SharePoint and Azure DevOps (formerly known as Visual Studio Team Services (VSTS), and Team Foundation Studio (TFS)). You will get the most out of LCS if you have your project configured with Azure DevOps. Lifecycle Services uses Azure DevOps for iteration management, work item tracking, upgrade, developer experience, and many other features. You need to click the Setup Visual Studio Team Services button to configure Azure DevOps to your LCS project.

Invite your project team After your project is configured, you need to invite your colleagues and other project team members to join the project. This may include partners or Microsoft team members. You must use Project user management in LCS to invite both internal and external project teams.

Deploy demo environment Deploying a demo environment for users helps everyone to get familiar with Finance and Operations and use for documenting standard business processes. By using a cloud-hosted environment, you can deploy a demo environment, assuming that you have proper security rights both for LCS and your Azure portal to be able to enable Azure Resource Manager (ARM) for deployment.

Finance and Operations standard cloud offering Each Finance and Operations standard cloud offer includes three environments: •

Tier-1 environment: Develop and test – One develop/test instance is provided for the duration of the subscription. This instance is a non-production single-box instance that the customer can use as an automated build environment, or to customize Finance and Operations and do unit testing for changes. Additional develop/test instances can be purchased separately as an optional add-on.

www.dynamicscompanions.com Dynamics Companions

- 65 -

DYNAMICS COMPANIONS CERTIFICATION EXAM STUDY GUIDE

EXAM MB-300: MICROSOFT DYNAMICS 365 UNIFIED OPERATIONS CORE

•

Tier-2 environment: Standard Acceptance Testing – One Standard Acceptance Testing (UAT) instance is provided for the duration of the subscription. This instance is a non-production multibox instance that customers can use for UAT, integration testing, and training. Additional sandbox/staging instances can be purchased separately as an optional add-on.

•

Production environment– One production instance is provided per tenant. The production multi-box instance includes disaster recovery and high availability. It will be provisioned when the implementation approaches the operate phase, after the required activities in the LCS methodology and a successful go-live assessment are completed. Additionally, the following file storage and database storage are included: o

File storage - Every customer receives 100 GB of file/Azure blob cloud storage for files and binary data. Additional file/blob storage can be purchased.

Database storage - Every Finance and Operations subscription includes 10 GB of Azure SQL Database storage per customer at no additional charge. Additional storage capacity is provided at no charge as an organization increases the number of user and device service licenses. For more information about the various environments and types of storage, download the latest “Microsoft Dynamics 365 Licensing Guide” from Dynamics 365 pricing .

Additional environments can be purchased as add-ons, or they can be deployed as cloud-hosted environments. For more information about environments, visit Environment planning .

Publish plan and milestone dates After analysis and fit/gap exercises, you should refine your project plan and have more qualified milestone dates. It’s best to update LCS to ensure that all parties are working off the same timeline. You can set the milestones by clicking on the milestone icon (diamond) in methodology and then clicking on editing icon (pen) for the methodology milestone dates.

Capture business processes and requirements Detailed business process analysis workshops define the business processes to be implemented in the future and identify where specific functionality of the new system will be used. At the same time, the workshops will identify gaps in functionality that may need to be resolved by a workaround, change in business practice, or modification of the system. Typically, there would be a workshop run for each business area (for example, Accounts payable, Purchasing, Sales, and Production). Each workshop would involve key users from the customer’s business. It would be facilitated by a functional consultant and ideally supported by someone taking notes. The selection of the key users would depend on the complexity of the business processes. The key users are responsible for presenting the results of the workshop to their own company. Depending on the size of the company, this might involve a presentation to the other teams involved on the project, or it could involve the key users going back to their own business units and presenting the details to their key people.

www.dynamicscompanions.com Dynamics Companions

- 66 -

DYNAMICS COMPANIONS CERTIFICATION EXAM STUDY GUIDE

EXAM MB-300: MICROSOFT DYNAMICS 365 UNIFIED OPERATIONS CORE

Remember to use Task recorder to capture out-of-the-box features, and by comparing it with gathered business requirement from your customer, identify the gaps. For more information about the Task recorder you can visit the Create documentation or training by using task recordings page on docs.microsoft.com.

Perform fit/gap analysis After you have captured the business processes and requirements, a thorough analysis of each requirement is required to assess if it can be met by the standard product.

Complete subscription estimator Complete the subscription estimate in LCS and mark one of the subscription estimates as active. Note that your active subscription estimate must match the subscription that your organization purchased.

Download templates Download the available templates for your data configuration. This will help start the process of completing setup required for your base set up and configuration. You will use the Asset library to download the templates.

Sign off requirements and business processes After you have captured the business process, requirements, fits, and gaps, review them with the customer. When the customer signs off on the business process, requirements, fits and gaps you can mark this task as complete. Use the Business process modeler to record and manage gaps and firm the future business processes.

Cloud implementation - design and develop Link: https://docs.microsoft.com/en-us/learn/modules/design-plan-implementation-in-f-and-o/4cloud-impl-design-and-develop This unit is a summary of the steps in the design and develop step of a cloud implementation of Finance and Operations.

Deploy a development and test environment The development and test environment includes the core Finance and Operations functionality. Additionally, development tools such as Visual Studio agent will also be installed to assist in the management and version control of developed items within the development sprint cycles. The

www.dynamicscompanions.com Dynamics Companions

- 67 -

DYNAMICS COMPANIONS CERTIFICATION EXAM STUDY GUIDE

EXAM MB-300: MICROSOFT DYNAMICS 365 UNIFIED OPERATIONS CORE

development and test environment will also be used during the development sprint cycle to allow functionality to be tested by the developers and subject matter experts (SMEs). The development and test environment will have the daily build deployed to it overnight to ensure that the most up-to-date set of configuration and customizations are available for testing each day. The development and test environment will also be the environment on which overall solution testing is conducted when all development sprints have been completed and final requirements sign off has been completed.

Define test cases and create test scripts All requirements must be tested. The test scripts should be created regardless of whether the requirement is addressed by using a standard Microsoft Dynamics configuration or a customization. Also, if any plug-in independent software vendor (ISV) solutions exist, they should be tested to ensure compatibility with the customer’s configuration, as should any integration to internal or external systems, data migrations, or uploads. As the test scripts are produced, if any potential issues with the design are identified, the development team should update the design accordingly to better meet the requirement. This means that the ‘Create test scripts’ activity must be started before development begins. As with the design process, the Agile mantra focusing on software delivery over documentation should be followed, and test scripts should be complete with respect to what they validate. These test scripts are not intended to prove any elements of performance or scalability unless the requirement specifically dictates that certain thresholds should be met. Performance and scalability testing will take place separately if the customer has specified that this is necessary.

Sign-off functional design documents (FDD) For any gaps, functional design documents (FDD) should be completed. These documents should contain the requirements, functional principles, and end user experience required for a specific function. Functional design should include any security implications.

Sign-off technical design documents (TDD) Each functional design document should result in a technical design document (TDD). A TDD should include the planned technical execution of a functional design.

Analyze code Customization analysis offer Finance and Operations customers an automated tool to validate the customer’s model files against Finance and Operations best-practice rules for tables, classes, forms, and enums. It then generates reports that list all issues that were identified. Make sure that you evaluate your customizations using customization analysis and file bugs for the issues that were identified.

www.dynamicscompanions.com Dynamics Companions

- 68 -

DYNAMICS COMPANIONS CERTIFICATION EXAM STUDY GUIDE

EXAM MB-300: MICROSOFT DYNAMICS 365 UNIFIED OPERATIONS CORE

Identify a release candidate and signoff Identify the release candidate that you want to use for your production environment. After you have the release candidate, upload it to the Lifecycle Services (LCS) Asset library and tag it as a release candidate. You must use asset libraries to upload all deployment packages that are ready for a production environment.

Revise milestone dates After development and testing there might be an impact to your planned milestone dates. At this time you need to update them to make sure that all parties are in agreement.

Cloud implementation – test Link: https://docs.microsoft.com/en-us/learn/modules/design-plan-implementation-in-f-and-o/5cloud-impl-test This unit is a summary of the steps in the test step of a cloud implementation of Finance and Operations.

Deploy a sandbox environment The sandbox environment will include all core functionality of the Dynamics applications and will typically contain sample or demonstration data. Occasionally the sandbox environment can be reverted back to the base product. At the end of each cycle, after the customer business decision maker (BDM) has signed off requirements, the sandbox environment will be converted into the Training environment and the final sprint cycle build will be deployed to the training environment. This will allow trainers to learn about the customizations and start to produce training materials. Sandbox environments can also be used for performance testing, to ensure that the product meets the performance needs as outlined in the requirements specification.

Testing and sign-off When a requirement has been analyzed, designed, and developed, it should be tested before the requirement can be regarded as complete. Each test script produced during the ‘Create test scripts’ activity should be executed and any failures should be tracked as bugs in Azure DevOps (formerly known as Visual Studio Team Services (VSTS)) and discussed among the consultant and customer subject matter expert (SME) to determine what changes, if any, must be made to the development or the test scripts. During this activity, if any changes are required an initial estimate should be made for implementing these changes. If this initial estimate can be included in the daily sprint cycle without impacting other deliverables, these changes will be accepted.

www.dynamicscompanions.com Dynamics Companions

- 69 -

DYNAMICS COMPANIONS CERTIFICATION EXAM STUDY GUIDE

EXAM MB-300: MICROSOFT DYNAMICS 365 UNIFIED OPERATIONS CORE

However, if the change is expected to extend the original estimate time and impact the delivery of other requirements within the daily sprint cycle, then a change request should be raised. The change request should record the required change and then be discussed during a sprint technical preview session. No changes should be incorporated within the cycle that would result in the increase in the duration of any requirement estimate or detailed task estimate. When all sprint cycle tests for the requirement have been completed and all required changes have been made or documented with a change request, the requirement is deemed as ‘Complete’ and the next requirement task is undertaken.

Monitor system health At any point in time you can monitor the system heath using the Monitoring and diagnostics dashboard in Lifecycle Services (LCS) and fix any issue found in the environment. You can also use system diagnostics to identify bottlenecks and performance issues, along with any warnings or errors from data gathered from collectors in LCS that pull the data from the Finance and Operations instance.

Triage bugs After the testing process, bugs will be triaged. This includes bugs with customizations or bugs that require Microsoft attention. Each bug needs to be assessed against the impact to the project.

Support tickets You can raise a support ticket with Microsoft using the support service in LCS. Use the support service to create incidents and submit support tickets to either your development team or Microsoft.

Get updates from Microsoft At any point in the lifecycle you can download hotfixes relevant to any environment from the Environment page. You can use the Update tool in LCS to update the application and binary packages.

Priority bugs closed Ensure all priority bugs have been delivered, tested, and closed.

Analyze Code The Customization analysis offers Finance and Operations customers an automated tool to validate the customer’s model files against Finance and Operations best-practice rules for tables, classes, forms, and enums. It then generates reports that list all issues that were identified. Make sure that you evaluate your customizations using customization analysis and then file bugs for the issues that were identified.

www.dynamicscompanions.com Dynamics Companions

- 70 -

DYNAMICS COMPANIONS CERTIFICATION EXAM STUDY GUIDE

EXAM MB-300: MICROSOFT DYNAMICS 365 UNIFIED OPERATIONS CORE

Data migration Ensure that data migration has been run and tested by business users. This needs to be done prior to User Acceptance Testing (UAT).

User Acceptance Testing All business scenarios must be tested with production data in the target environment. UAT sign-off is required from the customer.

Gold build sign-off Sign off the gold build that you want to use for your production environment. After you have the gold build, upload it to the LCS Asset library and tag it as a gold build. Use the asset libraries for this stage of implementation.

Performance testing sign-off Performance testing should be a combination of system health and end user feedback to ensure that all environments are performing as expected. You can also use system diagnostics to identify bottlenecks and performance issues.

Cloud implementation - deploy and operate Link: https://docs.microsoft.com/en-us/learn/modules/design-plan-implementation-in-f-and-o/6cloud-impl-deploy-and-operate This unit is a summary of the steps in the deploy and operate steps of a cloud implementation of Finance and Operations.

Deploy: Deploy production environment Production environments can be deployed through Lifecycle Service (LCS) by completing the provisioning checklist. After you have the release candidate identified from your software deployable packages and data packages in the LCS Asset library and all prerequisites are met, you can start completing the provisioning checklist. Production deployment input needs signoff from a representative of the organization who owns the project. This user will be added as a Finance and Operations administrator during provisioning. Microsoftâ&#x20AC;&#x2122;s site reliability team will also review the inputs and signoff requirements, which will initiate the deployment.

www.dynamicscompanions.com Dynamics Companions

- 71 -

DYNAMICS COMPANIONS CERTIFICATION EXAM STUDY GUIDE

EXAM MB-300: MICROSOFT DYNAMICS 365 UNIFIED OPERATIONS CORE

Perform mock cutover To ensure that environment, data, and code packages are successful, a mock cutover should be performed. The mock cutover process is very similar to a basic data upgrade validation in a sandbox environment.

Monitor system health At any point you can monitor the system heath by using the Monitoring and diagnostics dashboard in LCS. You can fix any issues found in the environment.

Perform Go-live health check The entire project team should participate in a Go-live health check to ensure that all aspects of the system are operating as expected; both functionally and technically.

Operate: Get updates from Microsoft At any point in the lifecycle you can download hotfixes relevant to any environment from the Environment page.

Support tickets You can raise a support ticket with Microsoft using the support service in LCS.

Microsoft site reliability work orders You can contact Microsoft support for Microsoft site reliability team work orders.

On-premises implementation â&#x20AC;&#x201C; analysis Link: https://docs.microsoft.com/en-us/learn/modules/design-plan-implementation-in-f-and-o/7on-premises-impl-analysis This unit is a summary of the analysis step of an on-premises implementation of Finance and Operations.

Complete Lifecycle Services (LCS) project configuration This is the same as for cloud implementation.

www.dynamicscompanions.com Dynamics Companions

- 72 -

DYNAMICS COMPANIONS CERTIFICATION EXAM STUDY GUIDE

EXAM MB-300: MICROSOFT DYNAMICS 365 UNIFIED OPERATIONS CORE

On-premises license In Project settings, under Organization and ownership, in the License serial number field, enter the serial number that is in the Properties section of the On-Premises license file that you downloaded. LCS uses the serial number to validate whether your organization has valid on-premises licenses.

Invite your project team This is the same as for cloud implementation.

Sign up for ProQ project quality monitoring The ProQ tool measures the teamwork in your project and provides a weekly report that helps prevent failure. This report helps you to improve project governance for customers, vendors, and service providers.

Deploy a demo environment Deploy an environment for users to get familiar with the product and to use for documenting standard business processes.

Capture business processes and requirements The detailed business process analysis defines business processes that should be implemented in the future and identifies where specific functionality will be used. At the same time, this analysis identifies gaps in functionality that may need to be resolved by a workaround, a change in business practice, or modification of the system.

Perform a fit/gap analysis After you identify the business processes and requirements, a thorough analysis of the each requirement is required to assess if it can be met by the standard product.

Download templates Download the available templates for your data configuration. This will help complete the basic setup and configuration.

Sign off requirements and business processes After you have captured the business processes and completed a fit/gap analysis, review them with the customer. After the customer signs off you can mark this task as complete.

www.dynamicscompanions.com Dynamics Companions

- 73 -

DYNAMICS COMPANIONS CERTIFICATION EXAM STUDY GUIDE

EXAM MB-300: MICROSOFT DYNAMICS 365 UNIFIED OPERATIONS CORE

Estimate setup infrastructure needs To estimate the infrastructure setup needed for on-premises deployment, refer to the infrastructure estimation guide in System requirements for on-premises deployments .

Upload first iteration of setup and configuration After you complete the setup of your first set of data configuration, you can upload the data into the Solution asset library.

Publish plan and milestone dates After analysis and fit/gap exercises you should refine your project plan and have more qualified milestone dates. Update LCS to ensure that all parties are working off the same timeline.

On-premises implementation - design and develop Link: https://docs.microsoft.com/en-us/learn/modules/design-plan-implementation-in-f-and-o/8on-premises-impl-design-and-develop This unit is a summary of the design and develop steps of an on-premises implementation of Finance and Operations.

Deploy a development and test environment The dev and test environment include the core Finance and Operations functionality. The environment also includes tools, such as the Microsoft Visual Studio Agent, which assists in the management and version control of developed items within the development sprint cycles. The dev and test environment is also used during the development sprint cycle for functionality testing by developers and subject matter experts (SMEs). The daily build is deployed to the dev and test environment to ensure that the most upto-date customizations and configurations are available for testing each day. This environment is also used for overall solution testing when all sprints are complete, and the final requirements sign off is complete.

Define test cases and create test scripts All requirements must be tested. Test scripts should be created whether the requirement is addressed by using a standard configuration or a customization. If any plug-in independent software vendor (ISV) solutions exists, they should be tested to ensure compatibility, as should any integration to internal or external systems, data migrations, or uploads. As test scripts are produced, if any design issues are identified, the development team should update the design as needed to better meet the requirement.

www.dynamicscompanions.com Dynamics Companions

- 74 -

DYNAMICS COMPANIONS CERTIFICATION EXAM STUDY GUIDE

EXAM MB-300: MICROSOFT DYNAMICS 365 UNIFIED OPERATIONS CORE

This means that test scripts must be created before development is complete. As with the design process, focus should be on software delivery and test scripts should be complete with respect to what they validate. These test scripts should not be tied to performance and scalability unless specifically stated in the requirement. If needed, performance and scalability testing will take place separately.

Sign-off functional design documents (FDDs) A functional design document (FDD) should be created for all gaps. An FDD should include requirements, functional principles, security implications, and the planned end-user experience for the specific functionality. This step is complete when FDDs have been completed and signed off.

Sign-off technical design documents (TDDs) When a functional design document (FDD) is completed and signed off, it then becomes a technical design document (TDD). A TDD should include the planned technical execution of a functional design. This step is complete when completed and signed off FDDs have become TDDs.

Analyze code Customization analysis offers an automated tool to validate a customer’s model files against Microsoft’s best-practice rules for tables, classes, forms, and enums. The tool then generates reports that list all identified issues. Evaluate your customizations by using customization analysis and then file bugs for the issues that were identified.

Identify a gold build and signoff Identify the gold build that you want to use for your Production environment. After you have identified the build, upload it to the Lifecycle Services (LCS) Asset library and tag it as a gold build.

Revise milestone dates Same as cloud implementation.

On-premises implementation - test, deploy and operate Link: https://docs.microsoft.com/en-us/learn/modules/design-plan-implementation-in-f-and-o/9on-premises-impl-test-deploy-and-operate This unit is a summary of the test and deploy steps of an on-premises implementation of Finance and Operations. Many of the steps are the same as the cloud implementation explained earlier in this module, and will therefore reference that information.

www.dynamicscompanions.com Dynamics Companions

- 75 -

DYNAMICS COMPANIONS CERTIFICATION EXAM STUDY GUIDE

EXAM MB-300: MICROSOFT DYNAMICS 365 UNIFIED OPERATIONS CORE

Test: 1. Create an on-premises connector To deploy an on-premises instance from Lifecycle Services (LCS), you must set up an on-premises connector. To set up the connector, go to Project Settings, click the On-premises Connectors tab, and then follow the instructions.

2. Deploy sandbox environment Same as cloud implementation

3. Testing and sign-off Same as cloud implementation

4. Monitor system health Always monitor your system health, as with the cloud implementation.

5. Triage bugs Same as cloud implementation

6. Support tickets Same as cloud implementation

7. Priority bugs closed Same as cloud implementation

8. Gold build sign-off Same as cloud implementation

9. Performance testing sign-off Same as cloud implementation

www.dynamicscompanions.com Dynamics Companions

- 76 -

DYNAMICS COMPANIONS CERTIFICATION EXAM STUDY GUIDE

EXAM MB-300: MICROSOFT DYNAMICS 365 UNIFIED OPERATIONS CORE

Deploy: 1. Create an on-premises connector See the instructions in the Test section above.

2. Deploy a production environment After you have a gold build identified, and all prerequisites are met, you can begin to work on the Provisioning checklist. This checklist must be complete before you can deploy a production environment using LCS.

3. Perform mock cutover To ensure environment, data, and code packages are successful, a mock cutover must be performed.

4. Monitor system health Monitor your system health at all times.

5. Perform Go-live health check All project team members must participate in a Go-live health check to verify that the system is operating as expected.

Operate: Support tickets You can create a support ticket with Microsoft by using the support service in LCS.

Gathering and analyzing the requirements Link: https://docs.microsoft.com/en-us/learn/modules/design-plan-implementation-in-f-and-o/11gathering-and-analyzing-the-requirements When a customer requirement can't be achieved with out-of-the-box functionality of Finance and Operations, then you must start the analysis stage. When a requirement is a must-have, then you need to consider customization.

www.dynamicscompanions.com Dynamics Companions

- 77 -

DYNAMICS COMPANIONS CERTIFICATION EXAM STUDY GUIDE

EXAM MB-300: MICROSOFT DYNAMICS 365 UNIFIED OPERATIONS CORE

The focus of requirements collection should cover all the aspects of the existing business processes as well as the future state of business processes. The whole requirement gathering and understanding process is a highly scientific approach that needs expertise and the ability to give attention to details. You must be able to describe the future state of business processes in Finance and Operations based on a proposed solution and comparing it with out-of-box functionality. There must always be an explicit link between business processes and the requirements. It should start at a high level for the coverage perspective, but the requirements must be collected in detail. •

A business process is a collection of related, structural activities and requirements with interconnection among them, some of which can be represented in a flowchart comprising decision points and dependencies.

•

A sub-process is a level in a business process for each business process function. Detailing business functions starts at this level. A sub-process could be dedicated to a single functional area or it could be a cross-functional area as well.

•

A requirement is a series of activities, or steps within a subprocess. Organizations may leverage use case scenarios to explain the requirements clearly. A use case is a pattern of behavior and a sequence of related activities. Every organization must keep a goal of collecting the requirements as structured as possible.

It is important that you understand the importance of creating and maintaining documented processes. You must make sure that the following documents will be created, maintained and kept up to date to address the requirements: •

Solution design document (SDD) - This is in-depth documentation of the solution details and solution blueprint that is represented in an end-to-end flow diagram showing all the solution elements that are envisioned and agreed to be leveraged moving forward.

•

Business requirement document (BRD) - After the SDD is prepared, you should revisit the original business requirement document, to ensure that all the business processes and subprocesses are covered, and that all the requirements (functional and non-functional) are addressed.

•

Ensure all documents are SMART – You should clearly describe the project objectives in a SMART (Specific, Measurable, Achievable, Repeatable, and Time bound) format.

•

Project plan - A project plan is a road map document on how to achieve the objectives in the implementation phases. A project plan must facilitate a concise and effective communication. The project plan must define the Work breakdown structure (WBS), which identifies all the work that needs to be done to complete the project.

•

Communication plan- The plan should formally define who should be given specific information and when that information should be delivered.

•

Quality and acceptance plan - This plan secures the acceptance of the deliverables and identifies the external dependencies, as these may directly or indirectly impact the project plan.

•

Change management plan - You need to capture the change request in a log, with adequate information to answer questions about why, what, who, where, and when.

www.dynamicscompanions.com Dynamics Companions

- 78 -

DYNAMICS COMPANIONS CERTIFICATION EXAM STUDY GUIDE

EXAM MB-300: MICROSOFT DYNAMICS 365 UNIFIED OPERATIONS CORE

•

The fit-gap review - The fit-gap document is the primary input document to write the FDD. It is very important to review the fit-gap document in detail before starting with the FDD.

•

Functional Design Document (FDD) - This document describes the features of the customizations. The document can include things such as flowcharts, screenshots, wire frames, and will contain an organized list of requirements that can be used for development, testing, and client sign off. The process of the fit-gap review session is critical prior to writing an FDD.

•

Technical design document (TDD) - After the functional design document is completed and signed off, the development team needs to start writing a technical design document. It includes information about the programmatic approach of how a particular requirement will be implemented. TDDs are prepared primarily by the developer for the final development.

•

Define use case scenarios - This describes a business process in detail. This consists of sequences of tasks and includes decision and conditional steps.

Create functional design documents (FDD) Link: https://docs.microsoft.com/en-us/learn/modules/design-plan-implementation-in-f-and-o/12create-functional-design-documents Functional design documents (FDD) describe the planned features in customizations. The document can include things such as flowcharts, screenshots, and wire frames. It can also contain an organized list of requirements that can be used for development, testing, and client sign off.

Benefits of functional design documents The following are some of the benefits of functional design documents: •

•

Help the development team to understand the feature and provide a clear scope and definition of what to develop. These documents streamline the development process, and the development team working on the feature has a clear understanding and answers to all their functionalityrelated questions before starting development. Because this document is approved by the customer, the developers only develop customizations and extensions that are approved. o

The FDD is a work in progress, so you need to assign the development and QA teams to each functional area. This means that you need to engage them in reviewing the functional design and support the respective business analysts early on.

Extension is the only development model where the developer can use events and hooks within the application code to include additional functionalities without impacting the Microsoft code.

Try to adopt the standard functionality as much as possible while designing solutions.

Help the testing team to understand the feature under development and to develop a test plan around it.

www.dynamicscompanions.com Dynamics Companions

- 79 -

DYNAMICS COMPANIONS CERTIFICATION EXAM STUDY GUIDE

EXAM MB-300: MICROSOFT DYNAMICS 365 UNIFIED OPERATIONS CORE

•

Identify all the cross-functional requirements. The solution architect should lead them to suitable designs.

•

Provide the customer with a clear vision and definition of the feature being developed. Also, help the entire project team to be able to visualize and see the solution before it is built.

•

Provide the baseline of the training documentation for the application support team and business users.

Business requirement definition phase In the definition phase of the project, the implementation team should address the following milestones: •

The business scenarios and processes in a hierarchical format.

•

End-to-end process flows.

•

Use cases.

•

Business flows.

•

Solution blueprint.

After defining the scope, the implementation team should analyze each requirement in the analysis phase.

Solution analysis phase In the analysis phase of the project, the implementation team should address the following milestones: •

Fit/gap analysis.

•

Workarounds and customization options.

•

Build versus buy evaluation.

•

The SWOT (Strength, Weakness, Opportunities, and Threats) analysis for workarounds and customizations/enhancements.

Solution design phase In the design phase of the project, the implementation team should address the following milestones: •

Out-of-the-box capabilities to fit the business processes of the solution.

•

Functional and technical designs for any gaps in the present solution.

•

End-to-end test scenarios for overall solution acceptance.

•

End-to-end for a business process area.

•

One or more test script(s) per requirement.

•

Future-state solution blueprint.

www.dynamicscompanions.com Dynamics Companions

- 80 -

DYNAMICS COMPANIONS CERTIFICATION EXAM STUDY GUIDE

EXAM MB-300: MICROSOFT DYNAMICS 365 UNIFIED OPERATIONS CORE

Prototyping In the prototyping phase of the project, the implementation team should address the following milestones: •

A prototype configuration of the business flow in Finance and Operations.

•

Sample data migration.

•

Demo data, task guides, and training videos.

•

Hands-on labs.

After the acceptance of the prototype, any gaps, interfaces, or reports can be assigned to the development team.

Development phase In the development phase of the project, the implementation team should address the following milestones: •

Development artifacts.

•

Entity relationship (ER).

•

Code.

•

Designs.

Testing and acceptance phase In the testing phase of the project, the implementation team should address the following: •

Test plan.

•

Test scenarios.

•

Test cases.

•

Issue logs.

Training phase In the training phase of the project, the implementation team should address the following milestones: •

Training manuals.

•

User/task guides.

Go-live phase In the Go-live phase of the project, the implementation team should address the following milestones:

www.dynamicscompanions.com Dynamics Companions

- 81 -

DYNAMICS COMPANIONS CERTIFICATION EXAM STUDY GUIDE

•

Cutover checklist.

•

Go-live readiness

•

Environment.

•

Access.

•

Communication mailers.

EXAM MB-300: MICROSOFT DYNAMICS 365 UNIFIED OPERATIONS CORE

After a successful Go-live, it is important to continue the journey and keep reaping benefits from the business platform while keeping it healthy.

Support phase In the support phase of the project, the implementation team should address the following milestones: •

Support/maintenance plan.

•

Team that spans various levels of support needs.

•

Enhancement initiatives.

•

Good-to-have business needs.

•

Issues portal.

•

Ongoing training, roll-out initiatives, and other kinds of assistance.

Check your knowledge Link: https://docs.microsoft.com/en-us/learn/modules/design-plan-implementation-in-f-and-o/14design-plan-implementation-in-f-and-o-quiz

Design and plan an implementation of Dynamics 365 or Finance and Operations knowledge check 1.

Which one of the following documents provides in-depth documentation of the solution details and solution blueprint that is represented in an end-to-end flow? a.

Technical design document (TDD)

b. Solution design document (SDD) c. 2.

Functional design document (FDD)

Which one of the following documents describes the features of the desired customizations? a.

Technical design document (TDD)

b. Solution design document (SDD) c.

Functional design document (FDD)

www.dynamicscompanions.com Dynamics Companions

- 82 -

DYNAMICS COMPANIONS CERTIFICATION EXAM STUDY GUIDE

EXAM MB-300: MICROSOFT DYNAMICS 365 UNIFIED OPERATIONS CORE

Which one of the following documents provides information about the programmatic approach of how a requirement will be implemented? a.

Technical design document (TDD)

b. Solution design document (SDD) c.

Functional design document (FDD)

Summary Link: https://docs.microsoft.com/en-us/learn/modules/design-plan-implementation-in-f-and-o/13design-plan-implementation-in-f-and-o-summary You’ve learned how to prepare documentation for gathered requirements by using a methodology in Lifecycle Services (LCS), define use case scenarios, and participate in the creation of functional requirements documents. You now understand how important it is to collaborate with both your colleagues, such as a solution architect and developer, and your customer’s stake holders to justify the importance of creating and maintaining documented processes. You’ve also learned the importance of creating functional design documents (FDD). As a functional consultant, you must participate in phase-based planning processes and the solution design, describe the future state of business processes in Finance and Operations based on a proposed solution, and determine when to build versus buy.

FastTrack for Dynamics 365 The FastTrack service is intended to ease your project implementation by giving guidance on best practices and answering your how-to-do questions from Microsoft engineering resources, committed to making your experience with Dynamics 365 for Finance and Operations a great success. For more information about FastTrack, see Microsoft FastTrack for Finance and Operations .

www.dynamicscompanions.com Dynamics Companions

- 83 -

DYNAMICS COMPANIONS CERTIFICATION EXAM STUDY GUIDE

EXAM MB-300: MICROSOFT DYNAMICS 365 UNIFIED OPERATIONS CORE

Module 4: Overview of Reporting and Analytics A report in Dynamics 365 for Finance and Operations can be defined simply as a structured presentation of data. Under ideal circumstances, reports materialize data in such a way that it allows the user to make informed decisions. Finance and Operations supports a broad spectrum of information access scenarios. Lessons •

Understand reports and inquiries

•

Learn about Financial reporting

•

Configure PowerBI to your instance

•

Practice Labs

•

Module Summary

You will have learned about: •

Different types of reports and inquiries in Finance and Operations

•

Financial reporting

•

Configuring Finance and Operations for Microsoft Power Platform

www.dynamicscompanions.com Dynamics Companions

- 84 -

DYNAMICS COMPANIONS CERTIFICATION EXAM STUDY GUIDE

EXAM MB-300: MICROSOFT DYNAMICS 365 UNIFIED OPERATIONS CORE

Work with analytics and reporting in Finance and Operations Link: https://docs.microsoft.com/en-us/learn/modules/work-with-analytics-reporting-in-dynamics365-finance-ops/ Business leaders can make important decisions in their company if they have accurate insight into the underlying financial and operational data. Without data visibility, business leaders are challenged with a nearly impossible task. By using analytics and reporting in Dynamics 365 for Finance and Operations, you can empower every business user, depending on their security rights, to get the insights they need to make those crucial choices. In this module, you will learn about: •

Different types of reports and inquiries in Finance and Operations

•

Financial reporting

•

Configuring Finance and Operations for Microsoft Power Platform

Introduction to working with analytics and reporting in Finance and Operations Link: https://docs.microsoft.com/en-us/learn/modules/work-with-analytics-reporting-in-dynamics365-finance-ops/1-analytics-reporting-introduction A report in Finance and Operations can be defined simply as a structured presentation of data. Under ideal circumstances, reports materialize data in such a way that it allows the user to make informed decisions. Finance and Operations supports a broad spectrum of information access scenarios that include, but are not limited to, the following: •

Cross company all-up financial reporting

•

Analytical dashboards and tiles

•

Electronically-transferable funds

•

Customer sales invoices

•

Checks and tax documents

In this module, you will learn about: •

Different types of reports and inquiries in Finance and Operations

•

Financial reporting

•

Configuring Finance and Operations for Microsoft Power Platform www.dynamicscompanions.com Dynamics Companions

- 85 -

DYNAMICS COMPANIONS CERTIFICATION EXAM STUDY GUIDE

EXAM MB-300: MICROSOFT DYNAMICS 365 UNIFIED OPERATIONS CORE

Understand different types of reports and inquiries Link: https://docs.microsoft.com/en-us/learn/modules/work-with-analytics-reporting-in-dynamics365-finance-ops/2-different-types-reports-inquiries The first step in working with the reporting functionality in Finance and Operations is to understand the reporting features that already exist and that you can use, either out of the box or through small extensions, to match your customer requirements. Finance and Operations provides several reporting tools that cater to various data access scenarios. For example, the needs of users when they are interacting with business documents differs greatly from scenarios where they would like to explore data at an aggregate level or derive insights by using Artificial Intelligence models that are hosted in the cloud. Finance and Operations provides specialized tools for five reporting experiences: •

Embedded analytics and native controls - Built-in visualizations that are used in operational reports. This lets you add aggregate data to workspaces by using native controls such as charts and grids.

•

SQL Server Reporting Services (SSRS) - Primarily used for business documents and highvolume printing scenarios that are common with invoices, packing slips, piking lists, and more.

•

Financial Report Designer - Flexible tool that is used to customize and create financial statements such as balance sheets, income statements, and cashflow statements.

•

Power Platform - Includes dashboards and workspaces that contain predefined and personalized views, PowerBI, PowerApps, and Microsoft Flow integrations.

•

Electronic Reporting - Used to configure electronic documents in accordance with the legal requirements of various countries or regions.

Microsoft Office integrations By using the Microsoft Office integration built-in feature, you can export selected, or all, rows from a list page grid and export data entity values into a Microsoft Excel workbook for reporting purposes. Then, you can use the rich capabilities of Excel, such as pivot table, charts, and more, to present your data.

www.dynamicscompanions.com Dynamics Companions

- 86 -

DYNAMICS COMPANIONS CERTIFICATION EXAM STUDY GUIDE

EXAM MB-300: MICROSOFT DYNAMICS 365 UNIFIED OPERATIONS CORE

Financial reporting Standard financial reports are provided by using the default main account categories in Finance and Operations. Use the Report designer to create or modify traditional financial statements, such as the Income statement and Balance sheet, and share the results with other members of your organization.

Financial reporting Link: https://docs.microsoft.com/en-us/learn/modules/work-with-analytics-reporting-in-dynamics365-finance-ops/3-financial-reporting Financial reporting for Finance and Operations allows financial and business professionals to create, maintain, and view financial statements. It moves beyond traditional reporting constraints to help you efficiently design various types of reports. Financial reporting includes dimension support to determine what financial dimensions you want to include, and the sequence, and enables the building of a custom reporting structure. You can map the following to gain better insight of financial data: •

Main accounts

•

Financial dimensions www.dynamicscompanions.com Dynamics Companions

- 87 -

DYNAMICS COMPANIONS CERTIFICATION EXAM STUDY GUIDE

•

EXAM MB-300: MICROSOFT DYNAMICS 365 UNIFIED OPERATIONS CORE

Combinations of the two

For example, you can create financial row structures to focus on cost accounts. You can set up unlimited financial dimensions that allow for cost detail. The following financial dimensions are examples that might be associated with cost accounts: •

Cost centers

•

Departments

•

Combinations of the two

The Financial reporting database is deployed to its own SQL Azure database on the same SQL Azure service as the Finance and Operations instance. This means that the database is preconfigured when you deploy Finance and Operations, and automatically links to available databases so that the Financial report designer can connect to it.

Report designer By using Report designer, you will be able to: •

Save and reuse dimension combinations for multiple reports.

•

Control how to format and display the dimension descriptions.

•

Identify the accounts or dimensions that have been omitted from report building blocks.

•

Format the headers for rolling forecasts.

You can manage the generation and distribution of reports by using the following features: •

Scheduling reports so that they are automatically generated on a daily, weekly, monthly, or annual basis.

•

Exporting the report result to the read-only PDF format, which provides better document security through digital signatures.

•

Exporting to a Microsoft Excel worksheet.

Interactive features let you perform the following tasks within Financial reporting: •

Change the report date for the report that you're viewing.

•

Change the currency of the report that you're viewing.

•

View the report in either a summary view or a detailed view.

•

Add dimension filters to limit the report content to a specific dimension or combination of dimensions.

•

Add attribute filters to limit the report content to a specific attribute or a combination of attributes.

We recommend that you link your main accounts to your main account categories, which makes it easier and faster when setting up your reporting in Financial reporting.

www.dynamicscompanions.com Dynamics Companions

- 88 -

DYNAMICS COMPANIONS CERTIFICATION EXAM STUDY GUIDE

EXAM MB-300: MICROSOFT DYNAMICS 365 UNIFIED OPERATIONS CORE

For example, if you are creating a report, rather than listing many main accounts, you can simply list your main account category and get a total of all the main accounts in that category.

Accessing financial reporting Before creating and generating the financial reports in Finance and Operations, you need to ensure that the following have been set up for your company: •

Currency

•

Fiscal calendar

•

Chart of accounts

•

Ledger

For more information, refer to the following documentation and Learn content: •

Fiscal calendars, fiscal years, and periods

•

Plan your chart of accounts

•

Configure currencies in Dynamics 365 for Finance and Operations

•

Create fiscal calendars, years, and periods in Dynamics 365 for Finance and Operations

•

Configure chart of accounts in Dynamics 365 for Finance and Operations

•

Configure ledgers and journals in Dynamics 365 for Finance and Operations

You can find the Financial reporting menu in the following locations in Finance and Operations: •

General Ledger > Inquiries and reports

•

Budgeting > Inquires and reports > Basic budgeting

•

Budgeting > Inquiries and reports > Budget planning

•

Budgeting > Inquiries and reports > Budget control

•

Consolidations

Financial reporting setup The Financial reporting setup page in General ledger > Ledger setup has a list of all financial dimensions in the system. It has two sections that determine the data that you will report on in Financial reporting: •

Dimensions tab - Because different companies use different dimensions and account structures, there is no way to determine the order in which users want to view all financial dimensions on reports. This page allows you to set the order in which you want financial dimensions to appear when you build and view a report in Financial reporting.

•

Attributes tab - This is where you can select whether you want to use vendors and customers as attributes for filtering and report design. Reporting on vendor and customer will only be valuable

www.dynamicscompanions.com Dynamics Companions

- 89 -

DYNAMICS COMPANIONS CERTIFICATION EXAM STUDY GUIDE

EXAM MB-300: MICROSOFT DYNAMICS 365 UNIFIED OPERATIONS CORE

if you do not enter multiple vendors or customers in a single voucher when posting transactions. Selecting Vendor and/or Customer will add more time to the integration.

Financial reporting components The following components of financial reporting make it easy to create, view, and schedule reports: •

Report designer - Create report building blocks that can be combined to define and generate a report. Advanced users can create new report building blocks or modify existing building blocks to meet their requirements.

•

Report schedules - Schedule a single report, or a group of reports, so that it is generated on a regular basis.

The financial statement functionality simplifies your ability to build reporting structures for internal analytical purposes. You can create many financial reports to comply with requirements and international accounting standards. There are two default balance sheet reports: •

Balance Sheet – Default - The sections are stacked. Provides a view of the organization's financial position for the year.

•

Side by Side Balance Sheet – Default The sections are side-by-side. Provides a view of the organization's financial position for the year. Assets and liability and shareholder’s equity are sideby-side.

The three trial balance reports are: •

Detailed Trial Balance – Default - Provides balance information for all accounts, and includes debit and credit balances, and the net of these, together with the transaction date, voucher, and journal description.

•

Summary Trial Balance – Default - Provides balance information for all accounts and includes opening and closing balances, and debit and credit balances, together with their net difference.

•

Summary Trial Balance Year Over Year – Default - Provides balance information for all accounts and includes opening and closing balances, and debit and credit balances, together with their net difference for the current year and the past year.

The Income Statement – Default report provides a view of the organization’s profitability for the current period and for the year to date.

Row definition A row definition is a report component, or building block, that specifies the contents of each row on a financial report. It can be combined with column definitions, reporting tree definitions, and report definitions to create a building block group that can be used by multiple companies.

www.dynamicscompanions.com Dynamics Companions

- 90 -

DYNAMICS COMPANIONS CERTIFICATION EXAM STUDY GUIDE

EXAM MB-300: MICROSOFT DYNAMICS 365 UNIFIED OPERATIONS CORE

A row definition defines the descriptive lines (for example, salaries or sales) on a report. It also lists the segment values or dimensions that contain the values for each line item and includes row formatting and calculations. You can use row definitions in the financial statements to present financial figures by the following: •

Financial dimension

•

Main accounts

•

A combination of the two

A row definition can contain up to 20,000 financial dimension rows and can include the following information: •

Descriptive text that adds meaning to the report by creating section headings, lines, and spaces, such as Cash or Total revenue.

•

Links to financial data, which can include dimension values in Finance and Operations.

•

Row totals and formulas that are based on the linked financial data.

Usually, each row in a row definition contains one of the following types of information: •

References to the financial dimensions system.

•

Totals or calculations that are based on the data.

•

Formatting.

Two methods for entering information in a row definition are: •

Manually - Enter row information in a new row definition. For more information, refer to Modify row definition cells .

•

Use the Report designer - Use this to pull row information directly from the financial dimensions.

You can set up a row definition to pull data from the financial dimensions system every time that the report is generated. A dimension is an intersection of data and values. You can group data and values in the Report designer. Then, you can classify and analyze transactions in more detail. You can use the Insert rows function from Dimensions dialog box to add multiple rows to a row definition at the same time. The following list describes the information that you can specify for each dimension: •

Dimension - The pattern that identifies the dimension to add to the row definition. This pattern contains one ampersand (&) or number sign (#) for each position in the dimensions. If a dimension has an ampersand, then that dimension will populate the row definition. By default, it's set on the main account, which is the most common way to build a row definition.

•

Dimension Range Start - The first value for this dimension to add to the row definition.

•

Dimension Range End - The last value for this dimension to add to the row definition.

www.dynamicscompanions.com Dynamics Companions

- 91 -

DYNAMICS COMPANIONS CERTIFICATION EXAM STUDY GUIDE

EXAM MB-300: MICROSOFT DYNAMICS 365 UNIFIED OPERATIONS CORE

Column definition A column definition is a report component, or building block, that defines the contents of columns on a report. Like row definitions, basic column definitions can be used on multiple reports. A column definition defines the period to use when data is extracted from the financial dimensions. It also includes column formatting and calculations. You can also restrict a report column to a specific unit or for specific dates. Often, you might need to combine financial dimension sets to make detailed financial reports, which matches the customer’s requirements. This helps companies to analyze transactions from the following transactions: •

General ledger

•

Budget

You can add, modify, and delete the headers that appear at the top of the columns on a report. You can also configure conditional spanning column headers, based on the Period field from column definitions and the Base period field from report definitions. The base period feature helps save time when you create rolling forecast reports.

Reporting tree definition A reporting tree definition helps define the structure and hierarchy of your organization. It's a crossdimensional and cross-company hierarchical structure that is based on the dimensional relationships in your financial data. It provides information at the reporting unit level and at a summary level for all units in the tree. Reporting tree definitions can be combined with column definitions and report definitions to create a building block group that can be used by multiple companies. A reporting unit can be an individual department from the financial data, or it can be a higher-level summary unit that combines information from other reporting units. For a report definition that includes a reporting tree, one report is generated for each reporting unit and for the summary level. Financial reports that aren't based on a reporting tree use only some of the capabilities of Financial reporting. You can use multiple reporting tree definitions together with the same row and column definitions to view your organization's data in various ways. All these reports use the row and column definitions that are specified in the report definition, unless the report definition specifies that the reporting tree from the row definition should be used. Row and column definitions are important components in the design and functionality of financial reports.

Security considerations You can create a password to lock and help protect a building block. In this way, you can add a level of security to a report component without securing the whole system.

www.dynamicscompanions.com Dynamics Companions

- 92 -

DYNAMICS COMPANIONS CERTIFICATION EXAM STUDY GUIDE

EXAM MB-300: MICROSOFT DYNAMICS 365 UNIFIED OPERATIONS CORE

A password can help protect building block information that is important to your month-end reporting process. A user in any role can lock a building block. However, other users always have read-only access to a locked component. Users can open, change, and save the locked component under a new name. A user who has the role of administrator can always access and change a locked building block.

Find inquiries and reports Link: https://docs.microsoft.com/en-us/learn/modules/work-with-analytics-reporting-in-dynamics365-finance-ops/4-find-inquiries-reports Finance and Operations includes hundreds of out-of-the-box reports and inquiries. Most of the modules in Finance and Operations contain a menu item collection named Inquiries and reports. The following is an example of the General ledger > Inquiries and Reports menu item.

www.dynamicscompanions.com Dynamics Companions

- 93 -

DYNAMICS COMPANIONS CERTIFICATION EXAM STUDY GUIDE

EXAM MB-300: MICROSOFT DYNAMICS 365 UNIFIED OPERATIONS CORE

Configure Finance and Operations for Microsoft Power Platform Link: https://docs.microsoft.com/en-us/learn/modules/work-with-analytics-reporting-in-dynamics365-finance-ops/5-power-platform Finance and Operations delivers interactive reports that are seamlessly integrated into application workspaces. Workspaces can use rich infographics and visuals that are supported by Microsoft Power BI. You can also use PowerApps and Microsoft Flow with Finance and Operations.

www.dynamicscompanions.com Dynamics Companions

- 94 -

DYNAMICS COMPANIONS CERTIFICATION EXAM STUDY GUIDE

EXAM MB-300: MICROSOFT DYNAMICS 365 UNIFIED OPERATIONS CORE

PowerApps You can embed PowerApps into Finance and Operations by using the Personalize toolbar that is available on most pages in the system. When you build a PowerApp, it’s important that you are logged in to powerapps.com and your instance of Finance and Operations by using the same credentials. By using PowerApps, you can build apps fast with a point-and-click approach to app design. Choose from a large selection of templates or start from a blank canvas. Easily connect your app to data and use Excellike expressions to easily add logic. Publish your app to the web, iOS, Android, and Windows 10. With Common Data Service built in, you get a powerful data service with rich customization, business logic, and security capabilities. Your data is stored in a standard format through the common data model so it’s ready to go and easy to use. To read more about PowerApps in Finance and Operations, go to the following sources: •

Embed PowerApps apps

•

PowerApps Host control

Microsoft Flow Microsoft Flow includes powerful workflow automation that flows directly in your apps with a no-code approach that connects to hundreds of popular apps and services. You can create automated workflow between your favorite apps and services to get notifications, insights, synchronize files, collect data, and much more. To read more about Microsoft Flow in Finance and Operations, go to: •

Business events in Microsoft Flow

Power BI Use the features of Power BI to unify data from many sources to create interactive, immersive dashboards and reports that provide actionable insights and drive business results. The following Power BI solutions are available in the Shared assets library of Lifecycle Services (LCS). Refer to the version information in the Shared assets library to download the correct version for your environment. •

Actual vs. budget - Individuals who are responsible for monitoring actual versus budget performance in their organization can use this Power BI content. It provides visibility into your budget variances.

•

You can analyze budget for the current year by account category, budget code, main account, main account descriptions, or fiscal period to gain better understanding of the cause of any variances.

www.dynamicscompanions.com Dynamics Companions

- 95 -

DYNAMICS COMPANIONS CERTIFICATION EXAM STUDY GUIDE

EXAM MB-300: MICROSOFT DYNAMICS 365 UNIFIED OPERATIONS CORE

•

Cash overview - Business users who are responsible for cash in their organization can have visibility into the business cash flow by using this Power BI content. It provides forecasts that can help financial leaders make better decisions and therefore improve the health of the business cash flow.

•

You can analyze cash by legal entity, currency, and bank account to gain better understanding of surpluses and shortfalls. Reports from the Cash overview Power BI content are displayed in the Cash overview and Bank management workspaces.

•

Compensation and benefits - Two reports are available in this Power BI content:

•

Comp and Benefits Analysis - Provides information for hourly and salaried employees by company, average hourly pay, average salaried pay, employees by employment type, and plan enrollment.

Employee Benefits - Provides information for employee enrollment by selected benefit so you can filter all employees by each benefit.

Cost accounting analysis - This Power BI content is intended for cost controllers or anyone who is responsible for performing cost control of an organization.

This report includes the key metrics, such as cost, magnitude, and cost rate by actual cost, budget cost, and flexible budget cost. It uses transaction data from the Cost accounting module and provides an aggregate view of costs for the whole organization in one reporting currency. Managers can filter the data by cost objects to perform cost control of their organizational units, even if the organization can have several legal entities. •

Compensation - This Power BI content is shown in the Compensation management workspace. The following reports are available: o

Compensation overview – Provides a summary of other reports.

Compensation analysis - Hourly and salaried employees by company, total employees by compensation plan, male and female employees by compensation plan, and employee compensation by department.

Position pay analysis - Highest and lowest hourly and salary pay, positions with highest and lowest pay, and full-time and part-time positions.

Compensation Plan Analysis - Provides information regarding the employee enrollment by selected benefit.

Credit and collections management - The credit and collections managers and collections clerks can benefit from this Power BI content. It provides key credit and collections metrics, such as days sales outstanding, balance overdue, credit exposure, and customers that are over their credit limit. It uses transactional data and provides aggregate views of credit and collections across all companies. It also provides a breakdown per company, customer group, and customer. •

Employee competencies and development - The following reports are available in this Power BI content: o

Competency & Development Analysis - Provides information of the team member skills by type.

www.dynamicscompanions.com Dynamics Companions

- 96 -

DYNAMICS COMPANIONS CERTIFICATION EXAM STUDY GUIDE

o o

•

EXAM MB-300: MICROSOFT DYNAMICS 365 UNIFIED OPERATIONS CORE

Skill Profile - Provides information regarding the skill profile for the selected employee. Skill Analysis - Provides information regarding skills by type and rating.

Financial performance - Describes the dashboard and reports that are included, and provides information about the data model and entities that were used to build the solution.

Because organizations want liabilities and revenue amounts to appear as positive amounts on reports, the setup of the main accounts is important. For these main accounts to appear as positive amounts, the main account type must be set to Liability or Revenue. When these account types are used, reporting through Power BI will reverse the signs and show the amounts as positive. •

Fixed asset management – This workspace shows information that is related to fixed assets that are entered in the system. It includes a summary view and an analytics view. The My work tab shows summary tiles, fixed asset details, and related information about fixed assets in the current company.

You can also add analytics to the Power BI analytics section directly in the workspace. The Analytics – all companies tab uses capabilities of Microsoft Power BI to show visuals that are related to fixed assets in all companies. •

•

Organizational training - Two reports are available in this Power BI content: o

Course Analysis - Provides information for registration by location, course attendees by status, and registration list.

Course Types - Provides information on course types by skill.

Practice manager - Practice managers and project managers can benefit from this Power BI content. It provides key metrics that are related to the projects that the organization is working on. The dashboard gives an overview of the projects and related customers.

A report-level filter can be used to report for specific legal entities. This Power BI content pulls data from the project accounting aggregate measurements. The Practice manager Power BI content contains five report pages: one overview page, and four pages that provide details about project costs, revenues, earned value management, and hour metrics that are broken down across various dimensions. All the amounts in the content are shown in the system currency. You can set the system currency on the System parameters page. •

Cost Management - Inventory accountants and individuals who are responsible for or interested in the status of inventory or work in process (WIP), and people who analyze the standard cost variance benefit from this Power BI content.

•

Production performance - Production managers can benefit from this Power BI content. It can monitor the performance of manufacturing operations for a timely running process, quality control, and cost analysis. This report uses transactional data from production orders and batch orders and provides an aggregate view of companywide production metrics.

•

Purchase spend analysis - This Power BI content helps purchasing managers make sure that the purchase spending is within the allocated budget over time.

•

Recruiting - This Power BI content is shown on the Recruitment management workspace and contains information such as:

www.dynamicscompanions.com Dynamics Companions

- 97 -

DYNAMICS COMPANIONS CERTIFICATION EXAM STUDY GUIDE

EXAM MB-300: MICROSOFT DYNAMICS 365 UNIFIED OPERATIONS CORE

Applicant Analysis - Shows the total number of applicants, and then groups them by jobs, gender, and location.

Applicant Status – Shows applicants by type, status, and applicant status.

Recruiting Analysis - Shows net hire ratio, average days to hire, percentage of bad hires, recruiting costs, number of recruitment projects, hire to applied, and applicants versus openings by recruitment project.

•

Sales and profitability performance - The sales managers can monitor the key sales metrics of revenue, gross profit, and profit margins by using this Power BI content. It uses sales transactional data and provides both an aggregate view of the companywide sales figures and a breakdown of sales performance for customers and products.

•

Vendor payment - This Power BI content shows information that is related to the processing of vendor payments. This workspace includes a My work view and an Analytics page.

The My work view shows summary tiles, vendor transaction grids, and related vendor information. The Analytics page uses the capabilities of Power BI to show visuals that are related to vendor payments. •

Warehouse performance - The warehouse and operations managers can monitor important inbound, outbound, and inventory metrics by using this Power BI content.

It uses warehouse management, product, and other transactional data from Finance and Operations and provides both an aggregate view of warehouse performance and a breakdown for vendors, product groups and products, and site and warehouses. •

Workforce metrics - This Power BI content provides information for headcount analysis by company, department, location, job, and more.

Read more about Power BI content in Finance and Operations in the PowerBI.com solutions home page

Exercise - Generate and explore a financial report Link: https://docs.microsoft.com/en-us/learn/modules/work-with-analytics-reporting-in-dynamics365-finance-ops/6-exercise-generate-explore-financial-report You need to generate and explore an existing default financial report. This report includes all accounts and contains account properties (attributes) for the accounts. You'll be drilling into transaction detail, applying dimension filters, and changing the currency on the report.

Before you begin To get the most benefit from of this and other exercises in this module, we recommend that you have the standard sample data available in Finance and Operations that is installed by using Lifecycle Services (LCS). First, you'll update the display order of dimensions for financial reporting. This allows you to select how the dimensions display.

www.dynamicscompanions.com Dynamics Companions

- 98 -

DYNAMICS COMPANIONS CERTIFICATION EXAM STUDY GUIDE

EXAM MB-300: MICROSOFT DYNAMICS 365 UNIFIED OPERATIONS CORE

Go to General ledger > Chart of Accounts > Dimensions > Financial dimension configuration for integrating applications.

Arrange the dimensions so that the Main Account is first on the list.

Arrange the dimensions so that the Business Unit is second on the list.

Arrange the dimensions so that the Cost Center is third on the list.

Arrange the dimensions so that the Department is forth on the list.

Save the dimension configuration.

Generate a report and explore the data in the report. 1.

Go to Financial reports under Inquiries and reports in General ledger.

Select the row for the report named GL Detail â&#x20AC;&#x201C; Default.

Select Edit.

You'll be prompted to download the click-once report designer and to log in.

Use your credentials to log in.

Change the base year to 2012 and select Generate.

When a report is generated from the report designer, it will open in a new browser tab.

You can either explore the report in the new browser tab, or go to your original browser tab and open the report from there by selecting it from the Financial reports list.

In the opened report, select one of the amounts to drill into the account detail for the report.

10. Once in account detail, select an account with data and select drill to report transaction level.

www.dynamicscompanions.com Dynamics Companions

- 99 -

DYNAMICS COMPANIONS CERTIFICATION EXAM STUDY GUIDE

EXAM MB-300: MICROSOFT DYNAMICS 365 UNIFIED OPERATIONS CORE

11. At the report transaction level, you can view the properties (attributes) that are included in the design of this report. Depending on the transaction and account, some or all the attributes might be displayed. 12. Close the report transaction level. 13. Select the same or a different account and select open voucher transactions. Voucher transactions are filtered to the period, year, and account and dimension combination of the account selected. From Voucher transactions, you can select to explore other information about the transaction. 14. Close the Voucher transactions page. Within a financial report, you can select to view the data either for a different period and year, or with different attributes and dimensions applied. This is done by using Report options. 15. Select Report options. 16. Select Add a dimension filter and type 001 in the Business unit field. 17. Select OK. The report now displays only the data for the 001 Business Unit. This is a personalized view of the report and isn't available for others to view. 18. Close the filtered report. Financial reports can be displayed in any currency that has been added to Finance and Operations. 19. Select Currency and then select EUR. The report now displays in Euros. Any currency codes or currency symbols that are included in the report design now display in the applied currency. If no currency symbol is defined for a currency, the currency symbol is not displayed. 20. Close the GL Detail report.

Exercise - Add account properties to a report design Link: https://docs.microsoft.com/en-us/learn/modules/work-with-analytics-reporting-in-dynamics365-finance-ops/7-exercise-add-account-properties Now, you will update a row definition to include all accounts and the column definition to contain account attributes. Once the updates are complete, you'll generate the newly created report and explore the report. 1.

Go to Financial reports under Inquiries and reports in General ledger.

Select the row for the report named Summary Trial Balance – Default.

Select Edit. Summary Trial Balance – Default to open the Report designer.

Select File, then Save As, and then name the report Detailed trial balance with attributes. Any time a new report is created in the Report designer, the financial reports list is updated in Finance and Operations.

From the report definition, select the Row definition icon to open Trial Balance – Default row definition.

Save the row definition as Detailed trial balance with attributes. www.dynamicscompanions.com Dynamics Companions

- 100 -

DYNAMICS COMPANIONS CERTIFICATION EXAM STUDY GUIDE

EXAM MB-300: MICROSOFT DYNAMICS 365 UNIFIED OPERATIONS CORE

With the cursor on row 50, select Edit and then Insert Rows from Dimensions. Insert rows from dimensions allows you to choose which dimensions you'd like to have in your row definition.

Next, you are going to build the row definition by using Main account.

Make sure Main account contains all ampersands and select OK. The row definition now contains all the main accounts for legal entity USMF.

10. Scroll down to row 11110 and delete row 11110. 11. In row 11080, select --- (Underscore amounts). 12. In row 11140, type Total of all accounts in column B. 13. In column C, select TOT from the drop-down menu. 14. Type 50:11080 in column D. 15. Save the row definition. The row definition now contains all the accounts plus a total row to add all the accounts together.

Update the column definition to include additional account attributes 1.

From the Detailed trial balance with attributes report definition, select the column definition icon to open the Summary Trial Balance â&#x20AC;&#x201C; Default column definition.

Save the column definition as Detailed trial balance with attributes. The column definition contains financial data columns, a description column, and calculation columns.

Add the Journal description attribute columns to the column definition to provide additional detail about the accounts.

Add the Transaction date attribute columns to the column definition.

Add the Created by attribute columns to the column definition.

Add the Last modified by attribute columns to the column definition.

In column I, select ATTR as the column type.

Select Journal number as the attribute category.

Continue adding columns for the remaining attributes.

10. In the Header 2 row, add descriptions for each of the new columns that have been added. 11. Save the column definition. Now that the row definition and column definition have been updated, add them to the report definition. 12. From the Detailed trial balance with attributes report definition, select Detailed trial balance with attributes for both the row definition and column definition. 13. Change the base year to 2012. 14. Save the report definition and then select Generate. When the report opens, you can explore the report as you did in the first exercise. 15. Drill down on different accounts to view how the additional attributes are displayed. 16. Close the Detailed trial balance with attributes report.

www.dynamicscompanions.com Dynamics Companions

- 101 -

DYNAMICS COMPANIONS CERTIFICATION EXAM STUDY GUIDE

EXAM MB-300: MICROSOFT DYNAMICS 365 UNIFIED OPERATIONS CORE

17. Close the Report designer.

Exercise - Create a multidimensional report by using a reporting tree Link: https://docs.microsoft.com/en-us/learn/modules/work-with-analytics-reporting-in-dynamics365-finance-ops/8-exercise-create-multidimensional-report-reporting-tree You need to modify an existing default report. You will create a reporting tree and add to a report definition to produce a Cost center/divisional income statement. When the updates are complete, you'll generate the Cost center/divisional income statement and explore the report by using the reporting tree. 1.

Go to Financial reports under Inquiries and reports in General ledger.

Select the row for the report named Income Statement – Default.

Select Edit. Income statement – default will open in Report designer.

On the File menu, point to New, and then select Reporting tree definition.

On the Edit menu, select Insert reporting units from dimensions.

Clear check boxes for all dimensions, except Cost center.

Select the From dimension field for the Cost center dimension, type 007, and then press the Tab key.

In the To dimension field, type 018.

Save the resulting tree with the name Cost centers by division.

Now that the reporting tree is created, you'll modify the reporting tree to contain three new rollup units: Marketing, Operations, and Retail. 10. On the Window menu, select Cost centers by division. 11. If the reporting tree has been closed, select it from Reporting tree definitions in the Navigation pane. 12. Select unit number two, Trade shows, and then select the Insert reporting unit icon. 13. Double-click the entity column on the blank row and select USMF. 14. Type Marketing in columns B and C. 15. Select unit number five, Service operations, and right-click. 16. Select Insert reporting unit. 17. On the Window menu, select Cost centers by division. 18. Type Operations in columns B and C. 19. Select unit number twelve, Outlet, and right-click.

www.dynamicscompanions.com Dynamics Companions

- 102 -

DYNAMICS COMPANIONS CERTIFICATION EXAM STUDY GUIDE

EXAM MB-300: MICROSOFT DYNAMICS 365 UNIFIED OPERATIONS CORE

20. Select Insert reporting unit. 21. On the Window menu, select Cost centers by division. 22. Type Retail in columns B and C. Notice the Marketing, Operations, and Retail units display at the same level as the current rollup units. 23. The new units are organized next. Reporting units are organized through the right-click options, promote and demote, or by drag and drop. 24. Verify unit three, Trade shows, is active, and then right-click. 25. Select Demote reporting unit. Notice that the unit now displays as a child of Marketing. 26. Select unit four, Marketing campaign, and then right-click. 27. Select Demote reporting unit. 28. Select Service operations in the graphical display. Press and hold down the left mouse button while dragging the unit up to Operations. 29. Release the left mouse to drop the unit into Operation's rollup. Repeat for Production, Quality Control, Logistics, Procurement, and Administration. 30. Make Outlet, Super, Mall, and Online children of Retail by either demoting them or dragging and dropping them. 31. Save the resulting re-organization. Now that the reporting tree has been created and organized, it can be added to the report definition. 32. On the Window menu, select Income statement – Default to open the report definition. 33. Select the Tree type drop-down arrow and select Reporting tree. 34. Select the Tree drop-down arrow and select Cost centers by division. 35. Change the base year to 2012, save the changes, and then select Generate. When the report opens, you can explore the report. 36. Select the Reporting tree drop-down to view the reporting units. Alternatively, you can drill down on a row of the report to view all the balances for all units of the reporting tree. 37. Close Income statement – default. 38. Close Report designer.

Exercise - Create a consolidated report by using an organization hierarchy Link: https://docs.microsoft.com/en-us/learn/modules/work-with-analytics-reporting-in-dynamics365-finance-ops/9-exercise-create-consolidated-report-organization-hierarchy You need to add an organization hierarchy in the report definition to produce a consolidated income statement and balance sheet. When the updates are complete, you'll generate the consolidated report and explore the report by using the reporting tree.

www.dynamicscompanions.com Dynamics Companions

- 103 -

DYNAMICS COMPANIONS CERTIFICATION EXAM STUDY GUIDE

EXAM MB-300: MICROSOFT DYNAMICS 365 UNIFIED OPERATIONS CORE

Go to Financial reports under Inquiries and reports in General ledger.

Select the row for the report named Balance sheet and Income statement side by side – default.

Select Edit. The Balance sheet and income statement side by side – default report will open in the Report designer.

Select File > Save as and name the report Consolidated balance sheet and income statement side by side.

Change the base year to 2012.

Select the Tree type drop-down arrow and select Organization hierarchies.

Select the Tree drop-down arrow and select Contoso holdings.

Save the changes and generate the report.

If prompted, select all reporting units. When the report opens, you can explore the report.

10. Select Report options. 11. Select Add a dimension filter and then type 022 in the Department field. 12. Select OK. 13. Close the filtered report. 14. Select the Reporting tree drop-down menu to view the reporting units. Alternatively, you can drill down on a row of the report to view all the balances for all units of the reporting tree. 15. Close the Consolidated balance sheet and income statement side by side report. 16. Close the Report designer.

Exercise - Create a side-by-side departmental report Link: https://docs.microsoft.com/en-us/learn/modules/work-with-analytics-reporting-in-dynamics365-finance-ops/10-exercise-create-side-by-side-departmental You need to create a new side-by-side departmental income statement report. You'll use an existing row definition and will create a new report definition and a new column definition that uses dimension filters. 1.

Go to Financial reports under Inquiries and reports in General ledger.

Select New. Report designer will open with a blank report definition open.

Create a new column definition by selecting File > New > Column Definition.

In Column A, select DESC for the column type.

In Column B, select FD for the column type.

Double-click in the Dimension filter field.

In the Dimension window, double-click the Department column.

In the Individual or Range section of the dialog, select the ellipsis for the From field to display a list of departments.

www.dynamicscompanions.com Dynamics Companions

- 104 -

DYNAMICS COMPANIONS CERTIFICATION EXAM STUDY GUIDE

EXAM MB-300: MICROSOFT DYNAMICS 365 UNIFIED OPERATIONS CORE

Select department 022, Sales & Marketing and then select OK.

10. Repeat steps 4 to 10 for Departments 023-025. 11. On the Header 2 row for each FD column, type the department descriptions for Column B – Sales and Marketing. 12. On the Header 2 row for each FD column, type the department descriptions for Column C – Operations. 13. On the Header 2 row for each FD column, type the department descriptions for Column D – Finance. 14. On the Header 2 row for each FD column, type the department descriptions for Column E – IT. 15. Save the column definition as Side by Side Departments. Because you are using an existing row definition, the report definition can now be modified to use the newly created column definition and the existing row definition. 16. On the Window menu, select New report definition to open the report definition. 17. Select Income statement – default as the row definition and Side by side departments as the column definition. 18. Save the report definition as Side by side departmental income statement. 19. Change the base year to 2012. 20. Change the detail level to Financial, Account, and Transaction. 21. Save your changes and select Generate. 22. When the report opens, you can explore it.

Exercise – Print customer and vendor account statements Link: https://docs.microsoft.com/en-us/learn/modules/work-with-analytics-reporting-in-dynamics365-finance-ops/11-exercise-print-customer-vendor-account-statements You need to print account statements for customers and vendors that display information for a period that you select for the FRSI legal entity that is based in France. 1.

Go to Accounts receivable > Inquiries and reports > Customers > Customer account statement report - France.

In the From date field, enter a date.

In the To date field, enter a date.

In the Assessment date field, enter a date.

Select OK.

Go to Accounts payable > Inquiries and reports > Vendor reports > Account statement.

In the From date field, enter a date.

In the To date field, enter a date.

www.dynamicscompanions.com Dynamics Companions

- 105 -

DYNAMICS COMPANIONS CERTIFICATION EXAM STUDY GUIDE

EXAM MB-300: MICROSOFT DYNAMICS 365 UNIFIED OPERATIONS CORE

In the Assessment date field, enter a date.

10. Select OK. The accounts will then be printed on screen or to a printer, depending on your setup.

Work with analytics and reporting in Finance and Operations knowledge check Link: https://docs.microsoft.com/en-us/learn/modules/work-with-analytics-reporting-in-dynamics365-finance-ops/12-analytics-reporting-quiz

Work with analytics and reporting in Finance and Operations knowledge check 1.

Which of the following Power BI content is intended for cost controllers or anyone who is responsible for performing cost control of an organization? a.

Cost accounting analysis

b. Financial performance c. 2.

Credit and collections management

What is the name of the tool that is used to customize and create financial statements such as balance sheet, income statements, and cashflow statements? a.

Financial report designer

b. SQL Server Reporting Services (SSRS) c.

Electronic reporting

Summary Link: https://docs.microsoft.com/en-us/learn/modules/work-with-analytics-reporting-in-dynamics365-finance-ops/13-analytics-reporting-summary In this module, you learned about different types of reports and inquiries in Finance and Operations, including those that are out-of-the-box in a default installation. You also learned how to use the Report designer to update the design of financial reports. Finally, you learned about the integration of Power BI, PowerApps, and Microsoft Flow in Finance and Operations.

www.dynamicscompanions.com Dynamics Companions

- 106 -

DYNAMICS COMPANIONS CERTIFICATION EXAM STUDY GUIDE

EXAM MB-300: MICROSOFT DYNAMICS 365 UNIFIED OPERATIONS CORE

Module 5: Build and Test Mobile Apps This module explains the guidelines and design patterns of a mobile app for Dynamics 365 for Finance and Operations. Additionally, it explains how to build and test mobile apps based on a use case scenario. The mobile platform makes it easy to change the forms and mobile app definitions to include customizations that are made to Finance and Operations. Mobile apps enable rich offline and mobile interactions and provide an easy-to-use designer experience. Developers can create simplified forms in Microsoft Visual Studio and then design mobile apps that expose this functionality. Lessons •

Overview of Unified Operations mobile app

•

Build and use mobile apps

•

Practice Lab

•

Module Summary

You will have learned how to create a mobile app and publish it in Finance and Operations. Understanding the design considerations for a mobile app helps you create your mobile app to match the user experience of a modern application. You will also have learned that to use and work with a Finance and Operations, you need to download the Microsoft Dynamics 365 Unified Operations app. Additionally, you will have discovered how to run the Dynamics 365 Unified Operations app to connect to Finance and Operations, and how to use the published mobile apps and pull-to-refresh the data.

www.dynamicscompanions.com Dynamics Companions

- 107 -

DYNAMICS COMPANIONS CERTIFICATION EXAM STUDY GUIDE

EXAM MB-300: MICROSOFT DYNAMICS 365 UNIFIED OPERATIONS CORE

Design and build mobile apps for Dynamics 365 for Finance and Operations Link: https://docs.microsoft.com/en-us/learn/modules/design-and-build-mobile-apps-fordynamics-365-finance-ops/ We live in a digital age, and it’s difficult to imagine a day without smart devices. You use mobile applications almost every day for your social engagements, online banking, and for booking hotels, flights, and rental cars. With this in mind, it seems only natural that you can use Dynamics 365 for Finance and Operations on your smart device. In this module, you will learn about: •

The Microsoft Dynamics 365 Unified Operations mobile app

•

Use cases for mobile apps

•

How to build and work with workspaces

Introduction Link: https://docs.microsoft.com/en-us/learn/modules/design-and-build-mobile-apps-fordynamics-365-finance-ops/1-design-build-mobile-apps-introduction This module explains the guidelines and design patterns of a mobile app for Dynamics 365 for Finance and Operations. Additionally, it explains how to build and test mobile apps based on a use case scenario. The mobile platform makes it easy to change the forms and mobile app definitions to include customizations that are made to Finance and Operations. Mobile apps enable rich offline and mobile interactions and provide an easy-to-use designer experience. Developers can create simplified forms in Microsoft Visual Studio and then design mobile apps that expose this functionality. In this module, you will learn about: •

An overview of the Microsoft Dynamics 365 Unified Operations mobile app

•

The use cases for mobile apps

•

How to build and work with workspaces

www.dynamicscompanions.com Dynamics Companions

- 108 -

DYNAMICS COMPANIONS CERTIFICATION EXAM STUDY GUIDE

EXAM MB-300: MICROSOFT DYNAMICS 365 UNIFIED OPERATIONS CORE

Overview of the Dynamics 365 Unified Operations mobile app Link: https://docs.microsoft.com/en-us/learn/modules/design-and-build-mobile-apps-fordynamics-365-finance-ops/2-overview-unified-operations-mobile-app The Dynamics 365 for Finance and Operations Application Object Server (AOS) is used for sharing application objects and information as an effective tool to increase application performance. The mobile app communicates with the AOS to get metadata for the mobile workspaces (and the pages and fields that appear on the page), and to get data for the fields on the pages.

Each time that the mobile app requests data for a page, AOS creates a new session that uses the context of the person who is using the mobile app. AOS then uses that personâ&#x20AC;&#x2122;s context to open the corresponding forms (by using the corresponding menu items). AOS can open multiple forms in quick succession and perform actions on those forms (for example, filtering, opening Fact Boxes, changing tab pages, and clicking buttons). Any business logic on the forms is also run as usual. Through that process, AOS collects the data values from the requested fields and then sends that data back to the mobile app.

Navigating in the mobile app To start working with the mobile app framework, go to Settings > Mobile app. www.dynamicscompanions.com Dynamics Companions

- 109 -

DYNAMICS COMPANIONS CERTIFICATION EXAM STUDY GUIDE

EXAM MB-300: MICROSOFT DYNAMICS 365 UNIFIED OPERATIONS CORE

Navigation in the mobile app consists of four simple concepts: the dashboard, workspaces, pages, and actions. When the mobile app framework opens, you can view the Manage mobile app designer. Here, you can publish and unpublish apps, import and export apps, and create a new mobile app. When you start the app, it opens on the dashboard. On the dashboard, notice that it contains a list of workspaces that are available in your Finance and Operations environment.

In each workspace, you can view a list of pages that are available for that workspace. www.dynamicscompanions.com Dynamics Companions

- 110 -

DYNAMICS COMPANIONS CERTIFICATION EXAM STUDY GUIDE

EXAM MB-300: MICROSOFT DYNAMICS 365 UNIFIED OPERATIONS CORE

On a page, you can view data that is collected from one or more Finance and Operations pages.

The job step functionality automatically generates the task guide for the business user, as shown in the following figure.

www.dynamicscompanions.com Dynamics Companions

- 111 -

DYNAMICS COMPANIONS CERTIFICATION EXAM STUDY GUIDE

EXAM MB-300: MICROSOFT DYNAMICS 365 UNIFIED OPERATIONS CORE

From a page, you can go to other pages for related data, such as an entity details or lines. On a page, you can view a list of actions that are available for that page. Actions let you create or edit existing data.

www.dynamicscompanions.com Dynamics Companions

- 112 -

DYNAMICS COMPANIONS CERTIFICATION EXAM STUDY GUIDE

EXAM MB-300: MICROSOFT DYNAMICS 365 UNIFIED OPERATIONS CORE

After you finish designing your application, publish it to make it available on Dynamics 365 for Unified operations mobile app on your device. To view the published application on your smart device, such as phone or tablet, you can either touch the screen with a finger or use a pointing device to press a button, drag the screen downward, and then release it. These actions signal to the application, such as the main landing page (dashboard) of the app, where you can view the list of workspaces to refresh the contents of the screen. This is called pull-to-refresh. You can pull-to-refresh in the mobile app to make the mobile app update its data or metadata at any time. After editing an existing workspace or publishing a workspace, be sure to pull-to-refresh in the mobile app, in either the list of workspaces (if you added a workspace or business logic) or the list of pages (if you modified a page or an action). Workspaces that have been published to Finance and Operations are visible to all users. In Finance and Operations, menu item security automatically hides pages that the user doesn’t have access to. If a user doesn’t have access to any pages in a workspace, the workspace is hidden. The mobile app designer lets you select the specific data fields from forms that should appear in the mobile app.

Page design guidelines Link: https://docs.microsoft.com/en-us/learn/modules/design-and-build-mobile-apps-fordynamics-365-finance-ops/3-page-design-guidelines Before you begin to use the designer to build pages and actions, it’s important that you plan the overall design of the mobile workspace that you want to build. Avoid beginning the process by thinking about the forms that you want to use. We recommend that you orient your design around the entities that you plan to use in the mobile workspace. From the perspective of the mobile app, the forms are just a mechanism for retrieving data, and the run-time user interface (UI) behavior of a form isn't applicable to the mobile app. Therefore, you should first identify your entities and the relationships between them. For each entity, the following questions will help you decide how you should design your forms and pages.

Create a list view for an entity in the mobile app 1.

Identify or create a form in Finance and Operations that contains a grid for an entity.

Make sure that the grid is bound to the table that represents the entity.

Make sure that the form has a menu item that is root-navigable.

Make sure that the form can be opened directly via a URL that includes the menu item parameter.

Make sure that the filter pane enables the grid to be filtered based on the desired fields.

In the designer, create a page for the entity.

In the designer, put only a list on the page.

In the designer, put the desired fields in the list on the page. www.dynamicscompanions.com Dynamics Companions

- 113 -

DYNAMICS COMPANIONS CERTIFICATION EXAM STUDY GUIDE

EXAM MB-300: MICROSOFT DYNAMICS 365 UNIFIED OPERATIONS CORE

Details view If you want just a details view for an entity, it's likely that the entity is singular (does not permit more than one instance to be run at the same time) for a given context (such as a given user or a given company). This pattern applies, for example, to a details view for an employeeâ&#x20AC;&#x2122;s own profile in a self-service workspace or a details view for the company context that is used for the current session. Refer to the guidelines for creating a page for a details view.

Create a details view for an entity in the mobile app 1.

Identify or create a form in Finance and Operations that contains the details view for this entity.

Make sure that the Master Root Data Source on the form is bound to the table that represents the entity.

Make sure that the form has a menu item that is root-navigable.

Make sure that the form can be opened directly via a URL that includes the menu item parameter.

In the designer, create a page for the entity.

In the designer, put the desired fields on the page.

Create list-to-details navigation for an entity in the mobile app 1.

Make sure that you've created both a List view page and a Details view page for the entity by using the designer.

Make sure that the entity for the list view is the same as the entity for the details view. In other words, the table that is bound to the grid on the form that is used for the list view must be the same table that is the Master Root Data Source on the form that is used for the details view.

Make sure that the form that is used for the details view can be filtered on a unique key field by using the filter pane.

In the designer, make sure that the List view page is linked to the Details view page. Select the list, open the properties, and then set the Details view page by using the lookup.

Add a reference field that enables navigation to a related entity 1.

Make sure that either a List view page or a Details view page exists for the entity that contains the reference.

Make sure that the page contains the reference field from the entity that is being referenced.

Make sure that the referenced field is bound to the referenced entityâ&#x20AC;&#x2122;s data source, and that the referenced entity is outer joined (1-0..1) or inner joined (1-1) to the data source for the entity that contains the reference.

Make sure that you've created a separate Details view page for the entity that is being referenced. www.dynamicscompanions.com Dynamics Companions

- 114 -

DYNAMICS COMPANIONS CERTIFICATION EXAM STUDY GUIDE

EXAM MB-300: MICROSOFT DYNAMICS 365 UNIFIED OPERATIONS CORE

Make sure that the reference field has been added to the page.

In the designer, make sure that the reference field has been linked to the details view for the referenced entity.

Action design guidelines Link: https://docs.microsoft.com/en-us/learn/modules/design-and-build-mobile-apps-fordynamics-365-finance-ops/4-action-design-guidelines Actions let users create, update, or delete data, in addition to running business processes on that data (such as submit, confirm, and post). A user who completes an action first supplies the data for the action (if the action accepts data input). When the user has finished supplying the data, the action is put into a queue of similar actions (which are sometimes referred to as data sync operations). If the device is connected or online, the queue is processed immediately. Otherwise, it's processed the next time that the device is connected. The queue is processed asynchronously and doesn’t require the user’s attention unless an error occurs during data synchronization. Errors of this type can occur because of server-side data validation. Actions are powered by a server-side mechanism that resembles task recordings. This mechanism extracts the user’s input from the action and then automatically runs the business process steps on the server by using the input values that the user supplied. The mechanism automatically opens pages, clicks buttons on the pages, and enters the user's input into controls on the pages. This process of playing back the action against the pages on the server occurs asynchronously, against “headless” pages. The mobile app informs the user when the process is completed, and shows the user any info, warning, or error messages that the pages logged. When you design an action, it’s important that you first consider what entity the action is related to. In the current framework, an action must operate on only one entity. An action should not update multiple entities at the same time. For example, an action to create a new sales order should create only the header for the order. It should not also try to create lines, because the lines are separate entities. When you decide to design the action, consider the following questions to determine how to proceed.

How do I design an action that enables an entity to be created or edited? 1.

Identify or create a List view page for the entity.

Make sure that the form that is used for the List view page includes a New or Edit button that can be used to add new records to the list or edit the visible record (existing record).

Use the designer to create a new action for the page. While you're designing the action, be careful not to perform any unnecessary actions.

Make sure that the form that is used for the Details view page lets users open a specific record by applying filters in the filter pane.

www.dynamicscompanions.com Dynamics Companions

- 115 -

DYNAMICS COMPANIONS CERTIFICATION EXAM STUDY GUIDE

EXAM MB-300: MICROSOFT DYNAMICS 365 UNIFIED OPERATIONS CORE

Enter data only in those fields that should be available to the user, and then select only those buttons that are required (for example the New button and the Save button).

How do I design an action that enables an entity to be deleted? 1.

Identify or create a Details view page for the entity.

Make sure that the form that is used for the Details view page includes a Delete button that can be used to delete the visible record.

Make sure that the form that is used for the Details view page lets users open a specific record by applying filters in the filter pane.

Use the designer to create a new action for the page, and then select Delete as a part of the process of designing the action.

How do I design an action that enables a business action to be performed on an entity? 1.

Identify or create a Details view page for the entity.

Make sure that the form that is used for the Details view page includes a Delete button that can be used to delete the visible record.

Make sure that the form that is used for the Details view page lets users open a specific record by applying filters in the filter pane.

Use the designer to create a new action for the page, and then select the steps that are required in the business action.

You don't necessarily have to enter data in fields as part of the action. For an action such as submit, select the Submit button (and acknowledge any confirmations that appear).

How do I design an action that enables a field value to be set via a rich lookup? Lookups for fields in the mobile app don't have a correlation to the advanced lookup behaviors in Finance and Operations. Regardless of whether you have a custom lookup in Finance and Operations or an automatic lookup that uses a simple query, the mobile app doesn't run an existing lookup code when it must determine which UI to show the user. Remember that the user might be offline while he or she is using the app, and server-side code isnâ&#x20AC;&#x2122;t run until the action is synchronized. However, lookup or control overrides, such as modified, are run when the value is set by the mobile server as it synchronizes the data from the action. When the mobile app detects that a field on an action was selected from a lookup field on a form, it shows a device-native combo box or a list picker control, and populates the items by directly querying the backing table of that lookup field.

www.dynamicscompanions.com Dynamics Companions

- 116 -

DYNAMICS COMPANIONS CERTIFICATION EXAM STUDY GUIDE

EXAM MB-300: MICROSOFT DYNAMICS 365 UNIFIED OPERATIONS CORE

Form design requirements Link: https://docs.microsoft.com/en-us/learn/modules/design-and-build-mobile-apps-fordynamics-365-finance-ops/5-form-design-requirements Although a pageLink control can be used to show counts (totals), it can be slow because it must load the target page before it counts the number of rows. Additionally, the count that is calculated can be incorrect because there is a limit on the number of rows that are retrieved. If you want to make mobile workspaces work more quickly, we recommended that you use a regular field to show the count and then model the field as a pageLink control in the mobile client. Consider the following requirements when designing the form for a mobile app: •

Each form must have an associated Display Menu Item.

•

The Display Menu Item's Allow Root Navigation property must be set to Yes. This setting enables the mobile framework to open the form that is referenced by the menu item.

•

Each form must be directly accessible via its Display Menu Item.

•

To verify accessibility, open the menu item via a URL. Append &mi= to the URL, where the value is the Application Object Tree (AOT) name of your menu item.

•

If the form doesn't open or show data when you access it in this way, the form won't work with the mobile app.

•

Each form that shows data must have one Master Root Data Source.

•

This data source must be the first data source on the form (top-most in the designer).

•

This data source must not be joined to any other data sources.

•

Each form must work with the data source filters.

The mobile app does online searches against Finance and Operations data by using the Filters framework behind the scenes. It enables list-to-details navigation (and other context-aware navigation) by first opening the target form via the menu item and then using the Filters framework to show only the specified record context. The table that the grid is bound to on form A (the list form) must be the Master Root Data Source on the details form (form B). When a user selects a record in the list on form A, the mobile framework navigates with record context by applying filters on form B that uniquely identify the record.

Design considerations Link: https://docs.microsoft.com/en-us/learn/modules/design-and-build-mobile-apps-fordynamics-365-finance-ops/6-design-considerations You can use display methods to show data on pages (both list type pages and detail type pages). However, you need to remember two key points when you use display methods:

www.dynamicscompanions.com Dynamics Companions

- 117 -

DYNAMICS COMPANIONS CERTIFICATION EXAM STUDY GUIDE

EXAM MB-300: MICROSOFT DYNAMICS 365 UNIFIED OPERATIONS CORE

•

Searching - When a user performs an online search (that is, a search that is run against data in Finance and Operations instead of locally cached data), the search won't match against display methods because the Filtering framework in Finance and Operations doesn't support searches against data methods. However, when a user does a search against locally cached data, the search will match against display methods, provided that the records have been cached on the device.

•

Offline - If a user creates or updates data while his or her device isn’t connected to the Finance and Operations server, temporary records are created in the local cache. Because these temporary records haven't yet been processed in Finance and Operations, if the records have any fields that are automatically populated or defaults by server-side business logic, these fields will remain empty until the records have been synced with Finance and Operations. Display methods fall into this category of fields that will be empty for a temporary record.

Designing for offline Unlike the Finance and Operations web client, which is highly connected to the Finance and Operations server and maintains an open user session that has open forms on the server, the mobile app creates user sessions (and opens forms) only in short bursts while the app is being synced with the server (via data read for pages, or via data write and update for actions). If there are no actions to sync with the server, and if the local data cache is up to date, the mobile app won't communicate with the Finance and Operations server as a user navigates around the app (unless the user triggers an explicit pull-to-refresh). It's important that you keep this data flow pattern in mind while you design pages and actions in the mobile app. You should not expect Finance and Operations form logic to run every time that a page is loaded or an action is started. You should also never expect form logic to run while a user is completing an action. Form logic is run only when the action is being synced with the Finance and Operations server.

Localize mobile workspaces A config object can be added to the workspace metadata when it's requested by the mobile app. Later, the config object can be used to provide localization support. A workspace class can be used to provide localized strings for the workspace title and description. If you don't localize the title and description, the fields will be in the language that you implemented them in.

Understand use cases for mobile apps Link: https://docs.microsoft.com/en-us/learn/modules/design-and-build-mobile-apps-fordynamics-365-finance-ops/7-understand-use-cases-for-mobile-apps If you plan to create a mobile app for Finance and Operations, you must first identify what your app must do.

www.dynamicscompanions.com Dynamics Companions

- 118 -

DYNAMICS COMPANIONS CERTIFICATION EXAM STUDY GUIDE

EXAM MB-300: MICROSOFT DYNAMICS 365 UNIFIED OPERATIONS CORE

As a functional consultant, you should already have gathered business requirements, identified the gaps, and discussed the requirements for the new mobile app functionality with the customer to identify what the customer’s user must achieve by using the app. Remember, you should not design a mobile app for a specific person. You need to consider the role and business case scenario created from the gathered requirement for the person who has been assigned to that role. This approach leads to creation of the app’s functional requirement document. The functional requirements for any applications are typically described as use cases. A use case is a description of a specific interaction between a user and Finance and Operations. You also need to consider personalizing the user experience in the functional requirements. The following are typical questions that need to be answered in the functional requirement for personalization: •

Who is the user?

•

What do they want to achieve by using the mobile app?

•

What preferences should be captured and saved on a specific user’s device?

In the functional requirement, you need to optimize the search capability of the mobile app to find the data that the user needs. Some examples would include keeping the search history and the actions needed after finding the preferred results from search functionality. By gathering information regarding the users’ responsibilities, you can determine a common behavior pattern for all users, and then use it to improve the effectiveness and security of the mobile app. Consider the following scenario: Your customer’s sales persons need to access Dynamics 365 for Finance and Operations while they are out of the office. They need to access on-hand inventory, view the prices per unit, learn about special promotions, find out about the promise date, and be able to create sales orders or sales quotations even if they have no access to the internet. You can use the Dynamics 365 for Unified Operations mobile app, which acts as a host for a mobile app that was created with Finance and Operations. The mobile app that is going to be designed needs to address the requirements such as inventory lookups for sites and warehouses, check prices and promotions, and take appropriate actions such as creating a new sales order or sales quotation. No need to worry about offline capability. Thanks to Dynamics 365 Unified Operations, offline capability is a built-in feature. All you need to do is to include actions to sync the data with the application object server (AOS), and make sure that the local data cache is up to date. What you need to keep in mind is the needs of other departments and their end users, and if they require some of the same functionality as those in the sales department. For example, the procurement agents of the same company for which you are planning to create a mobile app for their sales department need the inventory lookups as well. However, they need to create a purchase order instead of a sales order. www.dynamicscompanions.com Dynamics Companions

- 119 -

DYNAMICS COMPANIONS CERTIFICATION EXAM STUDY GUIDE

EXAM MB-300: MICROSOFT DYNAMICS 365 UNIFIED OPERATIONS CORE

In this case, you need to think object-oriented design. For example, you create three separate applications, one for on-hand inventory, one for sales department, and one for purchasing department. In the next unit, you will learn how to build and use mobile apps in Finance and Operations. Before you start creating your new mobile app, it is wise to be aware of out-of-the-box mobile apps that are already available to find out if you can take advantage of their functionality in your mobile app without “re-inventing the wheel,” so to speak. Currently, the following mobile apps are available in Finance and Operations: •

Company directory - Allows you to view and contact other employees in your organization.

•

My team - You can view your direct reports and extended staff, and send praise to individuals in your reporting chain.

•

Invoice approval - Provides a listing of invoices that have been assigned to you through the vendor invoice header workflow process.

•

Expense management - You can capture and upload a receipt so that you can attach it to an expense report later. The mobile workspace also lets you quickly create an expense line by using an attached receipt.

•

Purchase order approval - View and respond to purchase orders with actions such as approve or reject.

•

Project time entry - You can enter and save time against a project by using your mobile device.

•

Cost controlling - Cost center managers can see the performance of the cost center.

•

Inventory on-hand - Gain insights into reserved and available inventory.

•

Sales orders - You can stay up-to date on your sales orders.

•

Vendor collaboration - Vendors can stay up-to-date on the purchase orders that have been sent to them for approval. They can also view information about new and updated purchase orders and contacts.

Get the Dynamics 365 Unified Operations mobile app Link: https://docs.microsoft.com/en-us/learn/modules/design-and-build-mobile-apps-fordynamics-365-finance-ops/8-get-unified-operations-mobile-app The Dynamics 365 Unified Operations mobile app is available for the most popular mobile operating systems. You need to have a Finance and Operations instance and valid user credentials to log in to the app. •

Android - Search for Dynamics 365 Unified Operations on the Google Play Store

•

iPhone - Search for Dynamics 365 Unified Operations on the iTunes App Store

www.dynamicscompanions.com Dynamics Companions

- 120 -

DYNAMICS COMPANIONS CERTIFICATION EXAM STUDY GUIDE

EXAM MB-300: MICROSOFT DYNAMICS 365 UNIFIED OPERATIONS CORE

Build and use mobile apps Link: https://docs.microsoft.com/en-us/learn/modules/design-and-build-mobile-apps-fordynamics-365-finance-ops/9-build-use-mobile-apps This unit explains how to build and work with workspaces for mobile apps.

Exercise - Create and test a mobile app Link: https://docs.microsoft.com/en-us/learn/modules/design-and-build-mobile-apps-fordynamics-365-finance-ops/10-exercise-create-test-mobile-app The goal of the lab exercise is to apply the knowledge youâ&#x20AC;&#x2122;ve gained regarding building and working with workspaces in Finance and Operations. The mobile app designer lets you select the specific data fields from forms that should appear in the mobile app.

Create Mobile Workspaces 1.

Ensure that USMF is selected as the legal entity.

Go to Settings > Mobile app.

Create a new workspace named Customer Management.

Specify the name of the workspace, an icon, and a color.

Add a page to the workspace.

Specify the name Customers to the page.

Specify the page description Show all customers to the page.

Select Done.

Expand the left menu on the dashboard to open Accounts Receivable > Customer > All Customers page.

10. In the Manage Mobile app page on the right, click Select Fields to select the data fields to add to the page. 11. On the All Customers page, on the header, select the Account, Name, and Customer group fields by selecting the yellow plus sign (+) that appears next to the fields. 12. Note that the fields are added in the order that you select them in. You can add fields from multiple forms, in any order.

www.dynamicscompanions.com Dynamics Companions

- 121 -

DYNAMICS COMPANIONS CERTIFICATION EXAM STUDY GUIDE

EXAM MB-300: MICROSOFT DYNAMICS 365 UNIFIED OPERATIONS CORE

13. When youâ&#x20AC;&#x2122;ve finished selecting fields, click Done. 14. Select Back. 15. Select Done. 16. Note the mobile app Id, Name, and Description. 17. Select Save. 18. Select Publish to make your mobile workspace available for use in Dynamics 365 Unified Operations. 19. Note your organization ID as it appears on the Login page URL (this is the URL that you will use to log in to Dynamics 365 for Finance and Operations).

Install Dynamics 365 Unified Operations 1.

Depending on your device, download the Dynamics 365 Unified Operations from either iTunes App Store or Google Play Store .

When the download and install is finished, open the Dynamics 365 Unified Operations Mobile App on your device.

On the Organization URL, enter the URL saved in step 19 and select Connect. On the Agreement page, select the I understand checkbox and select Connect.

Enter your credentials and select Sign In.

Use the Dynamics 365 Unified Operations for mobile app 1.

On the Home page, notice that the published workspaces appear.

If it does not appear, you need to use pull-to-refresh to view the mobile workspace.

Notice the Customer Management workspace that you published.

Open the menu by clicking the menu icon on the top left. Select Change Company.

Search for and select USMF from the list of companies. Then, wait for the app home page to refresh.

Select Customers. The list of all customers will appear.

Pull the menu of features to search from by using the top right icon.

Notice that these are the same fields that you selected to be included in the app.

Check your knowledge Link: https://docs.microsoft.com/en-us/learn/modules/design-and-build-mobile-apps-fordynamics-365-finance-ops/11-design-build-mobile-apps-quiz

www.dynamicscompanions.com Dynamics Companions

- 122 -

DYNAMICS COMPANIONS CERTIFICATION EXAM STUDY GUIDE

EXAM MB-300: MICROSOFT DYNAMICS 365 UNIFIED OPERATIONS CORE

Design and build mobile apps for Dynamics 365 for Finance and Operations knowledge check 1.

Which of the following features correctly describes a mobile app design consideration in Finance and Operations? a.

You don't have to re-implement your validation procedures, business logic, or security configuration.

b. You need to re-implement your validation procedures, business logic, or security configuration. c.

You need to use Visual Studio to create the mobile app and use the existing validation procedures, business logic, or security configuration from Application Explorer.

Which of the following features correctly describes what you need to do to publish a mobile app in Finance and Operations? a.

Use the Publish button on the mobile app designer.

b. Use the Data management workspace to create a package, and then make the zip file available for download so users can install the app on their devices. c. 3.

Use Visual Studio to publish your mobile app.

Which one of the following mobile apps can you use to capture and upload a receipt so that you can attach it to an expense report later? a.

Use a built-in mobile app for Expense management.

b. Create a new mobile app for Expense management. c.

Use a built-in mobile app for Cost controlling.

Summary Link: https://docs.microsoft.com/en-us/learn/modules/design-and-build-mobile-apps-fordynamics-365-finance-ops/12-design-build-mobile-apps-summary In this module, you have learned how to create a mobile app and publish it in Finance and Operations. Understanding the design considerations for a mobile app helps you create your mobile app to match the user experience of a modern application. You also learned that to use and work with Finance and Operations on a mobile device, you need to download the Dynamics 365 Unified Operations app. Additionally, you discovered how to run the Dynamics 365 Unified Operations app to connect to Finance and Operations, and how to use the published mobile apps and pull-to-refresh the data.

www.dynamicscompanions.com Dynamics Companions

- 123 -

DYNAMICS COMPANIONS CERTIFICATION EXAM STUDY GUIDE

EXAM MB-300: MICROSOFT DYNAMICS 365 UNIFIED OPERATIONS CORE

Module 6: Create, Maintain and Use Workflows A workflow represents a business process. It defines how a document flows, or moves, through the system by showing who must complete a task, make a decision, or approve a document. Some organizations require that specific processes are approved by a user other than the person who enters the record. These workflow processes might require manual approval, workflow approval, or no approval. Lessons •

Workflows for business processes

•

Create and setup workflows

•

Assign users to workflow touchpoints

•

Use Work items

•

Practice Lab

•

Module Summary

In this module, you learned how to apply automation by using workflows, and discovered that defining a specific type allows a business to control each step in a critical process. You also learned that workflows can be used as procedural steps that use approvals for several journal types. Additionally, you learned that you can define several versions for each workflow and modify an existing workflow without deleting the original. These workflow processes can require manual approval, workflow approval, or no approval. After gaining an understanding of the workflow architecture, elements, and actions, you then learned how to set up workflows, configure workflow properties, and add a manual or automated task in a workflow. Finally, you learned how to configure an approval process in a workflow, assign users to workflow touchpoints, configure an approval step in a workflow, and use the Work items functionality to process a workflow.

www.dynamicscompanions.com Dynamics Companions

- 124 -

DYNAMICS COMPANIONS CERTIFICATION EXAM STUDY GUIDE

EXAM MB-300: MICROSOFT DYNAMICS 365 UNIFIED OPERATIONS CORE

Work with workflows in Dynamics 365 for Finance and Operations Link: https://docs.microsoft.com/en-us/learn/modules/create-use-workflows-in-dynamics-365finance-ops/ Some organizations require that specific processes are approved by a user other than the person who enters the record. These workflow processes might require manual approval, workflow approval, or no approval. In this module, you will learn how to: •

Use the workflow architecture, elements, and actions

•

Create and set up workflows

•

Configure workflow properties

•

Configure a manual task in a workflow

•

Configure an automated task in a workflow

•

Configure an approval process in a workflow

•

Assign users to workflow elements

•

Configure an approval step in a workflow

•

Use work items functionality

Introduction Link: https://docs.microsoft.com/en-us/learn/modules/create-use-workflows-in-dynamics-365finance-ops/1-configure-workflows-introduction A workflow represents a business process. It defines how a document flows, or moves, through the system by showing who must complete a task, make a decision, or approve a document. Some organizations require that specific processes are approved by a user other than the person who enters the record. These workflow processes might require manual approval, workflow approval, or no approval. In this module, you will learn how to: •

Use the workflow architecture, elements, and actions

•

Create and set up workflows

•

Configure workflow properties

www.dynamicscompanions.com Dynamics Companions

- 125 -

DYNAMICS COMPANIONS CERTIFICATION EXAM STUDY GUIDE

EXAM MB-300: MICROSOFT DYNAMICS 365 UNIFIED OPERATIONS CORE

•

Configure a manual task in a workflow

•

Configure an automated task in a workflow

•

Configure an approval process in a workflow

•

Assign users to workflow elements

•

Configure an approval step in a workflow

•

Use work items functionality

Workflow types for business processes Link: https://docs.microsoft.com/en-us/learn/modules/create-use-workflows-in-dynamics-365finance-ops/2-workflow-types-business-processes Workflows are available throughout many different areas of Dynamics 365 for Finance and Operations. In this unit, you will identify existing workflows and learn about the workflow types in Finance and Operations. In Finance and Operations, the term workflow is defined in two ways: •

Workflow as a System - This system provides functionality that can be used to create individual workflows or business processes.

•

Workflow as a Business Process - This business process defines how a document flows through the system by displaying who must process and approve it.

As mentioned, a workflow represents a business process. It defines how a document flows, or moves, through the system by showing who must complete a task, make a decision either by using a manual or conditional decision controls, or approve a document. To first start the workflow, configure either an approval element, sub-workflow, or a task. Then, it will be submitted for approval to complete the workflow. To better understand workflows, consider the following scenario. Suppose that Sam submits an expense report for USD 8,000.00. In this scenario, Ivan must review the receipts that Sam routes to him. After that, Frank and Sue must approve the expense report. You can have multiple workflows of the same type. For example, suppose you are creating purchase requisition workflows for each country or region in which you operate. You might want to name a purchase requisition workflow as Purchase Requisitions Denmark or Purchase Requisitions Spain.

Defining Workflow types A workflow configuration is based on a Workflow type. You can create multiple workflow configurations for each workflow type. Workflow types are available for numerous modules throughout the system. For example, in General ledger > Journal setup > General ledger workflows page, select New to view available workflow types.

www.dynamicscompanions.com Dynamics Companions

- 126 -

DYNAMICS COMPANIONS CERTIFICATION EXAM STUDY GUIDE

EXAM MB-300: MICROSOFT DYNAMICS 365 UNIFIED OPERATIONS CORE

Each type of workflow corresponds to a journal type in a specific module. One workflow configuration must be created for each journal type that is used with workflow approvals. By design, some of the workflows are shared across multiple legal entities, which we know as organization-wide workflows, while the other types of workflows are legal entity specific. You can identify the workflow association with your organization by the value of the field in the workflows list page of each module in Finance and Operations, as shown in the figure.

www.dynamicscompanions.com Dynamics Companions

- 127 -

DYNAMICS COMPANIONS CERTIFICATION EXAM STUDY GUIDE

EXAM MB-300: MICROSOFT DYNAMICS 365 UNIFIED OPERATIONS CORE

Some modules do not have any workflow type at all. Alternatively, the type of workflow that you need to have to address a certain business requirement does not exist. If this is the case, your development team can create new workflow types in Finance and Operations by using Visual Studio. Before you plan to create a new workflow, it is always a good idea to see if any out-of-the-box workflows in Finance and Operations can be used instead of creating a new one. You can always create a new version of an existing workflow and modify it in a way that addresses the customer’s business requirements. If no workflow exists for a specific requirement, or no out-of-the-box workflows exist that can address the requirement, your development team can create new workflow templates. Several types of out-of-the-box workflow templates are available in Finance and Operations.

General ledger workflow types The following workflow types are available for General ledger. Each type corresponds to a journal type: •

Ledger daily journal workflow - Use this type to create approval workflows for daily journals.

•

Ledger allocations journal workflow - Use this type to create approval workflows for allocation journals.

•

Ledger eliminations journal workflow - Use this type to create approval workflows for eliminations journal.

•

Advanced ledger entry workflow - Use this type to create approval workflows for advanced ledger entries.

www.dynamicscompanions.com Dynamics Companions

- 128 -

DYNAMICS COMPANIONS CERTIFICATION EXAM STUDY GUIDE

EXAM MB-300: MICROSOFT DYNAMICS 365 UNIFIED OPERATIONS CORE

Accounts payable workflow types The following workflow types are available for Accounts payable: •

Freight Invoice Approval - This workflow supports invoice approval.

•

Vendor invoice line workflow - Use this type to create review workflows for vendor invoice lines.

•

Vendor invoice approval journal workflow - Use this type to create approval workflows for vendor invoice approval journals.

•

Proposed vendor changes workflow - Approve the proposed vendor change.

•

Vendor disbursement journal workflow - Use this type to create approval workflows for vendor disbursement journals.

•

Vendor invoice journal workflow - Use this type to create approval workflows for vendor invoice recording journals.

•

Vendor settle promissory note journal workflow - Use this type to create approval workflows for vendor settle promissory note journals.

•

Vendor redraw promissory note journal workflow - Use this type to create approval workflows for vendor redraw promissory note journals.

•

Vendor invoice workflow - Use this type to create review workflows for vendor invoices.

•

Vendor bank remittance journal workflow - Use this type to create approval workflows for vendor bank remittance journals.

•

Vendor invoice register journal workflow - Use this type to create approval workflows for vendor invoice register journals.

•

Vendor draw promissory note journal workflow - Use this type to create approval workflows for vendor draw promissory note journals.

Accounts receivable workflow types The following workflow types are available for Accounts receivable: •

Customer free text invoice workflow - Use this type to create approval workflows for free text invoices.

•

Customer draw bill of exchange workflow - Use this type to create approval workflows for customer draw bill of exchange journals.

•

Customer settle bill of exchange workflow - Use this type to create approval workflows for customer settle bill of exchange journals.

•

Customer redraw bill of exchange workflow - Use this type to create approval workflows for customer redraw bill of exchange journals.

•

Customer payment workflow - Use this type to create approval workflows for customer payment journals.

www.dynamicscompanions.com Dynamics Companions

- 129 -

DYNAMICS COMPANIONS CERTIFICATION EXAM STUDY GUIDE

EXAM MB-300: MICROSOFT DYNAMICS 365 UNIFIED OPERATIONS CORE

•

Customer protest bill of exchange workflow - Use this type to create approval workflows for customer protest bill of exchange journals.

•

Proposed customer change workflow - Approve the proposed customer change.

•

Customer recurring invoice workflow - Use this type to create approval workflows for recurring invoices.

•

Customer bank remittance workflow - Use this type to create approval workflows for customer bank remittance journals.

Budgeting workflow types The following workflow types are available for Budgeting: •

Budget plan workflow - Use this type to create and review workflows for budget plans.

•

Budget register entry workflow - Use this type to create review workflows for budget register entries.

•

Budget account entry workflow - Use this type to create review workflows for budget account entries.

•

Commitments approval workflow - Use this template to create approval workflows for commitment documents.

•

General budget reservation workflow - Use this template to review general budget reservation documents.

Cash and bank management workflow types The following workflow type is available for cash and bank management: •

Bank reconciliation journal approval workflow - Use this type to create approval workflows for Bank Reconciliation journals.

Expense management workflow types The following workflow types are available for expense management: •

Travel acquisition workflow - Use this type to create approval workflows for travel requisitions.

•

Expense line item auto posting - Use this type to create line item automatic posting workflows for expense reports.

•

Expense report auto posting - Use this type to create document automatic posting workflows for expense reports.

•

Expense line item - Use this type to create line item approvals for expense reports.

•

VAT tax recovery - Use this type to create approval workflows for VAT tax recover.

•

Cash advance request - Use this type to create approval workflows for cash advance requests.

www.dynamicscompanions.com Dynamics Companions

- 130 -

DYNAMICS COMPANIONS CERTIFICATION EXAM STUDY GUIDE

•

EXAM MB-300: MICROSOFT DYNAMICS 365 UNIFIED OPERATIONS CORE

Expense report - Use this type to create document approvals for expense reports.

Fixed asset management workflow types The following workflow types are available for fixed assets: •

Ledger post fixed assets journal workflow - Use this type to create approval workflows for post fixed asset journals.

•

Ledger fixed assets budget journal workflow - Use this type to create approval workflows for fixed asset budget journals.

Human resources workflow types The following workflow types are available for human resources: •

Worker project experience - Use this type to create workflows for worker project experiences from employee self service.

•

Transfer worker - Use this type to create workflows for transferring workers using Personnel actions.

•

Human resources actions workflow - Use this type to create workflows for personnel actions, such as to create new positions or to modify positions.

•

Change worker fixed compensation - Use this type to create workflows for requesting fixed compensation changes for workers by using Personnel actions.

•

Worker position of trust - Use this type to create workflows for worker positions of trust from employee self service.

•

Worker courses - Use this type to create workflows for worker courses from employee self service.

•

Worker loaned amount - Use this type to create workflows for worker loaned items from employee self service.

•

Worker review - Use this type to create workflows for worker review.

•

Worker image - Use this type to create workflows for worker images from employee self service.

•

Worker education - Use this type to create workflows for worker education from employee self service.

•

Worker identification number - Use this type to create workflows for worker identification number from employee self service.

•

Worker skills - Use this type to create workflows for worker skills from employee self service.

•

Worker certificates - Use this type to create workflows for worker certificates from employee self service.

•

Hire worker - Use this type to create workflows for hiring workers by using Personnel actions.

www.dynamicscompanions.com Dynamics Companions

- 131 -

DYNAMICS COMPANIONS CERTIFICATION EXAM STUDY GUIDE

EXAM MB-300: MICROSOFT DYNAMICS 365 UNIFIED OPERATIONS CORE

•

Worker professional experience - Use this type to create workflows for worker professional experiences from employee self service.

•

Worker course registration - Use this type to create workflows for worker course registration.

•

Terminate worker - Use this type to create workflows for terminating workers by using Personnel actions.

Organization workflow types The following workflow types are available for organization: •

Signing limits workflow - Use this template to create a workflow for review of signing limit requests.

•

Create management workflow - Use this type to create a workflow for cases.

•

Document handling - Workflow type for document handling.

Procurement and sourcing workflow types The following workflow types are available for procurement and sourcing: •

Invoice received notification workflow - Use this type to create invoice received notification workflows for unconfirmed product receipts.

•

Product receipt failed notification workflow - Use this type to create notification workflows for failed product receipts.

•

Vendor rebate approval - Vendor rebate workflow approval type.

•

Purchase agreement approval workflow - Use this type to create approval workflows for purchase agreements.

•

Purchase order line workflow - Use this type to create review and approval workflows for purchase order lines.

•

Unconfirmed product receipt rejection notification workflow - Use this type to create notification workflows for rejected unconfirmed product receipts.

•

Purchase requisition line review Use this type to create review workflows for purchase requisition lines.

•

Catalog import approval - Use this type to create review workflows for imported catalogs.

•

Delivery due date notification workflow - Use this type to create delivery due date notification workflows for unconfirmed product receipts.

•

Vendor add application workflow - Use this type to create approval workflows for vendor add application requests.

•

Purchase order workflow - Use this type to create review and approval workflows for purchase orders.

www.dynamicscompanions.com Dynamics Companions

- 132 -

DYNAMICS COMPANIONS CERTIFICATION EXAM STUDY GUIDE

EXAM MB-300: MICROSOFT DYNAMICS 365 UNIFIED OPERATIONS CORE

•

Catalog import product approval Use this type to create review workflows for imported catalog products.

•

Purchase requisition review - Use this type to create review workflows for purchase requisitions.

Project management and accounting workflow types The following workflow types are available for project management and accounting: •

Review original budget workflow - Use this type to review an original budget.

•

Review timesheet line workflow - Use this type to review a timesheet line.

•

Request for quotes workflow - Use this type to review request for quotes.

•

Resource request line workflow - Use this type to review resource request lines.

•

Review timesheet workflow - Use this type to review a timesheet.

•

Review project invoice proposal workflow - Use this type to review project invoice proposals.

•

Review project quotation workflow - Use this type to review project quotations.

•

Review budget revision workflow - Use this type to review a budget revision.

Retail workflow types The following workflow types are available for retail: •

Retail sales line workflow - Use this type to review retail sales line price override.

•

Retail catalog line workflow - Retail catalog approval workflow type.

•

Retail sales quotation line workflow - Use this type to review retail sales quotation line price override.

Sales and marketing workflow types The following workflow type is available for sales and marketing: •

Create customer rebate workflow - Customer rebate workflow type

Time and attendance workflow types The following workflow types are available for time and attendance: •

Time and attendance journal registration workflow - Use this type to create approval workflows for time and attendance journal registration records

•

Time and attendance days total workflow - Use this type to create approval workflows for time and attendance days total records.

www.dynamicscompanions.com Dynamics Companions

- 133 -

DYNAMICS COMPANIONS CERTIFICATION EXAM STUDY GUIDE

EXAM MB-300: MICROSOFT DYNAMICS 365 UNIFIED OPERATIONS CORE

Create and set up workflows Link: https://docs.microsoft.com/en-us/learn/modules/create-use-workflows-in-dynamics-365finance-ops/3-create-set-up-workflows Workflow can be described as the tasks, procedural steps, and people that are required to input and output information, and the tools that are needed for each step in a business process. In this unit, you will learn how to create and set up workflows. At the end of this unit is a video that shows you the process. The overall process of creating a workflow is as follows: •

Select a workflow type from a module of Finance and Operations from the Workflows list page.

•

Click the Workflow type link to open the Click-once workflow editor. This will open the workflow editor.

•

The Workflow elements area of the workflow editor contains the elements that you can add to your workflow. To add elements to the workflow, drag them onto the canvas.

•

To connect one workflow element to another, hold the pointer over an element until connection points appear. Click a connection point and drag it to another element. Be sure to connect all the elements.

•

Configure the properties of the workflow.

•

Configure the elements of the workflow.

•

Resolve any errors or warnings.

•

Save and activate the workflow.

Workflow elements A workflow consists of the following elements: •

Tasks - A task is a unit of work that must be performed. Two types of tasks can be added to a workflow: manual and automated.

•

Approval processes - An approval process is a process that consists of separate steps.

•

Line-item workflow elements - A workflow can be created to process either documents or the line items on a document.

•

Flow-control elements - An example of flow-control elements would be manual and conditional decisions, in addition to parallel activity and sub-workflow.

Manual task A manual task is a unit of work that must be performed by a user. For example, an expense report workflow can have manual tasks that require the assigned users to complete the following actions: •

Review the receipts that are submitted together with an expense report.

www.dynamicscompanions.com Dynamics Companions

- 134 -

DYNAMICS COMPANIONS CERTIFICATION EXAM STUDY GUIDE

•

EXAM MB-300: MICROSOFT DYNAMICS 365 UNIFIED OPERATIONS CORE

Call an employee's manager.

Automated task An automated task is a unit of work that must be performed by the system. No human interaction is required. For example, a sales order workflow can have automated tasks that require the system to complete the following actions: •

Perform a credit check.

•

Create a customer record for the customer if a record doesn't already exist.

Approval processes At each approval step, the user can perform the following actions: •

Approve the document.

•

Reject the document.

•

Request a change to the document.

•

Assign the document to another user for approval.

Line-item workflow elements You can add a line-item workflow element to its document workflow. For example, a purchase order line workflow can be added to the purchase order workflow as shown in the following figure.

www.dynamicscompanions.com Dynamics Companions

- 135 -

DYNAMICS COMPANIONS CERTIFICATION EXAM STUDY GUIDE

EXAM MB-300: MICROSOFT DYNAMICS 365 UNIFIED OPERATIONS CORE

When the line-item element is run, each line item on the document is submitted for processing. You might want all the line items to be processed by the same line-item workflow, or you might want each line item to be processed by a different line-item workflow.

Manual decision A manual decision is a point where a workflow divides into two branches. A user must make a decision, and this decision determines which branch is used to process the document that was submitted.

Conditional decision A conditional decision is also a point where a workflow divides into two branches. However, the system decides which branch is used to process the document that was submitted. To make this decision, the system evaluates the document to determine whether it meets specified conditions.

Parallel activity A parallel activity is a workflow element that includes two or more workflow branches that run at the same time.

www.dynamicscompanions.com Dynamics Companions

- 136 -

DYNAMICS COMPANIONS CERTIFICATION EXAM STUDY GUIDE

EXAM MB-300: MICROSOFT DYNAMICS 365 UNIFIED OPERATIONS CORE

Sub-workflow A sub-workflow is a workflow that runs in the context of another workflow.

Click-once workflow editor The workflow editor is a graphical interface you can use to create Finance and Operations workflows by arranging workflow elements on a design surface. To open the workflow editor, select a Workflow type to open the Click-once workflow editor.

www.dynamicscompanions.com Dynamics Companions

- 137 -

DYNAMICS COMPANIONS CERTIFICATION EXAM STUDY GUIDE

EXAM MB-300: MICROSOFT DYNAMICS 365 UNIFIED OPERATIONS CORE

This is similar to how you would graphically model a business process using Microsoft Visio. You can add, delete, and reposition workflow elements so that they precisely model the business processes you want to automate. The components of the workflow editor include: •

Action Pane - The Action Pane that runs along the top of the workflow editor contains buttons you can use to navigate in the workflow, copy and paste workflow elements, and configure properties. To configure properties of the whole workflow, select the canvas. To configure properties of a specific workflow element, select that element.

•

Workflow elements - A workflow consists of various elements. These elements can be tasks, approval processes, or flow control elements. Workflow elements can be added to the workflow that you are creating. To add elements, drag them from the Workflow elements area onto the canvas.

•

Canvas - The canvas is the main area where workflow elements can be arranged. The flow of the business process you are modeling is indicated by connectors that join the elements. Some elements can contain other elements, which in turn creates a parent-child relationship. For example, an approval element contains one or more approval steps; these steps are child elements of the parent approval element. If you double-click the approval element, you can add and configure the approval steps.

When the workflow editor is open, you can configure the properties of this workflow. To do so, select Basic settings from the ribbon. The Workflow properties page is displayed.

www.dynamicscompanions.com Dynamics Companions

- 138 -

DYNAMICS COMPANIONS CERTIFICATION EXAM STUDY GUIDE

EXAM MB-300: MICROSOFT DYNAMICS 365 UNIFIED OPERATIONS CORE

The workflow owner is the person who will manage and maintain this workflow. You can provide instructions to users who will be submitting documents for processing and approval. This documentation refers to these users as originators. If you want to personalize the text, you can insert placeholders. Placeholders will be replaced with the appropriate data when displayed to users. The place holderâ&#x20AC;&#x2122;s value will be populated from the purchase requisition document when the workflow is used. This enhances business intelligence for the users working with the workflow.

You can use the translations features of Finance and Operations to translate text into a different language. Make sure that the text being translated is verified by a native speaker.

www.dynamicscompanions.com Dynamics Companions

- 139 -

DYNAMICS COMPANIONS CERTIFICATION EXAM STUDY GUIDE

EXAM MB-300: MICROSOFT DYNAMICS 365 UNIFIED OPERATIONS CORE

You can create multiple workflows that are based on the same type. For example, you could create a purchase requisition workflow for each country or region in which you operate, such as Purchase Requisitions Denmark and Purchase Requisitions Spain. When you have multiple workflows that are based on the same type, you need to specify when each workflow should be used. Continuing with the example, you would need to specify that: •

Purchase Requisitions Denmark should be used when: country/region = DK

•

Purchase Requisitions Spain should be used when: country/region = ES

When a document is submitted for processing and approval, a workflow instance is created. You can send notifications to users when workflow instances (based on this workflow) are started, completed, terminated, or stopped because of an error. The following events trigger notifications: •

Started - Select this check box to send notifications when a workflow instance has started.

•

Stopped - Select this check box to send notifications when a workflow instance has stopped because of an error.

•

Completed - Select this check box to send notifications when a workflow instance has completed.

www.dynamicscompanions.com Dynamics Companions

- 140 -

DYNAMICS COMPANIONS CERTIFICATION EXAM STUDY GUIDE

EXAM MB-300: MICROSOFT DYNAMICS 365 UNIFIED OPERATIONS CORE

•

Unrecoverable - Select this check box to send notifications when a workflow instance has stopped due to an unrecoverable error.

•

Terminated - Select this check box to send notifications when a workflow instance has been terminated.

You need to specify who should receive the notification by selecting one of the following options: •

Participant - It contains users who are assigned to a specific group or role. If you select this option, click the Role based tab to select the appropriate role.

•

Hierarchy – It lets you assign the task to users in a specific organizational hierarchy.

•

Workflow user - It contains users who are participants in this workflow. If you select this option, click the Workflow user tab to select a participant of this workflow.

•

User - It allows you to select specific Finance and Operations users. If you select this option, click the User tab to select the appropriate Finance and Operations users.

•

Queue - It allows you to assign the task to a work item queue. If this option is selected, you need to select the Queue based tab and select a queue type as either Conditional work item queues or Work item queues.

•

None - This is a default option. You will need to change it to any of the above options.

If you plan to be out of the office or otherwise unavailable to act on work items, you can delegate, or reassign, your work items to other users. You can create multiple workflows that are based on the same template. When you have multiple workflows that are based on the same template, you need to specify which workflow is the default. Documents that do not meet any of the conditions specified will be processed by the default workflow. After you are done configuring the workflow, you can activate it to be used in Finance and Operations. When a workflow is active, users will be able to submit documents for processing and approval. As you build the workflow, the Errors and warnings pane dynamically displays the number of issues that you must resolve before the workflow is valid. Only a valid workflow can be made active. You can easily identify issues for any workflow element visible on the canvas because the element will display an error icon at its upper right corner. If you hold the pointer over the error icon, an error or warning message will appear. You can access other issues by opening them from the Errors and warnings pane. The Description column lists each issue and describes the problem. For example, the description might indicate that a workflow element, such as a task or approval, does not have instructions for the assigned user. The workflow editor selects the element in the workflow and opens the element properties for editing.

Modify a workflow When you modify a workflow, the system creates a new version of it. If a workflow has two or more versions, you can delete specific versions. For example, you might want to delete earlier versions of a workflow to avoid confusion and to prevent someone from making the wrong version the active one. www.dynamicscompanions.com Dynamics Companions

- 141 -

DYNAMICS COMPANIONS CERTIFICATION EXAM STUDY GUIDE

EXAM MB-300: MICROSOFT DYNAMICS 365 UNIFIED OPERATIONS CORE

Delete a workflow It is possible to delete a workflow and all its versions or delete specific versions of a workflow. To delete a workflow, you must be an administrator or the workflow owner. You cannot delete a workflow that has an active instance. When you delete a workflow on the Workflows list page, you delete all versions of the workflow.

Assign users to workflow elements Link: https://docs.microsoft.com/en-us/learn/modules/create-use-workflows-in-dynamics-365finance-ops/4-assign-users-workflow-elements Some organizations require that journals be approved by a user other than the person who entered the journal. Based on journal names, you can require manual approval, workflow approval, or no approval. If workflow approval is set up for a journal, additional controls are displayed at the top of the Journal form. These include a yellow information bar and a Submit button or an Actions menu. Some buttons in the Journal and Journal voucher pages are not available when a journal has been submitted for workflow journal approval. When the journal is approved, the options in the Post menu are available, and the other controls and fields in the page are not. If a user edits an approved journal, the workflow status is reset, the options in the Post menu are not available, and the other controls and fields are available. When changes have been made, the journal must be resubmitted for approval. A workflow can involve several groups of people: the originator, task assignees, decision makers, and approvers. For example, consider the following workflow approval process. In this scenario, the expense report workflow, Sam is the originator, the members of the queue are task assignees, John is a decision maker, and Frank, Sue, and Ann are approvers.

www.dynamicscompanions.com Dynamics Companions

- 142 -

DYNAMICS COMPANIONS CERTIFICATION EXAM STUDY GUIDE

EXAM MB-300: MICROSOFT DYNAMICS 365 UNIFIED OPERATIONS CORE

Actions that an originator can perform The originator starts a workflow instance by submitting a document for processing. For example, Sam must select the Submit button on the Expense report page to submit his expense report.

Actions that a task assignee can perform A task can be assigned to multiple people or to a work item queue that is monitored by several people. However, only one person can complete a task. For example, Sam has submitted an expense report and has routed his receipts to his organization's Expense Reports department for review. Members of the Seahorse Retailers International Expense Reports department monitor the queue. Julie, a member of that department, has accepted the task of reviewing www.dynamicscompanions.com Dynamics Companions

- 143 -

DYNAMICS COMPANIONS CERTIFICATION EXAM STUDY GUIDE

EXAM MB-300: MICROSOFT DYNAMICS 365 UNIFIED OPERATIONS CORE

Sam's expense report and receipts. She can now perform one of the following actions: complete, reject, delegate, request change, reassign, or release.

Complete When a user completes a task, the document that was submitted for processing is assigned to the next user in the workflow, if there is a next user. If no additional processing is required, the workflow process ends. For example, Julie, a member of the Seahorse Retailers International Expense Reports department, has accepted the task of reviewing Sam's expense report and receipts. After Julie completes her review, the document is assigned to John.

Reject When a user rejects a document, the workflow process ends. For example, Julie, a member of the Seahorse Retailers International Expense Reports department, has accepted the task of reviewing Sam's expense report and receipts. If Julie rejects the expense report, the workflow process ends. Sam can then resubmit the expense report. He can make changes first, or he can resubmit the original version. If Sam resubmits the expense report, the workflow process starts at the manual review task.

Delegate When a user delegates a task, the task is assigned to another user. For example, Julie, a member of the Seahorse Retailers International Expense Reports department, has accepted the task of reviewing Sam's expense report and receipts. Julie delegates this task to Tim, who is her assistant. Tim then acts on behalf of Julie. Therefore, when Tim completes his review, the expense report is assigned to John, just as if Julie had completed the task.

Request change When a user requests a change to a document that was submitted, the document is sent back to the originator. For example, Julie, a member of the Seahorse Retailers International Expense Reports department, has accepted the task of reviewing Sam's expense report and receipts. Julie notices some errors on the expense report and requests changes. The expense report is sent back to Sam. Sam can resubmit the expense report. He can make the requested changes first, or he can resubmit the original version. If Sam resubmits the expense report, a member of the work item queue must review the expense report and the receipts again.

www.dynamicscompanions.com Dynamics Companions

- 144 -

DYNAMICS COMPANIONS CERTIFICATION EXAM STUDY GUIDE

EXAM MB-300: MICROSOFT DYNAMICS 365 UNIFIED OPERATIONS CORE

Reassign The members of a work item queue can reassign documents that are in that queue to another queue. For example, Julie, a member of the Seahorse Retailers International Expense Reports department, is monitoring the queue. To help balance the workload, she can reassign the expense report, and the receipts that are included with it, to another queue.

Release Occasionally, a member of a work item queue might accept a task, but then decide that he or she can't complete the task. In this case, the person who accepted the task can release the document back to the work item queue. For example, Julie, a member of the Seahorse Retailers International Expense Reports department, has accepted the task of reviewing Sam's expense report and receipts. If Julie decides that she can't complete the task, she can release the document. The expense report is returned to the queue, so that other members of the Adventure Works Expense Reports department can complete the task.

Actions that a decision maker can perform Typically, a document is assigned to a decision maker because there is a question that the decision maker must answer. The answer to the question is typically Yes or No, or True or False. If the decision maker doesn't select one of those choices, he or she can delegate the decision. A decision maker must answer a question that is related to the document. The answer to the question is typically Yes or No, or True or False. The answer that the decision maker selects determines the workflow branch that is used to process the document. For example, Sam's expense report is assigned to John. John must decide whether the information in the document requires a call to Sam's manager. If John decides that a call is required, the expense report is assigned to Aretha, who must then call Sam's manager. If John decides that a call isn't required, the expense report is assigned to Frank for approval.

Delegate When a decision maker delegates a decision, the document is assigned to another user who must make the decision. For example, Sam's expense report is assigned to John. John delegates the decision to Maria, who is his assistant. Maria then acts on behalf of John. If Maria decides that a call to Sam's manager is required, the expense report is assigned to Aretha, who must then call Sam's manager. If Maria decides that a call isn't required, the expense report is assigned to Frank for approval.

www.dynamicscompanions.com Dynamics Companions

- 145 -

DYNAMICS COMPANIONS CERTIFICATION EXAM STUDY GUIDE

EXAM MB-300: MICROSOFT DYNAMICS 365 UNIFIED OPERATIONS CORE

Actions that an approver can perform When a document is assigned to an approver, the approver can perform one of the following actions: approve, reject, delegate, or request change.

Approve When an approver approves a document, the document is assigned to the next user in the workflow, if there is a next user. If no additional processing is required, the workflow process ends. For example, Sam has submitted an expense report for USD 7,500, and this document is assigned to Frank. When Frank approves the document, it's assigned to Sue for approval. When Sue approves the expense report, the workflow process ends.

Reject When an approver rejects a document, the workflow process ends. For example, Sam has submitted an expense report for USD 12,000, and this document is assigned to Sue. If Sue rejects the expense report, the workflow process ends. Sam can resubmit the expense report. He can make changes first, or he can resubmit the original version of the expense report. If Sam resubmits the expense report, the workflow process starts at the approval process.

Delegate When an approver delegates a document, the document is assigned to another user for approval. For example, Sam has submitted an expense report for USD 12,000, and this document is assigned to Frank. Frank delegates the expense report to Ann. Ann then acts on behalf of Frank. Therefore, when Ann approves the document, it's assigned to Sue for approval, just as if Frank had approved it. After Sue approves the document, it's sent to Ann for approval.

Use work items functionality Link: https://docs.microsoft.com/en-us/learn/modules/create-use-workflows-in-dynamics-365finance-ops/5-work-items-functionality Your customer wants a workflow for a periodic journal. There is no workflow type for periodic journal. However, you can demonstrate for the customer that, by using the Daily journal workflow, they can fetch the data from a periodic journal in a daily journal and use the workflow for approval. As a functional consultant, you should explain that periodic journals cannot be posted directly into Finance and Operations. The periodic journals are acting as a template for daily journals for periodic vouchers. This helps you avoid unnecessary customization. www.dynamicscompanions.com Dynamics Companions

- 146 -

DYNAMICS COMPANIONS CERTIFICATION EXAM STUDY GUIDE

EXAM MB-300: MICROSOFT DYNAMICS 365 UNIFIED OPERATIONS CORE

Exercise - Create a purchase requisition workflow Link: https://docs.microsoft.com/en-us/learn/modules/create-use-workflows-in-dynamics-365finance-ops/6-exercise-create-purchase-requisition-workflow The Finance and Operations module that you're working in determines the types of workflow that you can create. In this exercise, you will create a purchase requisition workflow. Before a purchase requisition can be submitted for review, you need to configure the workflow.

Before you begin To get the most benefit from this exercise, we recommend that you have the standard sample data available in Finance and Operations that is installed by using Lifecycle Services (LCS). You need either Internet Explorer or Microsoft Edge to follow these steps to select the type of workflow to create and open the workflow editor.

Create and set up workflows 1.

Go to Procurement and sourcing > Setup > Procurement and sourcing workflows.

On the list page that appears, on the Action Pane, select New.

On the Create workflow page, select the Purchase requisition line review.

For the first time, the browser will show a dialog box to open the Microsoft.Dynamics.AX.Framework.WorkflowEditorHost.application page.

Select Open.

Select Run. It takes a few minutes for the workflow editor to be downloaded. When it has finished the download, it automatically opens the Sign in dialog box.

Enter your credentials and password.

The workflow editor appears.

Drag workflow elements onto the canvas 1.

To connect one workflow element to another, hold the pointer over an element until connection points appear.

Click a connection point and drag it to another element. Be sure to connect all the elements.

The Workflow elements area of the workflow editor contains the elements that you can add to your workflow.

To add elements to the workflow, drag Review purchase requisitions and Approve purchase requisitions onto the canvas.

Connect Start to Review purchase requisitions.

Connect Review purchase requisitions to Approve purchase requisitions.

Connect Approve purchase requisitions to End. www.dynamicscompanions.com Dynamics Companions

- 147 -

DYNAMICS COMPANIONS CERTIFICATION EXAM STUDY GUIDE

EXAM MB-300: MICROSOFT DYNAMICS 365 UNIFIED OPERATIONS CORE

Configure workflow properties 1.

Select Review purchase requisitions and, from the Action Pane, select Properties to open the Properties page.

Enter a value in the Name field.

Enter a value in the Work item subject field. Alternatively, you can also include a place holder and concatenate the text with the place holder.

Select the Yellow bar. This will navigate to the assignment type.

Select User and select the User tab.

Select a user and add it to the Selected users section.

Select Close.

Select Save and close.

Specify a version description.

10. Select OK. 11. Select Activate the new version. 12. Click OK. It might take a few minutes for the workflow editor to finish its activation process, and then it will close automatically. 13. Go to Procurement and sourcing > Setup > Procurement and sourcing workflows. 14. Refresh the page if you do not see your new workflow.

Check your knowledge Link: https://docs.microsoft.com/en-us/learn/modules/create-use-workflows-in-dynamics-365finance-ops/7-configure-workflows-quiz

Work with workflows in Dynamics 365 for Finance and Operations knowledge check 1.

Which of the following workflow types can be used to create a workflow for a vendor invoice that checks the amount of a specific item or category? a.

Vendor invoice approval journal workflow

b. Vendor invoice workflow c.

Vendor invoice line workflow

d. Vendor invoice register journal workflow 2.

Which of the following workflow types can be used to create a workflow for a customer invoice that is not associated with any items or category?

www.dynamicscompanions.com Dynamics Companions

- 148 -

DYNAMICS COMPANIONS CERTIFICATION EXAM STUDY GUIDE

EXAM MB-300: MICROSOFT DYNAMICS 365 UNIFIED OPERATIONS CORE

Customer payment workflow

b. Customer free text invoice workflow c.

Proposed customer change workflow

d. Customer recurring invoice workflow 3.

Which of the following workflow types can be used to create a workflow for users in a sales department who wish to buy new computers for their department? a.

Customer free text invoice workflow

b. Purchase requisition review c.

Invoice received notification workflow

d. Purchase order line workflow

Summary Link: https://docs.microsoft.com/en-us/learn/modules/create-use-workflows-in-dynamics-365finance-ops/8-configure-workflows-summary In this module, you learned that defining a specific Workflow type allows a business to control each step in a critical process. You also learned that workflows can be used as procedural steps that use approvals for several journal types. Additionally, you learned that you can define several versions for each workflow and modify an existing workflow without deleting the original. These workflow processes can require manual approval, workflow approval, or no approval. After gaining an understanding of the workflow architecture, elements, and actions, you then learned how to set up workflows, configure workflow properties, and add a manual or automated task in a workflow. Finally, you learned how to configure an approval process in a workflow, assign users to workflow elements, configure an approval step in a workflow, and use the Work items functionality to process a workflow.

www.dynamicscompanions.com Dynamics Companions

- 149 -

DYNAMICS COMPANIONS CERTIFICATION EXAM STUDY GUIDE

EXAM MB-300: MICROSOFT DYNAMICS 365 UNIFIED OPERATIONS CORE

Course MB-300T02: Core configuration in Dynamics 365 for Finance and Operations Link: https://www.microsoft.com/en-us/learning/course.aspx?cid=MB-300T02 Organizations use Dynamics 365 for Finance and Operations to reduce operational costs and rapidly respond to changing business needs. This solution lets organizations achieve these goals. This course discusses how to configure core components of Microsoft Dynamics 365 for Finance and Operations.

www.dynamicscompanions.com Dynamics Companions

- 150 -

DYNAMICS COMPANIONS CERTIFICATION EXAM STUDY GUIDE

EXAM MB-300: MICROSOFT DYNAMICS 365 UNIFIED OPERATIONS CORE

Module 1: Set Up and Configure Legal Entities This module explains the setup and configuration of legal entities and number sequences in Dynamics 365 for Finance and Operations. Lessons •

Create a legal entity and generate number sequences

•

Create a number sequence

•

Create organization hierarchies

•

Apply purposes and policies

•

Configure calendars and date intervals

•

Practice Labs

•

Module summary

You’ve learned how to create a legal entity and generate number sequences, manually or by using a wizard. You also configured calendars and date intervals. You also learned how to create organization hierarchies, apply purposes, and set up policies in order to streamline business policies and reporting structures.

www.dynamicscompanions.com Dynamics Companions

- 151 -

DYNAMICS COMPANIONS CERTIFICATION EXAM STUDY GUIDE

EXAM MB-300: MICROSOFT DYNAMICS 365 UNIFIED OPERATIONS CORE

Plan and implement legal entities in Dynamics 365 for Finance and Operations Link: https://docs.microsoft.com/en-us/learn/modules/plan-implement-legal-entities-in-dynamics365-finance-ops/index A legal entity is an organization that is identified through registration with a legal authority. Legal entities can enter into contracts and are required to prepare statements that report on their performance. You must plan and configure your organization and create legal entities as one of the first steps of implementing Dynamics 365 for Finance and Operations. In this module, you will learn how to: •

Create a legal entity and generate number sequences.

•

Create a number sequence.

•

Create organization hierarchies.

•

Assign purposes and policies to hierarchies.

•

Configure calendars and date intervals.

Introduction Link: https://docs.microsoft.com/en-us/learn/modules/plan-implement-legal-entities-in-dynamics365-finance-ops/1-plan-implement-legal-entities-in-f-and-o-introduction This module explains the setup and configuration of legal entities in Dynamics 365 for Finance and Operations. By the end of this module, you’ll be able to set up and configure legal entities as the first step toward the financial management implementation phase. In this module, you will learn how to: •

Create a legal entity and generate number sequences.

•

Create a number sequence.

•

Create organization hierarchies.

•

Assign purposes and policies to hierarchies.

•

Configure calendars and date intervals.

www.dynamicscompanions.com Dynamics Companions

- 152 -

DYNAMICS COMPANIONS CERTIFICATION EXAM STUDY GUIDE

EXAM MB-300: MICROSOFT DYNAMICS 365 UNIFIED OPERATIONS CORE

Create a legal entity Link: https://docs.microsoft.com/en-us/learn/modules/plan-implement-legal-entities-in-dynamics365-finance-ops/2-create-a-legal-entity This module discusses how to create a legal entity and prepare it for financial management, which is the first phase of the implementation. A legal entity is an organization that has a registered or legislated legal structure. Legal entities can enter into legal contracts and are required to prepare statements that report on their performance. The country or region that you select for the primary address of the legal entity controls the country and regionspecific features that are available for the legal entity. Before choosing the country/region for the new legal entity you need to understand the significance of the localization in Finance and Operations. For example, consider St. Maarten in the Caribbean. This is an interesting island that is literally divided into two parts, one side of it is controlled by the Netherlands, and the other side is a territory of France. The laws, regulations, and tax calculation are different for each country and region. Some regulatory requirements of certain countries/regions require that Finance and Operations enables or disables certain functionality and features and even forms, fields, reports and inquiries. A company is a type of legal entity. In Finance and Operations, companies are the only kind of legal entity that you can create, and every legal entity is associated with a Company ID. The Company ID field is limited to four alphanumeric characters, and once it is created it cannot be changed. Proper planning for a naming convention should be considered prior to creation of legal entities in the production environment. Users can access data only for the company that they are currently signed in to and have security access for the roles they belong to. A search name is an alternate name that can be used to search for this legal entity. One of the best ways to learn about Finance and Operations and be able to successfully implement it, is by listening to the story of a customer’s day-to-day operations. You need to be able to gather and convert the customer requirements into test cases and try to match the functionality and configuration of Finance and Operations with the customer’s business processes. For example, Contoso is an organization which has at least one company or legal entity and has registered its international companies in multiple countries such as Germany, United States, and France. Therefore, Contoso is an organization that is a group of people who are working together to carry out a business process or achieve a goal. Organizational hierarchies represent the relationships between the organizations that make up your business. This organization has decided to acquire a business, with a fictitious name, Seahorse Retailers. You can create a new legal entity by navigating to the Legal entities page.

www.dynamicscompanions.com Dynamics Companions

- 153 -

DYNAMICS COMPANIONS CERTIFICATION EXAM STUDY GUIDE

EXAM MB-300: MICROSOFT DYNAMICS 365 UNIFIED OPERATIONS CORE

Registration IDs Many countries and regions have different regulations and requirements for recording registration numbers or IDs. All countries/regions have their requirements for supporting various country-specific functionalities related to registration numbers provided by different state offices. Examples of registration numbers include, social security number (SSN), tax identification number (TIN), and European VAT identification (EU VAT ID). This feature provides unified framework for all countries in all regions taking into account country-specific requirements of some European countries. The Registration category is a country/region registration identifier approved for use in a country/region for tax, customs, and other purposes. After you create the legal entity, the next step is to configure number sequences for the newly created company.

Create a number sequence Link: https://docs.microsoft.com/en-us/learn/modules/plan-implement-legal-entities-in-dynamics365-finance-ops/3-create-number-sequence Before you can create new records for a reference, you must set up a number sequence and associate it with the reference for a specific module in Finance and Operations. Number sequences in Finance and Operations are used to generate readable, unique identifiers for master data records and transaction records that require identifiers. A master data record or transaction record that requires an identifier is referred to as a reference. We recommend that you use the forms in Organization administration to set up number sequences. If module-specific settings are required, you can use the Parameters form in a module to specify number sequences for the references in that module. For example, in Accounts receivable and Accounts payable, you can set up number sequence groups to allocate specific number sequences to specific customers or vendors. You can set up all required number sequences at the same time by using the Set-up number sequences wizard, or you can create or modify individual number sequences by using the Number sequences page. When you set up a number sequence, you must specify a scope, which defines which organization uses the number sequence. By default, the following scopes can be used: â&#x20AC;˘

Shared - A single number sequence is used for all organizations. The Shared scope is available only for some references.

www.dynamicscompanions.com Dynamics Companions

- 154 -

DYNAMICS COMPANIONS CERTIFICATION EXAM STUDY GUIDE

EXAM MB-300: MICROSOFT DYNAMICS 365 UNIFIED OPERATIONS CORE

•

Company - A separate number sequence is used for each company. Use the Company scope when the underlying table includes the DataAreaId field. For example, use this scope for the number sequence for the customer account number that is in the Customer table CustTable.

•

Legal entity - A separate number sequence is used for each legal entity. Use the Legal entity scope when the underlying table does not include the DataAreaId field and has a foreign key to the legal entity table CompanyInfo. For example, use this scope for the number sequence for the expense report number that is in the expense report table TrvExpTable.

•

Operating unit - A separate number sequence is used for each operating unit.

•

Company and Fiscal calendar period - A separate number sequence is used for each company and fiscal calendar period combination.

•

Legal entity and Fiscal calendar period - A separate number sequence is used for each legal entity and fiscal calendar period combination.

•

Operating unit type - A separate number sequence is used for each type of operating unit.

For example, you can set up separate number sequences for cost centers and departments. The scope defines which organizations use the number sequence. In addition, number sequence formats consist of segments. Number sequences with a scope other than Shared can contain segments that correspond to the scope. For example, a number sequence with a scope of Legal entity can contain a legal entity segment. By including a scope segment in the number sequence format, you can identify the scope of a record by looking at its number. In addition to segments that correspond to scopes, number sequence formats can contain Constant and Alphanumeric segments. A Constant segment contains a set of letters, numbers, or symbols that does not change. An Alphanumeric segment contains a set of letters or numbers that increment every time that a number is used. Use a number sign (#) to represent incrementing numbers and an ampersand (&) to represent incrementing letters. For example, the format #####_2017 creates the sequence 00001_2017, 00002_2017, and so on. After you have configured the system-required number sequences, during the implementation phase of financial management you will probably need to create additional number sequences that address the specific requirements to identify certain records with specific formats. For example, you might need to create a number sequence with a format of GTL-APINV-&#######, which will result in a range of values like; GTL-APINV-A0000001 through GTL-APINV-Z9999999. When this number sequence is out of available values, as part of periodic processing, you need to create a new number sequence and replace it in any references where it has been assigned. Often, some businesses, or country requirements, demand that you change number sequences even when there are still available values. For example, in Italy, at the end of each fiscal year end the invoice numbers must start again at 1.

www.dynamicscompanions.com Dynamics Companions

- 155 -

DYNAMICS COMPANIONS CERTIFICATION EXAM STUDY GUIDE

EXAM MB-300: MICROSOFT DYNAMICS 365 UNIFIED OPERATIONS CORE

Continuous and non-continuous number sequences Number sequences can be continuous or non-continuous. •

A continuous number sequence does not skip any numbers, but numbers may not be used sequentially.

•

Numbers from a non-continuous number sequence are used sequentially, but the number sequence can skip numbers.

For example, if a user cancels a transaction, a number is generated, but not used. In a continuous number sequence, that number is recycled later. In a non-continuous number sequence, the number is not used. We do not recommend changing a non-continuous number sequence to a continuous number sequence. The number sequence will then not be truly continuous. This change can also cause duplicate key violations in the database. In addition, continuous number sequences have a larger effect on performance. Continuous number sequences are typically required for external documents, such as purchase orders, sales orders, and invoices. However, continuous number sequences can adversely affect system response times because the system must request a number from the database every time that a new document or record is created. If you use a non-continuous number sequence, you can enable Pre-allocation on the Performance FastTab on the Number sequences page. When you specify a quantity of numbers to pre-allocate, the system selects those numbers and stores them in memory. New numbers are requested from the database only after the pre-allocated quantity has been used. Unless there is a regulatory requirement that you use continuous number sequences, we recommend that you use non-continuous number sequences for better performance.

Automatic cleanup of number sequences In case of a power failure, an application error, or other unexpected failure, Finance and Operations cannot recycle numbers automatically for continuous number sequences. You can run the cleanup process manually or automatically to recover the lost numbers. Carefully consider server usage when you plan the cleanup process. We recommend that you perform the cleanup as a batch job during non-peak hours. After number sequences are configured, the next logical step is to plan and organize organization hierarchies.

Understand organizational hierarchies and operating units Link: https://docs.microsoft.com/en-us/learn/modules/plan-implement-legal-entities-in-dynamics365-finance-ops/4-organizational-hierarchies-and-operating-units

www.dynamicscompanions.com Dynamics Companions

- 156 -

DYNAMICS COMPANIONS CERTIFICATION EXAM STUDY GUIDE

EXAM MB-300: MICROSOFT DYNAMICS 365 UNIFIED OPERATIONS CORE

This unit helps you understand what organizational hierarchies and operating units are and how they are used in Finance and Operations.

Organizational hierarchies Organizational hierarchies represent the relationships between the organizations that make up a business. Therefore, the most important consideration when you model organizations is the structure of your business. You should define organization structures based on feedback from executives and senior managers from functional areas, such as finance and accounting, human resources, operations, purchasing, sales, and marketing. For example, you can set up a hierarchy of legal entities for tax, legal, or statutory reporting. Or, you can set up a hierarchy that is based on operating units to report financial information that is not legally required, but is used for internal control. For example, you can create a purchasing hierarchy to control purchasing policies, rules, and business processes. When you are planning hierarchies, it is also important to consider the relationship between the organizational hierarchy and financial dimensions. You can set up multiple organizational hierarchies to represent different views of your business. By using financial dimensions, you can create reports based on these views. You can create hierarchies that address both organizational and statutory reporting needs.

Operating units An operating unit is an organization that is used to divide the control of economic resources and operational processes in a business. People in an operating unit have a duty to maximize the use of scarce resources, improve processes, and account for their performance. The operating units in Finance and Operations are: •

Cost center - An operating unit in which managers are accountable for budgeted and actual expenditures. It is used for the management and operational control of business processes that span legal entities.

•

Business unit -A semi-autonomous operating unit that is created to meet strategic business objectives. It is used for financial reporting that is based on industries or product lines that the organization serves independently of legal entities.

•

Value stream- An operating unit that controls one or more production flows. It is commonly used in lean manufacturing to control the activities and flows that are required to supply a product or service to consumers.

•

Department - An operating unit that represents a category or functional part of an organization that performs a specific task, such as sales or accounting. It is used to report on functional areas. A department can have profit and loss responsibility and consist of a group of cost centers.

•

Retail channel - An operating unit that represents a brick and mortar store, an online store, or an online marketplace. Used for the management and operational control of one or more stores within or across legal entities.

www.dynamicscompanions.com Dynamics Companions

- 157 -

DYNAMICS COMPANIONS CERTIFICATION EXAM STUDY GUIDE

EXAM MB-300: MICROSOFT DYNAMICS 365 UNIFIED OPERATIONS CORE

•

Branch - An operating unit that represents a branch location, outside of the main location of the business. This is as part of Fleet management sample module and is not installed as part of production environment.

•

Rental Location - An operating unit that represents a rental location of the business. This is as part of Fleet management sample module and is not installed as part of production environment.

•

Region - An operating unit that represents a geographical area of the business. This is as part of Fleet management sample module and is not installed as part of production environment.

•

Teams - A team is an organization in which the members share a common responsibility, interest, or objective. Teams cannot be used in organizational hierarchies.

Plan your organizational hierarchy Link: https://docs.microsoft.com/en-us/learn/modules/plan-implement-legal-entities-in-dynamics365-finance-ops/5-plan-organizational-hierarchy Before you set up organizations and organization hierarchies in Finance and Operations, make sure that you plan how your business will be modeled. The organization model has a significant effect on the implementation of Finance and Operations, and on business processes Organizational hierarchies represent the relationships between the organizations that make up a business. Therefore, the most important consideration when you model organizations is the structure of your business. We recommend that you define organization structures based on feedback from executives and senior managers from functional areas, such as finance and accounting, human resources, operations, purchasing, sales, and marketing. Work with your Finance and Operations partner to create hierarchies that address both organizational and statutory reporting needs. Although you can use financial dimensions to represent legal entities without creating the legal entities in Finance and Operations, financial dimensions aren't designed to address the operational or business needs of legal entities. The interunit accounting functionality in Finance and Operations is designed to address only the accounting entries that are created by each transaction

Decide whether to model internal organizations as legal entities or operating units Link: https://docs.microsoft.com/en-us/learn/modules/plan-implement-legal-entities-in-dynamics365-finance-ops/6-internal-organizations-as-legal-entities-vs-operating-units You must have at least one legal entity to represent your business in Finance and Operations. A legal entity can enter legal contracts and is required to prepare financial statements that report on its performance.

www.dynamicscompanions.com Dynamics Companions

- 158 -

DYNAMICS COMPANIONS CERTIFICATION EXAM STUDY GUIDE

EXAM MB-300: MICROSOFT DYNAMICS 365 UNIFIED OPERATIONS CORE

In Finance and Operations, legal entities can be used for transactional business or for consolidation. This means that a legal entity in Finance and Operations does not necessarily represent a real entity in your business. For example, a company that participates in transactions can own subsidiary legal entities. In this example, a legal entity is required for transactions, and a virtual legal entity is required to consolidate the results and balances of the subsidiary legal entities. Internal organizations in your business, such as regional offices, can be represented as additional legal entities, or as operating units of the main legal entity. An operating unit is not required to be a legally defined organization. Operating units are used to control economic resources and operational processes in the business. For example, departments and cost centers are operating units. Some functionality in Finance and Operations works differently depending on whether the organization is a legal entity or an operating unit. Carefully consider the functionality described below as you make your decision.

Master data If the organization is modeled as a legal entity - Some master data, such as customers, payment terms, tax authorities, and site-specific stock ordering, must be set up for each legal entity. Some master data, such as users, products, and most human resources data, is shared among all legal entities. If the organization is modeled as an operating unit - Master data is shared among operating units.

Module parameters If the organization is modeled as a legal entity - Parameters for modules, such as Accounts receivable parameters, Accounts payable parameters, and Cash and bank management parameters, must be set for each legal entity. Because the module setup for legal entities is separate, each subsidiary can comply with local statutory requirements and business practices. For example, a professional services legal entity and a manufacturing legal entity can have different module parameters even though they report to the same parent company. If the organization is modeled as an operating unit - Module parameters are shared among operating units.

Data security If the organization is modeled as a legal entity - Most data is automatically secured by company ID. A company ID is a unique identifier for the data that is associated with a legal entity. A company can be associated with only one legal entity, and a legal entity can be associated with only one company. Users can access data only for the companies that they have access to. You do not need to customize Finance and Operations to secure data by company ID.

www.dynamicscompanions.com Dynamics Companions

- 159 -

DYNAMICS COMPANIONS CERTIFICATION EXAM STUDY GUIDE

EXAM MB-300: MICROSOFT DYNAMICS 365 UNIFIED OPERATIONS CORE

If the organization is modeled as an operating unit - Data can be secured for each operating unit by creating customized data security policies. Data security policies are used to limit access to data. For example, assume that a user can create purchase orders only in a particular operating unit. Data security policies can be created to prevent the user from accessing purchase order data from any other operating unit. The volume of transactions and the number of security policies can affect performance. When you design security policies, keep performance in mind.

Ledgers If the organization is modeled as a legal entity - Each legal entity requires a ledger that provides a chart of accounts, accounting currency, reporting currency, and fiscal calendar. A balance sheet can be created only for a legal entity. Main accounts, dimensions, account structures, charts of accounts, and account rules can be used by more than one legal entity. If the organization is modeled as an operating unit - An operating unit can't have its own ledger information. If your internal organizations do not require unique ledgers, you can model them as operating units. Ledger information will be set up for the parent legal entity in the hierarchy. Income statements can be created for operating units within a legal entity or for the parent legal entity.

Fiscal calendars If the organization is modeled as a legal entity - Each legal entity has its own fiscal calendar. If your internal organizations use different fiscal years and fiscal calendars, you must model the organizations as legal entities. If the organization is modeled as an operating unit - Operating units must share a fiscal calendar. If your internal organizations can use the same fiscal years and fiscal calendars, you can model the organizations as operating units.

Consolidation If the organization is modeled as a legal entity - You must consolidate the financial results for regional offices into a single, consolidated company to prepare financial statements. If the organization is modeled as an operating unit - Consolidation is not required, because data is already shared among operating units.

Centralized payments If the organization is modeled as a legal entity - Centralized payments must be set up so that invoices for all child legal entities can be paid to or from a single parent legal entity. If the organization is modeled as an operating unit - Centralized payments are not required because all invoices are recorded in a single legal entity.

www.dynamicscompanions.com Dynamics Companions

- 160 -

DYNAMICS COMPANIONS CERTIFICATION EXAM STUDY GUIDE

EXAM MB-300: MICROSOFT DYNAMICS 365 UNIFIED OPERATIONS CORE

Example 1: Headquarters provides services to regional offices and must charge the costs of those services to the regional offices. If you model the regional office as a legal entity, you have the following options: •

Headquarters creates a journal entry to cross-charge the regional office for the expense. The transactions cannot be aged.

•

Headquarters sends a purchase order for the services to the regional office. A sales order is automatically created in the legal entity for the regional office, with intercompany sub-ledger transactions.

Example 2: Headquarters procures and pays for a service that is delivered to a regional office. If you model the regional office as a legal entity, you have the following options: •

The invoice and payment follow the regulatory requirements of headquarters. Headquarters can create a journal entry to cross-charge the regional office for the expense. The transactions cannot be aged.

•

The invoice and payment follow the regulatory requirements of headquarters. Headquarters can create an intercompany sub-ledger transaction.

If the organization is modeled as an operating unit intercompany transactions among operating units are supported only through journal vouchers. An operating unit cannot issue or receive a purchase order, sales order, or invoice from another operating unit in the same legal entity. You cannot view intercompany transactions at the sub-ledger level (Accounts receivable or Accounts payable). The following examples illustrate how intercompany transactions are handled.

Example 1: Headquarters provides services to regional offices and must charge the costs of those services to the regional offices If you model the regional office as an operating unit, headquarters enters an expense transaction and codes it to the regional office.

Example 2: Headquarters procures and pays for a service that is delivered to a regional office If you model the regional office as an operating unit, the invoice and payment follow the regulatory requirements of headquarters. The invoice can be coded to the regional office. On the income statement, use a balancing financial dimension to report costs for the regional office.

www.dynamicscompanions.com Dynamics Companions

- 161 -

DYNAMICS COMPANIONS CERTIFICATION EXAM STUDY GUIDE

EXAM MB-300: MICROSOFT DYNAMICS 365 UNIFIED OPERATIONS CORE

The next unit contains more information about functionality that you need to consider before making your decision.

Decide whether to model internal organizations as legal entities or operating units (cont.) Link: https://docs.microsoft.com/en-us/learn/modules/plan-implement-legal-entities-in-dynamics365-finance-ops/7-internal-organizations-as-legal-entities-vs-operating-units-cont

Local tax requirements If the organization is modeled as a legal entity - A legal entity is subject to the tax laws of the tax authority in the country/region where the legal entity is registered. For example, a legal entity that is registered in Denmark is subject to Danish tax laws and regulations. In Finance and Operations, a legal entity can belong to only one country/region. The country/region that you select for the primary address of the legal entity controls the country/region-specific features that are available to that legal entity. For example, if the primary address of the legal entity is in Denmark, features that are related to Danish tax laws and regulations become available. Therefore, if your organizations are in different countries/regions and require different local tax options, you must set up the organizations as separate legal entities. If the organization is modeled as an operating unit - Operating units use the country/region context of the parent legal entity. Operating units in the same legal entity cannot have different country/regionspecific requirements. If your organizations are in the same country/region and use the same tax options, you can set them up as operating units.

Statutory reporting for a country/region If the organization is modeled as a legal entity - For countries/regions that are supported by Finance and Operations, most statutory reports can be created. For information about which reports are available for each country/region, see the Microsoft Dynamics Localization Portal for Finance and Operations. (A CustomerSource account is required.) In Finance and Operations, a posting layer in the general ledger allows you to make adjusting entries to a parent company that uses a different accounting standard than the child company. For example, for a company that uses generally accepted accounting practices in the United Kingdom (UK GAAP), you can make adjusting entries in the posting layer. These entries can be consolidated into a parent company that uses generally accepted accounting principles (GAAP) in the United States. The adjusting entries do not affect UK GAAP reporting.

www.dynamicscompanions.com Dynamics Companions

- 162 -

DYNAMICS COMPANIONS CERTIFICATION EXAM STUDY GUIDE

EXAM MB-300: MICROSOFT DYNAMICS 365 UNIFIED OPERATIONS CORE

If the organization is modeled as an operating unit - Statutory reports must be created by using another application. You must ensure that data is captured in Finance and Operations to support the requirements of each operating unit, where they differ from the requirements of headquarters.

Currency If the organization is modeled as a legal entity - If your organizations must use different functional currencies, you must model the organizations as legal entities. Functional currencies are set up for each legal entity. However, you can enter transactions in multiple currencies. If the organization is modeled as an operating unit - If your organizations can use a single functional currency, you can model the organizations as operating units. Operating units must share a functional currency. However, you can enter transactions and create reports in multiple currencies.

Year-end closing If the organization is modeled as a legal entity - If laws and accounting practices differ among the countries/regions where your organizations are located, you might require different year-end procedures for each organization. This means that you must model the organizations as legal entities. Each legal entity has its own year-end procedures. If the organization is modeled as an operating unit - If laws and accounting practices are the same among the countries/regions where your organizations are located, you can use a single set of year-end procedures. This means that you can model the organizations as operating units. All operating units must use the same year-end closing procedure.

Number sequences If the organization is modeled as a legal entity - Number sequences for some references can be set up for each legal entity. Some number sequences can be shared. If the organization is modeled as an operating unit - Number sequences for some references can be set up for each operating unit. Some number sequences can be shared.

Products If the organization is modeled as a legal entity - Product definitions are shared, and they must be released to individual legal entities before they can be included in transactions. Each legal entity has its own set of released products that can be included in transaction documents. If your internal organizations must use different sets of products, you must model the organizations as legal entities. Note: Even though product definitions are shared, in each legal entity where a product has been released, you can specify different sales, purchase, and stocking parameters for the item at each inventory site.

www.dynamicscompanions.com Dynamics Companions

- 163 -

DYNAMICS COMPANIONS CERTIFICATION EXAM STUDY GUIDE

EXAM MB-300: MICROSOFT DYNAMICS 365 UNIFIED OPERATIONS CORE

If the organization is modeled as an operating unit - All operating units share the same set of products. If your internal organizations can share the same set of products, you can model the organizations as operating units.

Inquiry and reporting If the organization is modeled as a legal entity - You must manually change companies to enter transactions and perform inquiries in multiple legal entities. Because of data security boundaries, consolidated inquiry and reporting can be resource intensive and time-consuming. If the organization is modeled as an operating unit - You do not need to change companies to access data from multiple operating units. Consolidated inquiry and reporting and individual regional inquiry is easier and faster.

Best practices for modeling organizations and hierarchies Link: https://docs.microsoft.com/en-us/learn/modules/plan-implement-legal-entities-in-dynamics365-finance-ops/8-best-practices-modeling-organizations-and-hierarchies Consider the following best practices when you implement an organization hierarchy: •

Create a department to model the intersection between a legal entity and a business unit. You can then roll up data from a department to a legal entity for statutory reporting, and from a department to a business unit for internal reporting. Departments can serve as profit centers. If you use departments, you do not have to only use legal entities and business units as dimensions in the account structure, you can use departments as a dimension. However, you must use both cost centers and departments as dimensions in the account structure if cost centers are used only as cost accumulators, and departments are used for revenue recognition.

•

Model multiple hierarchies for operating units if you have complex requirements for reporting profit and loss.

•

In a single legal entity, do not model multiple hierarchies for the same hierarchy purpose.

•

Do not create a hierarchy for every purpose. Usually, you can use one hierarchy for multiple purposes. For example, one hierarchy of operating units can be assigned to all policy-related purposes.

•

Create balanced hierarchies. In a hierarchy, all nodes that are the same distance from the root node are defined as a level. In a balanced hierarchy, only one type of operating unit can occur at each level, and the distance from the root node to each level is consistent. If there are intermediate levels between a department and a legal entity or a business unit, placeholder organizations may be required to create a balanced hierarchy.

•

Do not model a separate hierarchy of operating units if the structure for legal entities is also your operating structure. A mixed hierarchy of legal entities and operating units can serve both purposes.

www.dynamicscompanions.com Dynamics Companions

- 164 -

DYNAMICS COMPANIONS CERTIFICATION EXAM STUDY GUIDE

EXAM MB-300: MICROSOFT DYNAMICS 365 UNIFIED OPERATIONS CORE

•

Before you model major restructuring scenarios, use the hierarchy's effective dates to perform an impact analysis and a validation test.

•

Use draft mode to change a hierarchy before you publish a new version in a production environment.

•

Limit the number of people who have permissions to add or remove organizations from a hierarchy in a production environment. A smaller number reduces the chance of costly mistakes and the need for corrections.

Apply purposes and policies Link: https://docs.microsoft.com/en-us/learn/modules/plan-implement-legal-entities-in-dynamics365-finance-ops/9-apply-purposes-and-policies When you create an organization hierarchy in Finance and Operations, you must assign a purpose to the hierarchy. The purpose that you assign to a hierarchy determines the types of organizations that can be included in the hierarchy. The purpose also defines the application scenarios that the hierarchy can be used in. A hierarchy that is created for a purpose might not reflect the actual legal structure of the business. For example, the approval process for requisitions can involve multiple legal entities and positions that don’t report to each other. The CFO might be required to approve a requisition of a certain amount, even though the organization that submits the requisition does not report to the CFO. Hierarchies can be used for the following purposes: •

Procurement internal control- Defines purchasing policies for a business. For example, you can use the built-in rule to control if a specific department must always buy computers from approved vendors. The Procurement internal control or purchasing purpose, controls the requisition process for a group of requisitions. Purchasing policies help create a policy structure that is aligned with the organization's needs for strategic purchasing.

•

Expenditure internal control - Defines travel and expense policies such as meals and travel.

•

Organization charts - Defines the hierarchical organization for employees, for example it could address questions such as who reports to who.

•

Signature authority internal control - Define policies that control the spending limits. For example, how much money can you spend without asking for an approval.

•

Vendor payment internal control - Defines a policy that validates the vendor that the accounts payable clerks are authorized to generate payment for. For example, you could have a dispute with your vendor due to their late delivery of some perishable goods, and as a result some invoices cannot be paid until the issue is resolved.

•

Audit internal control - Defines policies based on factors such as duplication or certain keywords. For example, you can use audit policies to evaluate expense reports, vendor invoices, and purchase orders to make sure that they comply with policy rules that you create. All the rules

www.dynamicscompanions.com Dynamics Companions

- 165 -

DYNAMICS COMPANIONS CERTIFICATION EXAM STUDY GUIDE

EXAM MB-300: MICROSOFT DYNAMICS 365 UNIFIED OPERATIONS CORE

that are associated with an audit policy are run in batch mode, according to a schedule that you specify. Each policy rule is an instance of a policy rule type. For each policy rule type, only one policy rule can be active at a time. •

Centralized payments - This policy is only available for organization hierarchies that include only legal entity node. The concept of centralized payment means that one legal entity can process invoices, and payments for both accounts receivable and payable for another legal entity. It is required to set up intercompany accounting if you plan to use this policy.

•

Security - Defines policies related to security role assignments.

•

Retail assortment - This policy controls the availability of products in a specific time period, and perhaps on selected retail channels. In other words, it answers the questions such as which products, when, for how long, and where the products should be available.

•

Retail replenishment - This policy defines rules for distribution and fulfillment for replenishment. You can use cross docking, for example, cross-docking from production to an outbound location is relevant for manufacturers who produce high volume and ideally want to ship the finished products as soon as they are reported as finished from the production lines. The purpose is to ship the products to distribution centers that are physically located close to the customer demand, rather than build up inventory at the manufacturing site.

•

Retail reporting - Defines policies for generation of financial reports and creates a hierarchal structure for drill down and roll up within the report. This policy covers all transactions for all retail channels and the data is mostly summarized.

•

Benefit eligibility control - Defines policies such as who should be getting parking passes or a dental plan benefit.

•

Budget planning - An operating unit that is considered for the finance department’s budget plan. It is used for the management and allocation of funds across operating units of a legal entity.

•

Retail POS posting - This policy is very similar to Retail reporting. However, this policy covers all transactions for all retail channels and the data is mostly detailed.

•

Project management- Defines policies that control the association of worker, project, and category in a service industry, or project management and accounting.

•

Premium earning generation - This policy defines rules such as overtime for a contractor.

•

Distributed order management (DOM) – This policy, referred to DOM, optimizes order fulfillment across a complex network of systems and processes. Details about this policy will be covered in the next unit.

Distributed order management (DOM) policy Link: https://docs.microsoft.com/en-us/learn/modules/plan-implement-legal-entities-in-dynamics365-finance-ops/10-distributed-order-management-policy

www.dynamicscompanions.com Dynamics Companions

- 166 -

DYNAMICS COMPANIONS CERTIFICATION EXAM STUDY GUIDE

EXAM MB-300: MICROSOFT DYNAMICS 365 UNIFIED OPERATIONS CORE

To help improve the customer experience, retailers must have visibility into their inventory in real time, across all their channels. A single, holistic view of all the inventory can help optimize order fulfillment, allocation, and distribution. Therefore, adopting and implementing a distributed order management (DOM) system is becoming imperative for retailers. DOM optimizes order fulfillment across a complex network of systems and processes. It relies on a single, global view of inventory across the whole organization to intelligently manage orders, so that they are fulfilled accurately and in a more cost-effective manner. By improving the efficiency of a retailer's supply chain, DOM helps the retailer better meet customer expectations. The distributed order management is mostly used in retail industries. The following illustration shows the lifecycle of a sales order in a DOM system.

Here are some things to consider when you use the DOM feature: •

Currently, DOM only considers orders that are created from retail channels. Sales orders are identified as retail sales orders when the Retail sale option is set to Yes.

•

DOM is not tested with advanced warehouse management features. You must be careful to determine whether DOM is compatible with the advanced warehouse management capabilities and processes that are relevant to them.

•

DOM is available only on the cloud version of Retail. It isn't supported in on-premises deployments.

Configure calendars and date intervals Link: https://docs.microsoft.com/en-us/learn/modules/plan-implement-legal-entities-in-dynamics365-finance-ops/11-configure-calendars www.dynamicscompanions.com Dynamics Companions

- 167 -

DYNAMICS COMPANIONS CERTIFICATION EXAM STUDY GUIDE

EXAM MB-300: MICROSOFT DYNAMICS 365 UNIFIED OPERATIONS CORE

There are two types of calendars in Finance and Operations. •

Fiscal calendars are used in a financial management implementation and are a date control for posting financial transactions for specific period.

•

Work calendars describe the capacity and working times of operations resources and set the availability of certain operations.

In Finance and Operations, you can use different calendars for different business units. For example, you can have one calendar for production and another for sales and marketing units of your business. To define a work calendar, you need to create working time template. Working time templates define the working hours throughout a week and are used to generate working times for a period. To create a calendar, follow these steps: 1.

Go to All workspaces > Resource lifecycle management.

Click Working time templates.

Click New.

In the Working time template field, type a value.

In the Name field, type a value.

Expand the Monday section.

Click Add.

In the From field, enter a time.

Specify the time when work begins in the morning.

10. In the To field, enter a time. 11. Specify the time when workers break for lunch. 12. Click Add. 13. In the From field, enter a time. 14. Specify the time when work resumes after lunch. 15. In the To field, enter a time. 16. Specify the end of the work day. 17. Click Copy day to copy the working times definitions from Monday to Tuesday. 18. Click OK. 19. Click Copy day to copy the working times definitions from Monday to Wednesday. 20. In the To weekday field, select an option. 21. Click OK. 22. Click Copy day to copy the working times definitions from Monday to Thursday. 23. In the To weekday field, select an option. 24. Click OK.

www.dynamicscompanions.com Dynamics Companions

- 168 -

DYNAMICS COMPANIONS CERTIFICATION EXAM STUDY GUIDE

EXAM MB-300: MICROSOFT DYNAMICS 365 UNIFIED OPERATIONS CORE

25. Click Copy day to copy the working times definitions from Monday to Friday. 26. In the To weekday field, select an option. 27. Click OK. 28. Expand the Friday section. 29. In the Property field, enter or select a value. 30. Expand the Saturday section. 31. Select Yes in the Closed for pickup field. 32. Expand the Sunday section. 33. Select Yes in the Closed for pickup field.

Generate working times Calendars describe the capacity and working times of operations resources. This procedure will help you define a work calendar based on a working time template. You can walk through this procedure in demo data company USMF or using your own data. 1.

Go to All workspaces > Resource lifecycle management.

Click Calendars.

Click New.

In the Calendar field, type a value. This is the ID of the calendar that is used as a reference when assigning calendars, such as an operations resource or a resource group.

In the Name field, type a value.

In the Standard work day in hours field, enter a number.

In the list, select the highlighted row.

Click Working times.

Click Compose working times to generate working hours for each day in the period where you want to be able to schedule work. Over time, you can generate working times for additional periods.

10. In the From date field, enter a date. This is the first day that this calendar must be open. 11. In the To date field, enter a date. This is the last day that this calendar is open. 12. In the Working time template field, enter or select a value. The working time template defines the working hours for each day of the week. 13. Click OK. 14. Close the page.

www.dynamicscompanions.com Dynamics Companions

- 169 -

DYNAMICS COMPANIONS CERTIFICATION EXAM STUDY GUIDE

EXAM MB-300: MICROSOFT DYNAMICS 365 UNIFIED OPERATIONS CORE

Create date intervals You can create and manage date intervals that can be used in financial statements and reports. Date intervals allow you to create dynamic dates. When you use date intervals, you can set up predefined periods when you run financial statements. Date intervals can also be used when setting up an allocation rule. For example, Ken, the Controller at Contoso Entertainment USA (USMF), runs a dimension statement every month. Instead of entering the dates every time that he runs the report, he selects a date interval. The date interval automatically fills in the start date and the end date. Therefore, Ken does not have to specify the start date and end date when he runs the dimension statement.

Exercise - Configure a new legal entity Link: https://docs.microsoft.com/en-us/learn/modules/plan-implement-legal-entities-in-dynamics365-finance-ops/13-exercise-configure-a-new-legal-entity A legal entity is an organization that is identified through registration with a legal authority. Legal entities can enter into contracts and are required to prepare statements that report on their performance. This exercise shows how to create a legal entity in Finance and Operations.

Before you begin To get the most out of this exercise and the other exercises that are included with this module, we recommend that you have the standard sample data available in Finance and Operations that is installed using Lifecycle Services (LCS). 1.

Go to Organization administration > Organizations > Legal entities.

Click New.

In the Name field, type a value.

In the Company field, type a value.

In the Country/region field, enter or select a value.

Click OK.

In the General section, provide the following general information about the legal entity: Enter a search name if it is required.

Select whether this legal entity is being used as a consolidation company.

Select whether this legal entity is being used as an elimination company.

10. Expand the Addresses section, and enter address information, such as the street name and number, postal code, and city.

www.dynamicscompanions.com Dynamics Companions

- 170 -

DYNAMICS COMPANIONS CERTIFICATION EXAM STUDY GUIDE

EXAM MB-300: MICROSOFT DYNAMICS 365 UNIFIED OPERATIONS CORE

11. Expand the Contact information section, and enter information about methods of communication, such as email addresses, URLs, and telephone numbers. 12. Expand the Statutory reporting section, and enter the registration numbers that are used for statutory reporting. 13. Expand the Registration numbers section, and enter any information required by the legal entity. 14. Expand the Bank account information section, and enter bank accounts and routing numbers for the legal entity. 15. Expand the Foreign trade and logistics section, and enter shipping information for the legal entity. 16. Expand the Number sequences section to view the number sequences that are associated with the legal entity. 17. Expand the Images section to view or change the logo and/or dashboard image that is associated with the legal entity. 18. Expand the Tax registration section, and enter the registration numbers that are used to report to tax authorities. 19. Expand the Tax 1099 section, and enter 1099 information for the legal entity. (This is only necessary for a US based company.) 20. Click Save.

Exercise - Create an operating unit Link: https://docs.microsoft.com/en-us/learn/modules/plan-implement-legal-entities-in-dynamics365-finance-ops/14-exercise-create-an-operating-unit An operating unit is an organization that is used to divide the control of economic resources and operational processes in a business. People in an operating unit have a duty to maximize the use of scarce resources, improve processes, and account for their performance. The types of operating units include cost centers, business units, departments, and value streams. This exercise shows how to create an operating unit. 1.

Go to Organization administration > Organizations > Operating units.

Click New to open the drop-down menu.

In the list, find and select the type of operating unit that you want to create.

In the Name field, type a value.

Expand the General section, if necessary. Provide general information about the operating unit, such as an identification number, Data Universal Numbering System (DUNS) number, and manager.

Expand the Addresses section, if necessary.

www.dynamicscompanions.com Dynamics Companions

- 171 -

DYNAMICS COMPANIONS CERTIFICATION EXAM STUDY GUIDE

EXAM MB-300: MICROSOFT DYNAMICS 365 UNIFIED OPERATIONS CORE

Enter address information, such as the street name and number, postal code, and city.

Click Add to enter a new address record or click Edit to modify an existing address record.

Expand the Contact information section, if necessary.

10. Enter information about methods of communication, such as email addresses, URLs, and telephone numbers. 11. To enter a new communication record, click New. To modify an existing communication record, click More options > Advanced. 12. Click Save.

Exercise - Create an organization hierarchy Link: https://docs.microsoft.com/en-us/learn/modules/plan-implement-legal-entities-in-dynamics365-finance-ops/15-exercise-create-an-organization-hierarchy You can use organizational hierarchies to view and report on your business from various perspectives. For example, you can set up one hierarchy for tax, legal, or statutory reporting. This exercise shows how to create an organization hierarchy. 1.

Go to Organization administration > Organizations > Organization hierarchies.

Click New.

In the Name field, type a value.

Click Assign purpose. In the list, find and select a purpose to assign to your organization hierarchy.

Click Add. In the list, find the hierarchy that you just created.

Click OK. In the list, find and select your hierarchy.

Click View hierarchy.

Add organizations, as necessary. To add an organization, click Edit and then click Insert to add the organization.

When you are done making changes you can save a draft and/or publish the changes.

Exercise - Set up a number sequence Link: https://docs.microsoft.com/en-us/learn/modules/plan-implement-legal-entities-in-dynamics365-finance-ops/16-exercise-set-up-a-number-sequence Number sequences are used to generate readable, unique identifiers for master data records and transaction records that require them. This exercise shows how to set up number sequences using the Number sequences page.

www.dynamicscompanions.com Dynamics Companions

- 172 -

DYNAMICS COMPANIONS CERTIFICATION EXAM STUDY GUIDE

EXAM MB-300: MICROSOFT DYNAMICS 365 UNIFIED OPERATIONS CORE

Go to Organization administration > Number sequences > Number sequences.

Click Number sequence.

In the Number sequence code field, type a value.

In the Name field, type a value.

Expand the Scope parameters section, and select a scope for the number sequence and select scope values.

Expand the Segments section, and define the format for the number sequence by adding, removing, and rearranging segments.

Expand the General section, and specify whether the number sequence is manual, and continuous or non-continuous.

Click Save.

Check your knowledge Link: https://docs.microsoft.com/en-us/learn/modules/plan-implement-legal-entities-in-dynamics365-finance-ops/17-plan-implement-legal-entities-in-f-and-o-quiz

Plan and implement legal entities in Dynamics 365 for Finance and Operations knowledge check 1.

Which of the following organization hierarchy purposes in Finance and Operations controls the spending limits for a business? a.

Expenditure internal control

b. Procurement internal control c.

Signature authority internal control

d. Vendor payment internal control 2.

Which of the following organization hierarchy purposes in Finance and Operations defines purchasing policies for a business? a.

Expenditure internal control

b. Procurement internal control c.

Signature authority internal control

d. Vendor payment internal control 3.

Which of the following organization hierarchy purposes in Finance and Operations validates the vendor that the accounts payable clerks are authorized to generate payment for? a.

Expenditure internal control

www.dynamicscompanions.com Dynamics Companions

- 173 -

DYNAMICS COMPANIONS CERTIFICATION EXAM STUDY GUIDE

EXAM MB-300: MICROSOFT DYNAMICS 365 UNIFIED OPERATIONS CORE

b. Procurement internal control c.

Signature authority internal control

d. Vendor payment internal control

Summary Link: https://docs.microsoft.com/en-us/learn/modules/plan-implement-legal-entities-in-dynamics365-finance-ops/18-plan-implement-legal-entities-in-f-and-o-summary Youâ&#x20AC;&#x2122;ve learned how to create a legal entity and generate number sequences, manually or by using a wizard. You also configured calendars and date intervals. You also learned how to create organization hierarchies, assign purposes, and set up policies in order to streamline business policies and reporting structures.

www.dynamicscompanions.com Dynamics Companions

- 174 -

DYNAMICS COMPANIONS CERTIFICATION EXAM STUDY GUIDE

EXAM MB-300: MICROSOFT DYNAMICS 365 UNIFIED OPERATIONS CORE

Module 2: Manage users and security Microsoft Dynamics 365 for Finance and Operations has an array of security and configuration options to help keep your sensitive data safe. This all means that your users can remain focused on their roles, while the system remains as streamlined as possible. Knowing how to implement different security options will help companies cover their security requirements. When you understand the security architecture of Finance and Operations, you can more easily customize security to fit the requirements of your business. Lessons •

Understand the security architecture

•

Manage users and security

•

Setup and apply segregation of duties

•

Run security reports

•

Setup batch jobs and alerts

•

Practice labs

•

Module summary

In this module, you will have: •

Understood the security architecture of Finance and Operations.

•

Managed users.

•

Managed security.

•

Applied segregation of duties.

•

Run security reports.

www.dynamicscompanions.com Dynamics Companions

- 175 -

DYNAMICS COMPANIONS CERTIFICATION EXAM STUDY GUIDE

EXAM MB-300: MICROSOFT DYNAMICS 365 UNIFIED OPERATIONS CORE

Plan and implement security in Dynamics 365 for Finance and Operations Link: https://docs.microsoft.com/en-us/learn/modules/plan-and-implement-security-in-dynamics365-finance-ops/ If you understand the security architecture of Dynamics 365 for Finance and Operations, you can customize it to fit the requirements of your business. Finance and Operations, helps keep your sensitive data safe, and users focused on their roles. In this module, you will: •

Understand security architecture of Finance and Operations

•

Manage users

•

Manage security

•

Apply segregation of duties

•

Run security reports

Introduction Link: https://docs.microsoft.com/en-us/learn/modules/plan-and-implement-security-in-dynamics365-finance-ops/1-plan-and-implement-security-in-f-and-o-introduction Microsoft Dynamics 365 for Finance and Operations has an array of security and configuration options to help keep your sensitive data safe, users focused on their roles, and the system as streamlined as possible. Knowing how to implement different security options will help companies cover their security requirements. When you understand the security architecture of Finance and Operations, you can more easily customize security to fit the requirements of your business. In this module you will: •

Understand security architecture of Finance and Operations

•

Manage users

•

Manage security

•

Apply segregation of duties

•

Run security reports

www.dynamicscompanions.com Dynamics Companions

- 176 -

DYNAMICS COMPANIONS CERTIFICATION EXAM STUDY GUIDE

EXAM MB-300: MICROSOFT DYNAMICS 365 UNIFIED OPERATIONS CORE

Understand the security architecture Link: https://docs.microsoft.com/en-us/learn/modules/plan-and-implement-security-in-dynamics365-finance-ops/2-understand-the-security-architecture When you understand the security architecture of Finance and Operations, you can more easily customize security to fit the requirements of your business. In this lesson you will learn about: •

Security architecture

•

Role-based security

•

Duties

•

Privileges

•

Permissions

•

Authentication

•

Authorization

•

Auditing

The system architecture of Dynamics 365 for Finance and Operations uses the stack of features within Microsoft Azure. This allows Finance and Operations to operate and communicate with a variety of web enabled devices. The security model is hierarchical, and each element in the hierarchy represents a different level of detail. Consider the following facts regarding security: •

Finance and Operations uses role-based security.

•

Access is granted only to security roles, not to individual users.

•

Users are assigned to roles. A user who is assigned to a security role has access to the set of privileges that is associated with that role.

•

A user who isn't assigned to any role has no privileges.

The following diagram provides a high-level overview of the security architecture:

www.dynamicscompanions.com Dynamics Companions

- 177 -

DYNAMICS COMPANIONS CERTIFICATION EXAM STUDY GUIDE

EXAM MB-300: MICROSOFT DYNAMICS 365 UNIFIED OPERATIONS CORE

Role-based security Role-based security is aligned with the structure of the business. Users are assigned to security roles based on their responsibilities in the organization and their participation in business processes. The administrator grants access to the duties that users in a role perform, not to the program elements that users must use. In role-based security, access is not granted to individual users, only to security roles. Users are assigned to roles. A user who is assigned to a security role has access to the set of privileges that is associated with that role. A user who is not assigned to any role has no privileges. All users must be assigned to at least one security role to have access to Finance and Operations. The security roles that are assigned to a user determine the duties that the user can perform and the parts of the user interface that the user can view. Because rules can be set up for automatic role assignment, the administrator does not have to be involved every time that a user's responsibilities change. After security roles and rules have been set up, business managers can control day-to-day user access based on business data.

www.dynamicscompanions.com Dynamics Companions

- 178 -

DYNAMICS COMPANIONS CERTIFICATION EXAM STUDY GUIDE

EXAM MB-300: MICROSOFT DYNAMICS 365 UNIFIED OPERATIONS CORE

By default, sample security roles are provided. All functionality in Finance and Operations is associated with at least one of the sample security roles. The administrator can assign users to the sample security roles, modify the sample security roles to fit the needs of the business, or create new security roles. By default, the sample roles are not arranged in a hierarchy.

Duties Duties correspond to parts of a business process. The administrator assigns duties to security roles. A duty can be assigned to more than one role. In Finance and Operations, duties contain privileges. For example, the Maintain bank transactions duty contains the generate deposit slips and cancel payments privileges. Both duties and privileges can be assigned to security roles; However, Microsoft recommends that you use duties to grant access to Finance and Operations.

Privileges Privileges can be assigned directly to roles. However, for easier maintenance, we recommend that you assign only duties to roles. A privilege specifies the level of access that is required to perform a job, solve a problem, or complete an assignment. It also contains permissions to individual application objects, such as user interface elements and tables. For example, the Cancel payments privilege contains permissions to the menu items, fields, and tables that are required to cancel payments. By default, privileges are provided for all features in Finance and Operations. The administrator can modify the permissions that are associated with a privilege or create new privileges.

Permissions Permissions represent access to individual securable objects, such as menu items and tables. Privileges are composed of permissions and represent access to tasks, such as posting a journal and processing credits and collections. Duties are composed of privileges and represent parts of a business process, such as maintaining cash and bank transactions. Both duties and privileges can be assigned to roles to grant access to Finance and Operations. Each function in Finance and Operations, such as a form or a service, is accessed through an entry point. Menu items, web content items, and service operations are referred to collectively as entry points.

Authentication Only authenticated users who have user rights in Finance and Operations can establish a connection. Finance and Operations uses Microsoft Azure Active Directory (AAD) as a primary identity provider. To access the system, users must be provisioned into a Finance and Operations instance and should have a valid AAD account in an authorized tenant.

www.dynamicscompanions.com Dynamics Companions

- 179 -

DYNAMICS COMPANIONS CERTIFICATION EXAM STUDY GUIDE

EXAM MB-300: MICROSOFT DYNAMICS 365 UNIFIED OPERATIONS CORE

Authorization Authorization is the control of access to the Finance and Operations program. Security permissions are used to control access to individual elements of the program: menus, menu items, action and command buttons, reports, service operations, web URL menu items, web controls, and fields in the Finance and Operations client. In Finance and Operations, individual security permissions are combined into privileges, and privileges are combined into duties. The administrator grants security roles access to the program by assigning duties and privileges to those roles. Finance and Operations uses context-based security to determine access to securable objects. When a privilege is associated with an entry point (such as a menu item or a service operation), a level of access, such as Read or Delete, is specified. The Finance and Operations authorization subsystem detects the access at run time, when that entry point is accessed, and applies the specified level of access to the securable object that the entry point leads to. This functionality helps to ensure that you do not assign more permissions for a user than you need to.

Auditing Auditing of user sign in and sign out is now enabled in Finance and Operations. The system logs when a user signs in or out of the application. A sign out is logged even if the user's session expires or ends. A system administrator or security administrator can access the audit logs by going to the User log page (System administration > Inquiries > User log). Additional considerations: •

External Roles form allows administrators to assign security roles to an external part role such as a customer, vendor, prospect, prospective vendor and worker

•

Dormant user security accounts allow you to identify idle accounts and find out if the accounts are enabled or disabled

Manage users and security Link: https://docs.microsoft.com/en-us/learn/modules/plan-and-implement-security-in-dynamics365-finance-ops/3-manage-users-and-security Users are internal employees of your organization, or external customers and vendors, who require access to the system to perform their jobs. It is not recommended that you add users from outside your company to your organization. Partners and other users who aren’t part of your organization should be invited only to projects. When you remove an exclusion by resetting the user’s status, the user’s role is again assigned automatically. However, the user is not immediately assigned to the role or excluded from the role when you reset the status. Instead, the user is either assigned to the role or removed from the role the next time that the rules for automatic role assignment are run. www.dynamicscompanions.com Dynamics Companions

- 180 -

DYNAMICS COMPANIONS CERTIFICATION EXAM STUDY GUIDE

EXAM MB-300: MICROSOFT DYNAMICS 365 UNIFIED OPERATIONS CORE

Batch manager security role By assigning a user to the batch manager security role, the user has permissions to copy batch jobs, change who will execute jobs, and specify the time ranges during which jobs can execute. The Batch maintain security privilege is part of the Batch manager security role and it allows a user to create an ad hoc batch job and grant privileges to other users. To just be able to manage batch jobs, you should assign the user to the batch manager security role, and not to the system admin or IT admin security.

Set up and apply segregation of duties Link: https://docs.microsoft.com/en-us/learn/modules/plan-and-implement-security-in-dynamics365-finance-ops/4-set-up-and-apply-segregation-of-duties Security or policies may require that specific tasks be performed by different users. You can set up rules to separate tasks that must be performed by different users. This concept is named segregation of duties. This helps reduce the risk of fraud, and helps you detect errors or irregularities. For example, you might not want the same person both to acknowledge the receipt of goods and to process payment to the vendor. Segregation of duties helps you reduce the risk of fraud, and it also helps you detect errors or irregularities. You can also use segregation of duties to enforce internal control policies. To comply with regulatory requirements, such as those from Sarbanes-Oxley (SOX), International Financial Reporting Standards (IFRS), and the United States Food and Drug Administration (FDA), use segregation of duties. Default duties are provided. The administrator can modify the privileges that are associated with a duty or create new duties.

Identify and resolve conflicts in segregation of duties When the definition of a security role or the role assignments of a user violate the rules, the conflict is logged. All conflicts must be resolved by the administrator. To identify and resolve conflicts and verify whether user role assignments comply with new rules for segregation of duties, you need to run the Verify compliance of user-role assignments process from System administration > Security > Segregation of duties > Verify compliance of user-role assignments. After you click OK, to run the process, a notification displays the results of the validation. If there is a conflict, you can open the Users page and change the userâ&#x20AC;&#x2122;s role assignments.

www.dynamicscompanions.com Dynamics Companions

- 181 -

DYNAMICS COMPANIONS CERTIFICATION EXAM STUDY GUIDE

EXAM MB-300: MICROSOFT DYNAMICS 365 UNIFIED OPERATIONS CORE

Conflicts are also logged on the Segregation of duties conflicts page. To run the verification process as a batch job, select Batch processing, and then set the other batch parameters. After the batch job runs, you can review the conflicts in the Segregation of duties conflicts page.

Run security reports Link: https://docs.microsoft.com/en-us/learn/modules/plan-and-implement-security-in-dynamics365-finance-ops/5-run-security-reports Finance and Operations provides a set of rich security reports to help you understand the set of security roles running in your environment and the set of users assigned to each role. Finance and Operations security reports can be found under System administration > Inquiries > Security. Letâ&#x20AC;&#x2122;s get to know some of these security reports.

User role assignments report The User role assignments report generates a view of the current user role assignments in your system. By default, the report includes all users with roles assigned. You can optionally limit the report to a specific set of users by entering a list of users when generating the report. On the User role assignments parameters pane, go to Records to include > Filter. From here you can add or remove filters to the list of users the report will be generated for. For each user in the report a list of roles is provided, along with any restrictions at the legal entity or organization level.

www.dynamicscompanions.com Dynamics Companions

- 182 -

DYNAMICS COMPANIONS CERTIFICATION EXAM STUDY GUIDE

EXAM MB-300: MICROSOFT DYNAMICS 365 UNIFIED OPERATIONS CORE

Role to user assignments report The Role to user assignment report provides an aggregation of role assignments. Expanding a role in the report shows the list of users assigned to the role, and expanding the user name shows any restrictions the role has applied. The same method for filtering the set of users can be applied to this report as described for the User role assignments report.

www.dynamicscompanions.com Dynamics Companions

- 183 -

DYNAMICS COMPANIONS CERTIFICATION EXAM STUDY GUIDE

EXAM MB-300: MICROSOFT DYNAMICS 365 UNIFIED OPERATIONS CORE

Security role effective access report The Security role effective access report provides a view of the effective permissions for each security role. This report provides a flattened list of permissions grouped by type across all sub-roles, duties, and privileges contained in the role.

www.dynamicscompanions.com Dynamics Companions

- 184 -

DYNAMICS COMPANIONS CERTIFICATION EXAM STUDY GUIDE

EXAM MB-300: MICROSOFT DYNAMICS 365 UNIFIED OPERATIONS CORE

This report may take some time to run. If it is the first time the report has run, or there could be changes to the role definitions, the Rebuild collection option should be set to Yes. You can optionally limit the roles to be included in the report by adding a filter under Records to include.

Expanding a role shows the category of objects the role has access to. Expanding one of the object types will show a detailed list of each object of that type included in the role.

www.dynamicscompanions.com Dynamics Companions

- 185 -

DYNAMICS COMPANIONS CERTIFICATION EXAM STUDY GUIDE

EXAM MB-300: MICROSOFT DYNAMICS 365 UNIFIED OPERATIONS CORE

Security duty assignments report The Security duty assignments report provides a view of all the duties contained within a role. This report can be configured to run on any collection of roles to ensure that segregation of duties is maintained between roles. By default, the report will include all roles. To limit the roles included, leverage the filtering provided in the Records to include section.

www.dynamicscompanions.com Dynamics Companions

- 186 -

DYNAMICS COMPANIONS CERTIFICATION EXAM STUDY GUIDE

EXAM MB-300: MICROSOFT DYNAMICS 365 UNIFIED OPERATIONS CORE

Expanding a role in the Security duty assignments report will show each duty assigned to the role, along with details of the duty.

Exercise - Create a new user and assign a security role Link: https://docs.microsoft.com/en-us/learn/modules/plan-and-implement-security-in-dynamics365-finance-ops/6-exercise-create-a-new-user-and-assign-a-security-role The HR department of company USMF has requested access to Finance and Operations for a new hired employee as an account payable clerk. You must create a new user id for the new hired employee in Finance and Operations and assign the default the company to USMF and associate the account payable clerk role.

Go to System administration > Users > Users.

Click New.

In the User ID field, enter a unique identifier for the user. A user ID is required.

In the User name field, enter the user's name.

In the Domain field, enter the user's domain.

In the Alias field, enter the user's alias.

In the Company field, click the drop-down button to open the lookup.

In the list, select USMF.

Click Assign roles.

10. In the list, find and select “account payable clerk”. 11. Click OK. 12. Click Save.

Exercise - Import a user and assign security role Link: https://docs.microsoft.com/en-us/learn/modules/plan-and-implement-security-in-dynamics365-finance-ops/7-exercise-import-a-user-and-assign-security-role The HR department of company USMF has requested access to Finance and Operations for a new hired employee as an account receivable clerk. The active directory user account has already been created as part of onboarding process.

www.dynamicscompanions.com Dynamics Companions

- 187 -

DYNAMICS COMPANIONS CERTIFICATION EXAM STUDY GUIDE

EXAM MB-300: MICROSOFT DYNAMICS 365 UNIFIED OPERATIONS CORE

You must import a new hired employee into Finance and Operations and assign the default the company to USMF and associate the account receivable clerk role. 1.

Go to System administration > Users > Users.

Click Import users.

From the list of aliases, select your desired alias to be imported.

Click Import users.

Click Close.

From the Users list page verify the new user has been imported successfully.

Click the User Id link.

Click Assign roles.

In the list, find and select account receivable clerk.

10. Click OK. 11. Click Save.

Exercise - Import users in bulk as a batch job Link: https://docs.microsoft.com/en-us/learn/modules/plan-and-implement-security-in-dynamics365-finance-ops/8-exercise-import-users-in-bulk-as-a-batch-job The HR department of company USMF is hiring new employees for different roles in the next few weeks. The active directory user accounts will be created as part of onboarding process. You must import many users from Azure Active Directory into Finance and Operations. 1.

Go to System administration > Users > Users.

Click Batch import.

Expand the Run in the background section.

Select Yes in the Batch processing field.

In the Task description field, type a value.

In the Batch group field, enter or select a value.

Select Yes in the Private field.

Select Yes in the Critical Job field.

In the Monitoring category field, select an option.

10. Click OK. 11. After the batch job is completed, all new users from active directory will be imported in Finance and Operations.

www.dynamicscompanions.com Dynamics Companions

- 188 -

DYNAMICS COMPANIONS CERTIFICATION EXAM STUDY GUIDE

EXAM MB-300: MICROSOFT DYNAMICS 365 UNIFIED OPERATIONS CORE

Exercise - Assign users to security roles dynamically Link: https://docs.microsoft.com/en-us/learn/modules/plan-and-implement-security-in-dynamics365-finance-ops/9-exercise-assign-users-to-security-roles-dynamically The HR department of USMF has requested to dynamically assign users to the Accounting supervisor role based on a criterion defined by HR department. You must associate the Accounting supervisor role based on the rule defined by HR department to the selected employees. 1.

Go to System administration > Security > Assign users to roles.

In the tree, select 'Accounting supervisor'.

Click Add rule to open the drop dialog.

In the list, find and select the desired query rule.

In the list, click the link in the selected row.

Click Edit query. You can change the query as you desire.

Click OK.

Close the page

The HR department of USMF has requested to dynamically assign users to the Accounting supervisor role based on a criterion defined by HR department. You must associate the Accounting supervisor role based on the rule defined by HR department to the selected employees. 1.

Go to System administration > Security > Assign users to roles.

In the tree, select 'Accounting supervisor'.

Click Add rule to open the drop dialog.

In the list, find and select the desired query rule.

In the list, click the link in the selected row.

Click Edit query. You can change the query as you desire.

Click OK.

Close the page

Exercise - Exclude users from a role assignment Link: https://docs.microsoft.com/en-us/learn/modules/plan-and-implement-security-in-dynamics365-finance-ops/10-exercise-exclude-users-from-a-role-assignment The HR department of USMF has requested to remove access for the Accounts receivable clerk role in Finance and Operations for an employee who has changed role. You must exclude the Accounts receivable clerk role for the employee in Finance and Operations 1.

Go to System administration > Security > Assign users to roles.

www.dynamicscompanions.com Dynamics Companions

- 189 -

DYNAMICS COMPANIONS CERTIFICATION EXAM STUDY GUIDE

EXAM MB-300: MICROSOFT DYNAMICS 365 UNIFIED OPERATIONS CORE

In the tree, select 'Accounts receivable clerk'.

Click Manually assign / exclude users.

In the list, select a user.

Click Exclude from role to exclude the selected users from the role.

To remove exclusions, select the users that you want to remove exclusions for, and then click Reset status.

Exercise - Set up segregation of duties Link: https://docs.microsoft.com/en-us/learn/modules/plan-and-implement-security-in-dynamics365-finance-ops/11-exercise-set-up-segregation-of-duties The HR department of USMF has requested a rule for segregation of duties for the Access benefits workspace, and the Approve production journal. You must create the rule in Finance and Operations. Complete the following procedure to create a rule. You must be a system administrator to complete the procedure. The demo data company used to create this procedure is DAT. 1.

Go to System administration > Security > Segregation of duties > Segregation of duties rules.

Click New.

In the Name field, enter a name for the rule.

In the First duty field, click the drop-down button to open the lookup.

In the list, find and select the first duty that is controlled by the rule.

In the list, click the link in the selected row.

In the Second duty field, click the drop-down button to open the lookup.

In the list, find and select the second duty that is controlled by the rule.

In the list, click the link in the selected row.

10. In the Severity field, select the severity of the risk that occurs when the same user or role performs both duties. 11. In the Security risk field, enter a description of the security risk. 12. In the Security mitigation field, type a value. 13. Enter a description of the actions that you take to mitigate the security risk. 14. For example, you can mitigate the risk by conducting more detailed reviews of the process, by conducting a monthly managerial review, or by sharing resources with other departments. 15. Click Save.

www.dynamicscompanions.com Dynamics Companions

- 190 -

DYNAMICS COMPANIONS CERTIFICATION EXAM STUDY GUIDE

EXAM MB-300: MICROSOFT DYNAMICS 365 UNIFIED OPERATIONS CORE

Check your knowledge Link: https://docs.microsoft.com/en-us/learn/modules/plan-and-implement-security-in-dynamics365-finance-ops/12-plan-and-implement-security-in-f-and-o-knowledge-check

Plan and implement security in Dynamics 365 for Finance and Operations knowledge check 1.

Which of the following statements best describes role-based security in Finance and Operations? a.

A duty can be assigned to only one security role.

b. A privilege can be assigned to only one security role. c.

Access is granted only to security roles.

d. A security role cannot be defined as a combination of other security roles. 2.

Which one of the following security pages in Finance and Operations is used to manage privileges? a.

Assign users to role

b. Security configuration c.

External roles

d. Dormant user security accounts 3.

Which of the following security reports in Finance and Operations provides a view of the effective permissions for each security role? a.

User role assignments

b. Role to user assignments c.

Security role access

d. Security duty assignments 4.

To comply with regulatory requirements, such as those from Sarbanes-Oxley (SOX) and International Financial Reporting Standards (IFRS), which page should you use? a.

Segregation of duties

b. External roles c.

Assign users to role

d. Dormant user security accounts

www.dynamicscompanions.com Dynamics Companions

- 191 -

DYNAMICS COMPANIONS CERTIFICATION EXAM STUDY GUIDE

EXAM MB-300: MICROSOFT DYNAMICS 365 UNIFIED OPERATIONS CORE

Summary Link: https://docs.microsoft.com/en-us/learn/modules/plan-and-implement-security-in-dynamics365-finance-ops/13-plan-and-implement-security-in-f-and-o-summary You are now familiar with the security architecture and security management features of Finance and Operations. You have learned how to manage users and assign roles to them. By using the segregation of duties, you can set up rules to separate tasks that must be performed by different users. The rich security reports available in Finance and Operations help you understand the set of security roles running in your environment and the set of users assigned to each role.

www.dynamicscompanions.com Dynamics Companions

- 192 -

DYNAMICS COMPANIONS CERTIFICATION EXAM STUDY GUIDE

EXAM MB-300: MICROSOFT DYNAMICS 365 UNIFIED OPERATIONS CORE

Module 3: Perform Personalization Personalization saves time and effort when using the system. Lessons •

Describe and apply user options

•

Create, export and import personalziations

•

Create and maintain record templates

•

Practice labs

•

Module summary

You have now learned how to use and apply user options, create personalization, and export personalization to be used by other users, using the personalization feature of Finance and Operations. You also learned the difference between customization and personalization. In particular, how personalization helps you save time personalizing often used field values, and allows you to create and maintain record templates.

www.dynamicscompanions.com Dynamics Companions

- 193 -

DYNAMICS COMPANIONS CERTIFICATION EXAM STUDY GUIDE

EXAM MB-300: MICROSOFT DYNAMICS 365 UNIFIED OPERATIONS CORE

Personalize Dynamics 365 for Finance and Operations Link: https://docs.microsoft.com/en-us/learn/modules/personalize-dynamics-365-finance-ops/ By personalizing the user interface in Dynamics 365 for Finance and Operations, you can empower employees of an organization to work more efficiently. Personalization helps department managers to enforce a specific user interface for their staff without a need for customization. In this module, you will learn how to: •

Describe and apply user options

•

Differentiate between customization and personalization

•

Create, export, and import personalization

•

Create and maintain record templates

Introduction Link: https://docs.microsoft.com/en-us/learn/modules/personalize-dynamics-365-finance-ops/1personalize-finance-ops-introduction Every personalization that you make in Dynamics 365 for Finance and Operations is for you only, regardless of the type of personalization or the company that you are currently interacting with. The changes that one user makes to a page does not affect other users in the system. In this module, you will learn how to: •

Describe and apply user options.

•

Differentiate between customization and personalization.

•

Create, export, and import personalization.

•

Create and maintain record templates.

Understand the differences between customization and personalization Link: https://docs.microsoft.com/en-us/learn/modules/personalize-dynamics-365-finance-ops/2customization-versus-personalization This unit explains the differences between customization and personalization.

www.dynamicscompanions.com Dynamics Companions

- 194 -

DYNAMICS COMPANIONS CERTIFICATION EXAM STUDY GUIDE

EXAM MB-300: MICROSOFT DYNAMICS 365 UNIFIED OPERATIONS CORE

What is customization? The term customization means that you as a functional consultant have already identified a gap in your customer’s requirements and identified a solution that needs to be created to address the gap. Because Finance and Operations has locked the code for standard functionality out-of-the-box, developers are no longer able to use the over-layering concept. This means that modifying standard code is no longer possible. However, developers on your team can use extensions to customize the standard functionality of Finance and Operations to address the customer’s business requirements. After meeting with your team members and discussing with the customer, you decide to extend the functionality of Finance and Operations by, perhaps, creating new entities, user interfaces, tables, and more. The developer team will then identify the entities that need to be extended and possibly create new entities to find a solution that address the gap.

What is personalization? Changing the user interface by, for example, adding or removing fields to meet a customer’s requirements may be achieved by using the built-in Personalization feature of Finance and Operations. The main goal of personalization is to deliver content and functionality that matches a specific role, user, or group of users’ needs, without customizing Finance and Operations. Always try to avoid customization and extensions, and use personalization where possible. This is because customization and extensions can result in higher costs during implementation. It is important to point out that not many business users change default settings. Often, it is the managers of each department of your customer’s business that need a specific user interface, or functionality to be imposed for their staff. It’s worth noting that customization and extensions, as well as personalization, require work and maintenance over time.

Apply user options Link: https://docs.microsoft.com/en-us/learn/modules/personalize-dynamics-365-finance-ops/3apply-user-options Finance and Operations offers some various color themes and element sizes to create an aesthetically pleasing interface. You can use the User options page to control basic features and behavior of your environment that are specific to you as a user. The system administrator can control these user options from the Users page in the System administration module.

www.dynamicscompanions.com Dynamics Companions

- 195 -

DYNAMICS COMPANIONS CERTIFICATION EXAM STUDY GUIDE

EXAM MB-300: MICROSOFT DYNAMICS 365 UNIFIED OPERATIONS CORE

Visual options On the Navigation bar, you'll find a gear wheel icon that accesses the Settings menu. Opening the Settings menu will show several choices. Selecting User options will open the User options page. There you'll find four option tabs, one of which is named Visual. You can personalize many options such as the color theme and time zone for each user. With the Visual tab, you can select a color theme to apply to the system and determine whether you'd like larger or smaller element sizes on your pages.

Preferences On the Preferences tab on the User options page, you have a variety of options that you can select. You can select default values that are used every time that you open Finance and Operations. These values include the company, initial page, and default view/edit mode. The view/edit mode determines whether a page is locked for viewing or opened for editing every time that you open it. The Preferences tab also includes options for the language, time zone, and date, time, and number format. This tab also includes several miscellaneous preferences that vary from release to release.

www.dynamicscompanions.com Dynamics Companions

- 196 -

DYNAMICS COMPANIONS CERTIFICATION EXAM STUDY GUIDE

EXAM MB-300: MICROSOFT DYNAMICS 365 UNIFIED OPERATIONS CORE

•

Company - This allows you to define which company you sign in to when you access Finance and Operations. You can always change the company that you are connected to using the Navigation bar.

•

Initial page - There are a variety of options you can select here to define which page will open when you first launch Finance and Operations.

•

Default dashboard - This refers to the home page that you have seen in most demonstrations of Finance and Operations.

System administration - This option will default the user into the System administration workspace. This option is useful for system administrators.

Essentials dashboard - This option defaults the user to the Retail essentials workspace, which has a different layout that is targeted and designed for back-office retail workers.

Employee self service dashboard - This option is designed for the typical worker or manager who only uses a few areas of the system on a regular basis.

Prospective vendor registration - This page is designed for prospective vendors to complete their application and onboarding process. This option is not typically selected for a regular user.

Default view/edit mode - This option allows you to select between Auto, View, and Edit. The default option is Auto. When you change this option to View, all forms by default will open in View only mode. This is useful for users who do not typically make changes to the system, such as system administrators. The users must then click the Edit button to make any changes. The Edit option is used to force all pages to open in edit mode so that users can make modifications without having to click the Edit button in the Action pane. This is useful for users who always

www.dynamicscompanions.com Dynamics Companions

- 197 -

DYNAMICS COMPANIONS CERTIFICATION EXAM STUDY GUIDE

EXAM MB-300: MICROSOFT DYNAMICS 365 UNIFIED OPERATIONS CORE

modify data on every page that they open. You can control this setting based on pages, which overrides the option you select here. •

Language and country/region preferences - On this FastTab, you can control settings for language, date, time and number format, time zone, and country/region the users will operate with. Changing these selections will only change how the user interface appears to the selected user, not how the data is stored in the database.

•

Document handling enabled - This option determines whether the paper clip icon with document handling is activated for the selected user. When the option is enabled, you can see a number on the paper clip icon that indicates the number of attachments for a selected document. This can have a performance impact if attachments are used heavily.

•

Automatically update query parameter - When this option is turned on, the system will automatically save any filters that you have created on a form when adding the URL to your favorites or sharing the URL from the Options tab on the pane.

•

Enhanced tab sequence - In everyday system use, not every field is required to perform typical tasks. Therefore, by default, the tab sequence is optimized. Tab stops are set only on those fields that are essential for typical scenarios. However, you might find that some fields that you often use to perform tasks aren't included in the default tab sequence. In this case, if you use Windows Narrator, you can use Windows Narrator's keyboard actions to access those fields and inspect their content. Alternatively, you can enable the Enhanced tab sequence option on the User options page, which makes all editable and read-only fields part of the tab sequence. You can then use page personalization to create a custom tab sequence and omit fields from the tab sequence.

Set up Account Information The Account tab on the User options page contains a variety of options that control account functions, such as which account in the Active Directory it’s linked to, and how emailing and electronic signatures are controlled for user accounts. These settings are typically controlled by your administrator. You can also adjust your user name and other account-related options on this page.

www.dynamicscompanions.com Dynamics Companions

- 198 -

DYNAMICS COMPANIONS CERTIFICATION EXAM STUDY GUIDE

EXAM MB-300: MICROSOFT DYNAMICS 365 UNIFIED OPERATIONS CORE

Workflow The Workflow tab on the User options page allows you to control how notifications for workflow will be delivered. You can also use the Delegation FastTab to control exactly which workflows and time periods you want to use to delegate your workflow tasks and approvals.

www.dynamicscompanions.com Dynamics Companions

- 199 -

DYNAMICS COMPANIONS CERTIFICATION EXAM STUDY GUIDE

EXAM MB-300: MICROSOFT DYNAMICS 365 UNIFIED OPERATIONS CORE

Implicit personalization Link: https://docs.microsoft.com/en-us/learn/modules/personalize-dynamics-365-finance-ops/4implicit-personalization Finance and Operations keeps track of the width of grid columns if you adjust them, and the expanded or collapsed state of FastTabs. This type of personalization is called implicit personalization. For example, if you adjust the column width within a grid, or expand or collapse FastTabs and Fact Boxes, it would be considered implicit personalization. When the same grid is opened again, Finance and Operations retrieves the personalization done on the columns, FastTabs, and Fact Boxes based on the last interaction with the grid. Consider the following controls when creating an implicit personalization: •

Grid columns - You can adjust the width of a column in a grid by selecting the sizing bar to the left or right of the column header, and then sliding it left or right until the column is the desired width. Finance and Operations stores the width that you set for a column. It then resizes the column to that width every time that you open the page that includes that grid.

•

FastTabs - Some pages have expandable sections that are known as FastTabs. Finance and Operations stores information about the FastTabs that you've expanded and collapsed. Then, every time that you return to the page, the same FastTabs will be either expanded or collapsed, based on your last interaction with the page. In some cases, you can help improve system performance by collapsing a FastTab, because Finance and Operations doesn't have to retrieve the information for that FastTab until the FastTab is expanded.

•

Fact Boxes - Some pages have a section that is known as a Fact Box pane. This pane contains read-only information that is related to the current subject of the page. Each section in the Fact Box pane is known as a Fact Box. You can hide or show the whole Fact Box pane, and you can also expand or collapse single Fact Boxes. Finance and Operations stores your preferences. Then, every time that you return to the page, the state of the Fact Box pane and the individual Fact Boxes will be restored, based on your last interaction with the page. In some cases, you can help improve system performance by collapsing a Fact Box, because Finance and Operations doesn't have to retrieve the information for that Fact Box until the Fact Box is expanded.

•

Action Panes - An Action Pane appears near the top of most pages. The Action Pane contains buttons for many of the actions that you can perform on the current page. These buttons are often organized on tabs. You can pin open the entire Action Pane, or you can have it collapsed by default. Then, the next time that you open the page, Finance and Operations will restore the pinned state of the Action Pane. If the Action Pane is pinned open, Finance and Operations will also show the tab of actions you last used.

•

QuickFilters - A QuickFilter appears above many grids. The QuickFilter lets you filter the grid based on a column you select. Finance and Operations stores the column that you filtered on.

•

Column header filters - When you filter a grid by using the column header filters, you can change the filter operator as needed to find the data that you want. For example, you can change

www.dynamicscompanions.com Dynamics Companions

- 200 -

DYNAMICS COMPANIONS CERTIFICATION EXAM STUDY GUIDE

EXAM MB-300: MICROSOFT DYNAMICS 365 UNIFIED OPERATIONS CORE

the operator from begins with to is exactly. Every time that you use a column header filter and modify the filter operator, Finance and Operations stores the change. •

Navigation pane - You can open the Navigation pane by selecting the Show navigation pane button in the left pane of any page. You can pin the Navigation pane open, or you can keep it collapsed by default. After you pin the Navigation pane open, Finance and Operations will keep it open until you collapse it.

Explicit personalization Link: https://docs.microsoft.com/en-us/learn/modules/personalize-dynamics-365-finance-ops/5explicit-personalization You can modify the appearance of a page by changing the way an element appears or acts on that page, often through an interactive personalization mode. This personalization is called explicit personalization. Explicit personalization is personalization that you make explicitly, with the intention of changing the appearance or behavior of an element or page. You can explicitly personalize an element in the following ways: •

Change the label of a field.

•

Hide a field.

•

Include field information in the FastTab summary.

•

Skip a field when you press Tab.

•

Mark a filter as not editable.

Depending on the control that you want to personalize explicitly, the options can vary. For example, you might add, hide, or reorder elements on the page.

www.dynamicscompanions.com Dynamics Companions

- 201 -

DYNAMICS COMPANIONS CERTIFICATION EXAM STUDY GUIDE

EXAM MB-300: MICROSOFT DYNAMICS 365 UNIFIED OPERATIONS CORE

In Finance and Operations, you can tailor the way that your information is ordered and interacted with. You can also specify that some information should be hidden. These capabilities are key to a personal and productive experience and are examples of explicit personalization.

Shortcut menu options Shortcut menus, also known as a right-click menu or context menu, provide a few ways to explicitly change a page to better suit your requirements or the requirements of your company. Some of the most typical and important changes that can be made to a page are available directly as options on a shortcut menu. For example, if you want to add or hide columns in a grid, just right-click a grid column header, and then select Add columns or Hide this column.

Control property window Also, the most basic types of explicit personalization are available by right clicking an element and then selecting Personalize. You can use the property window to personalize an element in the following ways: •

Change the element's label.

•

Hide the element so that it isn't shown on the page. The data in the field isn't deleted or modified. The information just doesn't appear on the page any longer.

•

Include the information in the FastTab summary section (if the element is on a FastTab).

•

Skip the field when you press Tab to move among the fields on the page.

•

Prevent data in the field (for any record) from being edited.

The property window might include other personalization capabilities, depending on the element. For example, the property window for a tile might let you promote that tile to a dashboard, and the property window for a dashboard might let you create a new workspace on that dashboard.

www.dynamicscompanions.com Dynamics Companions

- 202 -

DYNAMICS COMPANIONS CERTIFICATION EXAM STUDY GUIDE

EXAM MB-300: MICROSOFT DYNAMICS 365 UNIFIED OPERATIONS CORE

Demonstration - work with personalization Link: https://docs.microsoft.com/en-us/learn/modules/personalize-dynamics-365-finance-ops/6work-with-personalization

The personalization toolbar Link: https://docs.microsoft.com/en-us/learn/modules/personalize-dynamics-365-finance-ops/7personalization-toolbar When you want to move or hide elements or make several changes, you can use the Personalization toolbar. When you click Personalize this form button, you have many options. Any personalization can be done through the Personalization toolbar.

If you want to make multiple changes to a page or make changes that aren't available through other mechanisms (such as reordering elements), you can use the Personalization toolbar. To open the Personalization toolbar, select Personalize this form in an element's property window. You can also select Personalize this form in the Personalize group on the Options tab of each page's Action Pane. The Personalization toolbar can be used on any page in Finance and Operations. It allows users or administrators to customize the look and feel of any page. The following tools are available on the Personalization toolbar: •

Select tool – This tool allows you to select and change the properties of an element. Select the Select tool, and then select the element to modify the properties of that element. When you select an element, the element's property window appears, and you can modify any of the properties of that element. You can repeat the process for other elements that can be personalized on that page. However, because of the way that some elements are used, Finance and Operations won't let you change some of their properties. Therefore, when you select an element, you might see that some of its properties can't be modified. For example, you can't hide a field that is required.

•

Move tool – Use this tool to move an element to a different location within the current group of elements. (You can't move an element outside its parent group). Select the Move tool, and then select the element to move. When you select an element, Finance and Operations scans the page to determine where the element can be moved. It then creates a series of "drop zones." As you

www.dynamicscompanions.com Dynamics Companions

- 203 -

DYNAMICS COMPANIONS CERTIFICATION EXAM STUDY GUIDE

EXAM MB-300: MICROSOFT DYNAMICS 365 UNIFIED OPERATIONS CORE

drag the element around within the current group, each "drop zone" is shown as a colored, bold line next to the area where the element can be dropped. •

Hide tool – This tool hides an element on the page. Select the Hide tool, and then select the element to hide. When you select the Hide tool, all elements that are currently hidden are made visible and are shown in a shaded container. You can then unhide them. By selecting the Select tool, you can see how the page will look when the selected elements are hidden. You can hide required fields and sections that contain required fields. This allows you to create a simplified experience where required fields that are defaulted by business logic are not shown. Hidden required fields are also temporarily made visible if they are empty when a save is attempted.

•

Summary tool – Use this tool when you want an element to appear in the FastTab summary section. The Summary tool applies only to fields that are on a FastTab section. When you select the Summary tool, all fields that have been selected as summary fields are shown in a shaded container. You can interactively add fields to the FastTab summary and remove fields from the FastTab summary by selecting the fields.

•

Skip tool – This tool removes an element from the page's keyboard tab sequence. When you select the Skip tool, all elements that are currently skipped are shown in a shaded container. You can then make them part of the tab sequence again.

•

Edit tool – Use this tool to mark an element as either editable or not editable. When you select the Edit tool, all elements that are currently non-editable are shown in a shaded container. You can then make them editable again. Note that some fields are required and can't be made noneditable. A padlock symbol appears next to those fields.

•

Add a field button – This allows you to see a list of elements that can be inserted on a page. Select the Field tool under Insert to add a field to your page. When you use the Field tool, you can add only fields that are part of the page definition but that aren't currently shown on the page.

www.dynamicscompanions.com Dynamics Companions

- 204 -

DYNAMICS COMPANIONS CERTIFICATION EXAM STUDY GUIDE

EXAM MB-300: MICROSOFT DYNAMICS 365 UNIFIED OPERATIONS CORE

After you select the Add a Field tool, you must first select the group or area where you want to add a field. A dialog box shows the list of fields that are related to the selected group or area. In the dialog box, select one or more fields to add, and then select Insert. To remove a field that you previously added, repeat the process, but clear the selection of the field in the dialog box. •

Add a PowerApp – This embeds an app, that was created by using Microsoft PowerApps, into the page.

Also on the Personalization toolbar is the “. . .” (More) button. Here are the actions that you can use when you select the “. . .” (More) button: •

Clear – This option resets the page to its default, installed state. All personalization on the current page is cleared. There is no undo action. Therefore, use this option only if you're sure that you want to reset the page.

•

Import – Use this to load a personalization from a file that you or someone else previously created for the page. All your current personalization for the page is replaced with the personalization from the selected file.

•

Export – Use this option to save your personalization for the page to a file. You can share your personalization with other users. Those users just import the file that contains your personalization for the page.

www.dynamicscompanions.com Dynamics Companions

- 205 -

DYNAMICS COMPANIONS CERTIFICATION EXAM STUDY GUIDE

•

EXAM MB-300: MICROSOFT DYNAMICS 365 UNIFIED OPERATIONS CORE

Close – This option closes the Personalization toolbar and returns the page to its previous interactive state. When the Personalization toolbar is used, the changes are saved immediately. Your personalization takes effect as soon as you make them, and you don't have to select a Save button. In some cases, when you select a tool, a padlock symbol appears next to an element. This symbol indicates that you can't modify the element properties that are related to the selected tool, because changes to those properties will prevent the page from working correctly.

Navigating the Personalization toolbar page When the Personalization toolbar is open, the current page is read-only but is much more interactive. Specifically, you can expand or collapse the FactBox pane, switch tabs, and expand or collapse sections while the Personalization toolbar is open in the same manner as you typically would on the page. To apply a personalization change to a collapsible section or tab (such as to hide a FastTab), you will click the button that appears next to the collapsible section or tab when it gains keyboard focus or when you hover over it.

Personalize a workspace Link: https://docs.microsoft.com/en-us/learn/modules/personalize-dynamics-365-finance-ops/8personalize-a-workspace For some pages that include lists, an additional personalization feature is available. The Add to workspace button in the Personalize group on the Options tab of the Action Pane lets you show the information from the current list in a specific workspace.

www.dynamicscompanions.com Dynamics Companions

- 206 -

DYNAMICS COMPANIONS CERTIFICATION EXAM STUDY GUIDE

EXAM MB-300: MICROSOFT DYNAMICS 365 UNIFIED OPERATIONS CORE

You can show a filtered and sorted view of the information in the workspace, or you can show the default view. You can also specify whether the information appears in the workspace as a list, as a summary tile that can show the number of items in the list, or as a link.

Add a list to a workspace To add a list to a workspace, first sort or filter the list on the page so that it shows the information as you want it to appear in the workspace. Then select Add to workspace. Select a workspace, and then, in the Presentation field, select List. After you select Configure, a dialog box appears, where you can select the columns that should appear in the list in the workspace. You can also specify the label to use for the list in the workspace.

Add a tile to a workspace To add a tile to a workspace, first filter the list on the page so that it shows the data that you want to be summarized or that want quick access to. Then select Add to workspace. Select a workspace, and then, in the Presentation field, select Tile. After you select Configure, a dialog box appears, where you can specify the label to use for tile in the workspace. You can also specify whether the tile should show a www.dynamicscompanions.com Dynamics Companions

- 207 -

DYNAMICS COMPANIONS CERTIFICATION EXAM STUDY GUIDE

EXAM MB-300: MICROSOFT DYNAMICS 365 UNIFIED OPERATIONS CORE

count. After the tile is added to the workspace, you can select it to open the current page from the workspace and view the filtered list that is associated with the tile.

Add a link to a workspace To add a link to a workspace, first filter the list on the page so that it shows the data that you're interested in. Then select Add to workspace. Select a workspace, and then, in the Presentation field, select Link. After you select Configure, a dialog box appears, where you can specify the label to use for the link. You can also optionally specify a label for a new section that will contain this link. After your list, tile, or link has been added to a workspace, you can open that workspace and reorder the elements in it, as needed.

Add a summary from a workspace to a dashboard Some workspaces contain count tiles (that is, tiles that have numbers on them), and you might want those tiles to appear on your dashboard too. In a workspace, right-click a count tile, and then select Personalize. Then, in the tile's property window, select Pin to dashboard. The next time that you open (and refresh) the selected dashboard, the count will appear below the navigation tile for that workspace. You can select that count to go directly to the data that it represents.

www.dynamicscompanions.com Dynamics Companions

- 208 -

DYNAMICS COMPANIONS CERTIFICATION EXAM STUDY GUIDE

EXAM MB-300: MICROSOFT DYNAMICS 365 UNIFIED OPERATIONS CORE

Personalize a dashboard Link: https://docs.microsoft.com/en-us/learn/modules/personalize-dynamics-365-finance-ops/9personalize-a-dashboard The dashboard is often the first page that you see when you open Finance and Operations. You can personalize the dashboard so that it shows only the workspace tiles that you want to see. You can also rearrange the tiles so that they are in the order that you prefer to see them in, rename your workspace navigation tiles, or add a completely new workspace tile. To personalize the dashboard, right-click any tile, and then select Personalize to open the tile's property window. •

If you want to hide or rename the selected tile, you can make that change directly in the property window.

•

To reorder the workspace tiles, in the property window, select Personalize this form to open the Personalization toolbar. You can then use the Move tool to arrange the tiles as you want.

www.dynamicscompanions.com Dynamics Companions

- 209 -

DYNAMICS COMPANIONS CERTIFICATION EXAM STUDY GUIDE

â&#x20AC;˘

EXAM MB-300: MICROSOFT DYNAMICS 365 UNIFIED OPERATIONS CORE

To create a new workspace tile, in the property window, select Add a workspace. A new workspace tile is created at the bottom of the dashboard. You can rename this new workspace tile if needed. You can also add lists, tiles, and links to the workspace as described in the previous unit.

Personalize inventory dimensions Link: https://docs.microsoft.com/en-us/learn/modules/personalize-dynamics-365-finance-ops/10personalize-inventory-dimensions When you personalize the setup of inventory dimensions on a page, consider the settings that have been created by using the Display dimension option. For example, you use personalization to hide a column for the Batch number inventory dimension, but the column appears the next time that the page is opened. This behavior occurs because the Dimension display settings control the inventory dimension columns that are shown. The Dimension display settings apply across all pages and override any personalized setup of inventory dimension fields on individual pages. As a result, in the preceding example, if you don't want the column for the Batch number inventory dimension to appear, you must clear that dimension as part of the Display dimensions option for the table. Eventually, this change will apply not only on one specific page but across all pages.

www.dynamicscompanions.com Dynamics Companions

- 210 -

DYNAMICS COMPANIONS CERTIFICATION EXAM STUDY GUIDE

EXAM MB-300: MICROSOFT DYNAMICS 365 UNIFIED OPERATIONS CORE

Administrate personalization Link: https://docs.microsoft.com/en-us/learn/modules/personalize-dynamics-365-finance-ops/11administrate-personalization After you personalize a page, you can share your personalization with other users by exporting the personalized page. You can then ask other users to open the personalized page and import the personalization file that you created. Alternatively, you can give your personalization to a user who has administrator privileges. That user can then apply your personalization file to many users at the same time. Users who have administrator privileges can also manage personalization for other users on the Personalization page. This page has four tabs:

www.dynamicscompanions.com Dynamics Companions

- 211 -

DYNAMICS COMPANIONS CERTIFICATION EXAM STUDY GUIDE

EXAM MB-300: MICROSOFT DYNAMICS 365 UNIFIED OPERATIONS CORE

•

Apply - You can import or select a personalization for one or more users. To apply a personalization to one or more users, first select a role and users who have that role. Then either select an existing personalization to apply to the selected users or import a personalization file. The personalization is validated and will be applied to all the selected users the next time that they open the selected page.

•

Clear - You can clear all personalization for a page or workspace for one or more users. First, select a page or workspace to see a list of the users who have personalized it. Then select the users who should have personalization for that page or workspace cleared and select Clear. All personalization that the selected users have applied to the selected page or workspace are deleted. This action can't be undone. However, if a personalization was saved for the page or workspace, that personalization can be reimported.

•

Manager per user - Select a user to see the list of pages that he or she has personalized. You can then enable or disable the selected user's ability to use personalization for specific pages, or for the entire system. You can also import, export, or clear a personalization for the selected user.

www.dynamicscompanions.com Dynamics Companions

- 212 -

DYNAMICS COMPANIONS CERTIFICATION EXAM STUDY GUIDE

â&#x20AC;˘

EXAM MB-300: MICROSOFT DYNAMICS 365 UNIFIED OPERATIONS CORE

Settings - You can temporarily disable all personalization for all users in the system. In this case, the personalization is deleted. All pages are just reset to their default state for all users. If you reenable personalization later, all personalization will be reapplied. You can also permanently delete all personalization for all users in the system. There is no way to recover personalization that have been deleted. Therefore, before you perform this task, be sure to export any personalization that you might want later.

www.dynamicscompanions.com Dynamics Companions

- 213 -

DYNAMICS COMPANIONS CERTIFICATION EXAM STUDY GUIDE

EXAM MB-300: MICROSOFT DYNAMICS 365 UNIFIED OPERATIONS CORE

Create and maintain record templates Link: https://docs.microsoft.com/en-us/learn/modules/personalize-dynamics-365-finance-ops/12create-and-maintain-record-templates Record templates can help you to create records more quickly, because all the field values that are used often are saved in it, so you do not have to enter the field values explicitly for each new record. You can create record templates for some of the record types in Finance and Operations, and only for the areas that you have access to. For example, you need to enter rental information for a car rental business that is in San Francisco. Because most of the customers are likely to be from the San Francisco area, it would be nice if you could automatically fill in the values for the State, Country, and City fields on the rental form. All template titles are visible to you when you create a new record, and to other users as well, if you are creating templates that will be available for all users. You want to avoid using names that include words, such as "commission," if it is confidential that some employees in the company have commission-based salaries.

www.dynamicscompanions.com Dynamics Companions

- 214 -

DYNAMICS COMPANIONS CERTIFICATION EXAM STUDY GUIDE

EXAM MB-300: MICROSOFT DYNAMICS 365 UNIFIED OPERATIONS CORE

When one or more templates that you have access to exist for a specific form and you attempt to create a new record in the form, the Select a template for page is displayed. When you select a template from the list, the new record is created and contains default information that is based on the template that you selected. If you do not want to use templates when you create new records, select the Do not ask again check box in the Select a template for page. To display the template selection dialog box again, right-click any record, click Record info, and then click Show template selection.

Exercise - Personalize user options Link: https://docs.microsoft.com/en-us/learn/modules/personalize-dynamics-365-finance-ops/13exercise-personalize-user-options You want to personalize your user options to automatically use the USRT legal entity when you sign in to Finance and Operations. You also want to change the color theme to green, and set the initial page to Employee self-service, set the time zone to (GMT-08:00) Pacific Time (US & Canada), and assign SMTP for the email provider.

Instructions 1.

Go to Settings > User options.

In the Color theme field, enter 'Green'.

In the Size field, enter 'Compressed'.

Click the Preferences tab.

In the Company field, type 'usrt' and press the Tab key.

In the Initial page field, select 'Employee self service'.

In the Time zone field, select (GMT-08:00) Pacific Time (US & Canada).

Click the Account tab.

In the Email provider ID field, enter or select SMTP.

10. Click the Workflow tab. 11. Select Yes in the Send notifications in email field. 12. Expand the Delegation section. 13. Click Add.

www.dynamicscompanions.com Dynamics Companions

- 215 -

DYNAMICS COMPANIONS CERTIFICATION EXAM STUDY GUIDE

EXAM MB-300: MICROSOFT DYNAMICS 365 UNIFIED OPERATIONS CORE

14. In the Scope field, select 'Workflow'. 15. In the Name field, enter or select a workflow. 16. In the Delegate field, enter or select a user. 17. In the Start date/time field, set the date and time to 01/01/2019. 18. In the End date/time field, set the date and time to 01/04/2019. 19. Click Save. 20. Close the page.

Exercise - Create and use a record template Link: https://docs.microsoft.com/en-us/learn/modules/personalize-dynamics-365-finance-ops/14exercise-create-use-record-template You need to create a new record for new laptops that should be added to your fixed assets in the USMF sample company. In this exercise, you will •

Create a record template.

•

Use record template to create a new record.

Create a record template 1.

Go to Fixed assets > Fixed assets > Fixed assets.

Click New.

In the Fixed asset group field, select a value.

In the Name field, enter 'Corporate lead laptop'.

In the Search name field, enter 'laptop.'

Expand the Technical information section.

In the Make field, type a value.

In the Model field, type a value.

In the Model year field, type a value.

10. On the Action Pane, click Options. 11. Click Record info. 12. Click User template. 13. In the Name field, enter 'Corporate laptop.' 14. In the Description field, enter 'Corporate laptop'. 15. Click OK.

www.dynamicscompanions.com Dynamics Companions

- 216 -

DYNAMICS COMPANIONS CERTIFICATION EXAM STUDY GUIDE

EXAM MB-300: MICROSOFT DYNAMICS 365 UNIFIED OPERATIONS CORE

16. Click Close.

Use a record template to create a new record 1.

Go to Fixed assets > Fixed assets > Fixed assets.

Click New.

You will be prompted to select a template. Select the one that corresponds to your business need.

In the list, find and select a record.

Click OK.

Check your knowledge Link: https://docs.microsoft.com/en-us/learn/modules/personalize-dynamics-365-finance-ops/15personalize-finance-ops-quiz

Personalize Dynamics 365 for Finance and Operations knowledge check 1.

If you want to rearrange the order of fields on a grid page, which of the following tools should you use on the Personalization toolbar? a.

Selector tool

b. Move tool c. 2.

Make not visible tool

How do you access the basic personalization toolbar? a.

Right-click a grid row, label, or description

b. From the Options tab on the Action Pane c.

From the System administration module

Summary Link: https://docs.microsoft.com/en-us/learn/modules/personalize-dynamics-365-finance-ops/16personalize-finance-ops-summary You have now learned how to use and apply user options, create personalization, and export personalization to be used by other users, using the personalization feature of Finance and Operations. You also learned the difference between customization and personalization. In particular, how personalization helps you save time personalizing often used field values, and allows you to create and maintain record templates.

www.dynamicscompanions.com Dynamics Companions

- 217 -

DYNAMICS COMPANIONS CERTIFICATION EXAM STUDY GUIDE

www.dynamicscompanions.com Dynamics Companions

EXAM MB-300: MICROSOFT DYNAMICS 365 UNIFIED OPERATIONS CORE

- 218 -

DYNAMICS COMPANIONS CERTIFICATION EXAM STUDY GUIDE

EXAM MB-300: MICROSOFT DYNAMICS 365 UNIFIED OPERATIONS CORE

Module 4: Implement Common Integration Features Microsoft Dynamics 365 integrates with many other common programs; for example email, Microsoft Office, and Power BI. Lessons •

Microsoft Office integration

•

Configure email

•

Create and maintain email templates

•

Use Power BI

•

Setup network printing

•

Integrate data into Common Data Services for Apps

•

Practice Labs

•

Module summary

In this module, you will have learned how to use Microsoft Office integration in Dynamics 365 for Finance and Operations, configure email (SMTP/Exchange), and to create and maintain email templates to standardize the messages when sending emails to customers. By setting up network printing features, you can use corporate network printers remotely. Finally, this module provided an overview of how to integrate data from multiple sources into Common Data Service for Apps and integrate the data to Dynamics 365 for Finance and Operations using the Data Management workspace.

www.dynamicscompanions.com Dynamics Companions

- 219 -

DYNAMICS COMPANIONS CERTIFICATION EXAM STUDY GUIDE

EXAM MB-300: MICROSOFT DYNAMICS 365 UNIFIED OPERATIONS CORE

Implement common integration features in Dynamics 365 for Finance and Operations Link: https://docs.microsoft.com/en-us/learn/modules/implement-common-integration-featuresin-dynamics-365-finance-ops/ Microsoft Excel is integrated with Dynamics 365 for Finance and Operations. This allows you to pull the data right from Finance and Operations, manipulate the data in Excel, and save it back to Finance and Operations. You can also send emails directly via Finance and Operations or by using Microsoft Outlook. You can print documents from anywhere from your browser to your company’s network printer, so the printing experience could not be easier. In this module, you will learn how to: •

Perform Microsoft Office integration in Finance and Operations

•

Configure email (SMTP/Exchange)

•

Create and maintain email templates

•

Set up network printing

•

Integrate data from multiple sources into Common Data Service for Apps

Introduction Link: https://docs.microsoft.com/en-us/learn/modules/implement-common-integration-featuresin-dynamics-365-finance-ops/1-common-integration-introduction In this module, you will learn how to implement common integration features in Dynamics 365 for Finance and Operations, such as Microsoft Excel, and integrate with PowerBI.com to be able to add tiles and captivate visuals into the workspaces. You will also learn how configure and send emails, and work with workbook designer to create Excel templates from entities in Finance and Operations. You will learn how to use network printing options to help you seamlessly and securely print documents from anywhere to a company’s printer over the internet. In this module, you will learn how to: •

Perform Microsoft Office integration in Finance and Operations

•

Configure email (SMTP/Exchange)

www.dynamicscompanions.com Dynamics Companions

- 220 -

DYNAMICS COMPANIONS CERTIFICATION EXAM STUDY GUIDE

EXAM MB-300: MICROSOFT DYNAMICS 365 UNIFIED OPERATIONS CORE

•

Create and maintain email templates

•

Set up network printing

•

Integrate data from multiple sources into Common Data Service for Apps

Microsoft Office integration in Finance and Operations Link: https://docs.microsoft.com/en-us/learn/modules/implement-common-integration-featuresin-dynamics-365-finance-ops/2-office-integration-fo In this lesson, you will learn how to use Microsoft Office integration in Finance and Operations to export data into Excel. After modification, if necessary, you will be able to publish it back, and then create an Excel workbook as a template by using the Workbook designer. Microsoft Office integration capabilities provide you with a productive environment that helps you get the job done by using Office products. The Open in Microsoft Office menu is available on any page that has a data source and provides four types of options: •

Open in Excel - Options that are automatically added for entities and entity-based templates that share the same root data source as the current page. These options make it easier to read data into Excel and publish data changes back to the OData services for those entities.

•

Open in Excel - Options that are manually added via the Export API. These options can be custom-generated exports or custom template exports.

•

Export to Excel - Options that are automatically added for all the visible grids on the page. These options are static exports of data from a grid.

•

Export to Word - Options that are automatically added for entity-based templates that share the same root data source as the current page. These templates are stored in the Document Templates page.

The Export to Excel options and experiences are found in the Open in Microsoft Office menu.

www.dynamicscompanions.com Dynamics Companions

- 221 -

DYNAMICS COMPANIONS CERTIFICATION EXAM STUDY GUIDE

EXAM MB-300: MICROSOFT DYNAMICS 365 UNIFIED OPERATIONS CORE

•

The Export to Excel options are static exports of grid data. Each one corresponds to a visible grid. All grid data for the current filter is placed into a workbook.

•

The Open in Excel experiences use the Excel add-in to facilitate refresh and publish.

Static Export to Excel Static Export to Excel provides a quick mechanism for getting data into grids on a page. The standard mechanism for triggering Export to Excel is the Open in Microsoft Office menu. Static Export to Excel is also available via a shortcut menu on the grid.

Generated Open in Excel Generated Open in Excel options are automatically added to pages when the system finds data entities that have the same root data source as the page. The workbook that is generated will contain a single table data source where the data from that entity is loaded. The Open in Excel experiences are listed on the Open in Microsoft Office menu. When an entity has the same root data source as a page, it's added as an option in the Open in Excel section of the Open in Microsoft Office menu. This is referred to as a generated option. The Excel app has a design experience that lets users add and edit bindings to entity data sources and labels.

Open in Excel Online The Excel app is built by using the Apps for Office framework. This framework provides a JavaScript-based web application programming interface (API) that enables apps to communicate with Office applications. The biggest advantage of this framework is that apps can run in on-premises Excel instances (Win32), Excel Online (Office 365), and Excel on the Apple iPad. To facilitate data entry, the Excel app provides lookups and data assistance. Date fields provide a date picker, enumeration (enum) fields provide an enum list, and relationships provide a relationship lookup.

Template Open in Excel Template options resemble the generated Open in Excel options. They are automatically added to pages when the system finds templates that have the same first data source as the root data source in the page. These templates are stored in the Document templates page.

www.dynamicscompanions.com Dynamics Companions

- 222 -

DYNAMICS COMPANIONS CERTIFICATION EXAM STUDY GUIDE

EXAM MB-300: MICROSOFT DYNAMICS 365 UNIFIED OPERATIONS CORE

Excel Data Connector add-in Excel can change and quickly analyze data. The Excel Data Connector app interacts with Excel workbooks and OData services that are created for publicly exposed data entities. The Excel Data Connector add-in enables Excel to become a seamless part of the user experience.

The Excel Data Connector add-in is built by using the Office Web add-ins framework. The add-in runs in a task pane. Office Web Add-ins are web applications that run inside an embedded internet browser window. The Excel Data Connector app is located in a task pane on the right side of a workbook. The addin uses OAuth to facilitate authentication.

www.dynamicscompanions.com Dynamics Companions

- 223 -

DYNAMICS COMPANIONS CERTIFICATION EXAM STUDY GUIDE

EXAM MB-300: MICROSOFT DYNAMICS 365 UNIFIED OPERATIONS CORE

The following features are available in the connector add-in:

www.dynamicscompanions.com Dynamics Companions

- 224 -

DYNAMICS COMPANIONS CERTIFICATION EXAM STUDY GUIDE

EXAM MB-300: MICROSOFT DYNAMICS 365 UNIFIED OPERATIONS CORE

•

Add-in primary title – The title of the add-in that is provided to the Office Web Add-ins framework.

•

Add-in secondary title – The title of the add-in that is provided by the add-in.

•

Source name – The label of the entity that provides data for the selected data table. You can hover over the label to view the corresponding name.

•

Field name – The label of the field that provides data for the selected data table column. You can hover over the label to view the corresponding name and type.

•

Refresh button – Refresh the data in the workbook.

•

Publish button – Publish the data changes in the workbook.

•

Design button – Open the design-time experience.

•

Status bar – The status bar provides brief, temporary information alerts. Information that appears in the status bar also appears in the Messages dialog box.

•

Options button – Open the Options dialog box.

•

Messages button – Open the Messages dialog box, which displays the information messages, warnings, and errors that the program provides to the user. A number sometimes appears next to the Messages button to provide a count of the warnings or errors that the user might be interested in.

•

Excel data table containing data – The filter and sort controls in the column’s headers can be used on this data. The filters must be removed before data changes are published.

•

Office Web Add-ins menu – The Office Web Add-ins menu button provides several standard links. The most important of the links is used to reload the add-in. When the add-in is reloaded, it updates all the data for the workbook that is contained in tables that are associated with the addin.

www.dynamicscompanions.com Dynamics Companions

- 225 -

DYNAMICS COMPANIONS CERTIFICATION EXAM STUDY GUIDE

www.dynamicscompanions.com Dynamics Companions

EXAM MB-300: MICROSOFT DYNAMICS 365 UNIFIED OPERATIONS CORE

- 226 -

DYNAMICS COMPANIONS CERTIFICATION EXAM STUDY GUIDE

EXAM MB-300: MICROSOFT DYNAMICS 365 UNIFIED OPERATIONS CORE

When you click in a table cell, any lookup, enumeration drop-down list, or date picker that is associated with that cell will be shown inside the add-in, underneath the source and field information. Any value that you select inside the add-in is put into the currently selected table cell. To add a record, either start typing in a row directly below a table, or use the Tab key to tab away from the last cell of the last row in the table. To delete a record, select the row by clicking the row label (1, 2, 3, and so on), and delete all the cells in that row. To publish the changes, select Publish. The Messages dialog box shows how many records were added, edited, and deleted.

Excel workbook designer Link: https://docs.microsoft.com/en-us/learn/modules/implement-common-integration-featuresin-dynamics-365-finance-ops/3-excel-workbook-designer In addition to using the Design button in the Excel add-in, you can use the Excel workbook designer page to design an editable custom export workbook that contains an entity and a set of fields. To open the Workbook designer page, go to Common > Common > Office Integration > Excel workbook designer. A workbook template can have multiple data sources. It can also have unbound content. The Open in Excel experiences are listed on the Open in Microsoft Office menu. The Excel workbook designer page

www.dynamicscompanions.com Dynamics Companions

- 227 -

DYNAMICS COMPANIONS CERTIFICATION EXAM STUDY GUIDE

EXAM MB-300: MICROSOFT DYNAMICS 365 UNIFIED OPERATIONS CORE

provides an easy way to get a generated Open in Excel experience for an entity. It also provides a mechanism with a blank workbook that contains just the Excel app and a pointer to the server. Before you can publish data edits, all key fields of the entity must be in the Excel table. Key fields have a key symbol next to them. To successfully create or update a record, it must have all the mandatory fields in the Excel table. Mandatory fields have an asterisk (*) next to them. To retrieve the resulting workbook, select Create workbook in the app bar. Select View related form to see the data that the entity exposes. This button is only enabled for entities that have a FormRef property value. The default fields that will be added into the workbook are the key and mandatory fields of the entity. If a different set of fields should be provided by default, then those fields can be added into the AutoReport field group on the entity. When a relationship is defined between two entities, if the identifier for one entity is shown on the other entity, then the fields that will be shown in that lookup are either the key fields, or the fields in the AutoLookup field group if it is not empty. Relationship lookups are not currently supported, but they will eventually be displayed in the app in a similar way to the enumeration lookups.

Document management Link: https://docs.microsoft.com/en-us/learn/modules/implement-common-integration-featuresin-dynamics-365-finance-ops/4-document-management

www.dynamicscompanions.com Dynamics Companions

- 228 -

DYNAMICS COMPANIONS CERTIFICATION EXAM STUDY GUIDE

EXAM MB-300: MICROSOFT DYNAMICS 365 UNIFIED OPERATIONS CORE

Document management supports saving record attachments in Azure Blob storage and SharePoint Online. Database storage is obsolete. Azure Blob storage is equivalent to storage in the database because documents can only be accessed through the application, and it offers the added benefit of providing storage that doesn't negatively affect the performance of the database.

Azure blob storage is the default and works immediately. SharePoint storage will work immediately if you have an O365 license because we auto-discover the SharePoint tenant, such as a user on the TenantA.onmicrosoft.com O365/AAD tenant gets TenantA.sharepoint.com as the SharePoint site. If document management has been turned off by the user, turn it on by selecting Common > Common > Office Integration > Excel workbook designer > Options > General > Miscellaneous and setting Document handling active to Yes. On any page that has data, an Attach button will be available in the upper-right corner. The Attachments page provides a view of the attachments (documents) that are associated with the record that was selected on the previous page. You can add new attachments to the record by clicking the New button (+) in the app bar. For the File and Image document types, you will be prompted to provide the associated file. A preview for supported file types is provided on the Preview FastTab. Basic document types, such as PNG images and text files, are supported by default. Office document types, such as Microsoft Word, Excel, and PowerPoint files, must use a production Office Web Apps Server, which might not be available in a OneBox configuration. The automatically generated Open in Excel experiences that are created for entities have a single table binding. A developer in your team can help you achieve the following by using Visual Studio: •

You can suppress the static Export to Excel mechanism for a grid or change the label that appears on the Open in Microsoft Office menu.

•

The list of fields that are added to that table binding is defined by the AutoReport field group if the table binding contains fields. Otherwise, the key and mandatory fields for the entity are

www.dynamicscompanions.com Dynamics Companions

- 229 -

DYNAMICS COMPANIONS CERTIFICATION EXAM STUDY GUIDE

EXAM MB-300: MICROSOFT DYNAMICS 365 UNIFIED OPERATIONS CORE

automatically added. The order of fields in the AutoReport group determines the order of fields in the table binding. •

Templates that are registered as system-defined templates are loaded at deployment. This behavior is useful for independent software vendors (ISVs) and partners that want to package templates together with other model artifacts.

When a template listed in the Common > Common > Office integration > Document templates page (DocuTemplate) has ShowInOpenInOfficeMenu set to Yes and has the same root datasource (table) as the current page, it will be added as an option in the Open in Excel section of the Open in Microsoft Office menu. A template is an artifact that needs to be maintained and versioned. If you can avoid defining a template without sacrificing much from the user experience, then you probably should use a template. Create a template if: •

You need additional content or formatting in the template.

•

You want to combine multiple entities or data sources in the same workbook.

When creating a template for an entity that has country or region-specific fields, you should leave those region-specific fields out of the template; otherwise, all users will see the country or region-specific fields. Templates should cater to most users by default and region-specific users can add those fields by using the easy-to-use design experience of the Excel add-in. The region-specific fields and columns can be added by users as needed. That template can be either saved to local computer for reuse by a single user or uploaded via the Document Templates page for reuse by any user of that instance. A couple of other considerations: •

If a region has a country or region-specific entity, then a country or region-specific template could be created.

•

If a region is important enough, then you could define a country or region-specific template and a country or region-generic template.

Configure email (SMTP/Exchange) Link: https://docs.microsoft.com/en-us/learn/modules/implement-common-integration-featuresin-dynamics-365-finance-ops/5-configure-emails-smtp-exchange In this unit, you will learn how to configure email (SMTP/Exchange) in Finance and Operations. The behavior of the email subsystem is influenced by a combination of administrator configuration, user configuration, and user choices. As an administrator, on the Email parameters page, note the following settings on the Email providers tab.

www.dynamicscompanions.com Dynamics Companions

- 230 -

DYNAMICS COMPANIONS CERTIFICATION EXAM STUDY GUIDE

EXAM MB-300: MICROSOFT DYNAMICS 365 UNIFIED OPERATIONS CORE

The Batch email provider specifies which email provider will be used to send emails that are sent by processes in a batch or non-interactive manner. The Exchange provider will use the account associated with the batch process. To specify the maximum size of a single email that can be sent via the email subsystem, set a value for the Attachment size limit field. On the Email parameters page, note the following settings on the SMTP settings tab. •

In the Outgoing mail server, you need to specify the host name of the desired SMTP server. For Office 365 production (including *.onmicrosoft.com accounts) use smtp.office365.com. You can find this setting at outlook.office.com at Settings > Mail > POP and IMAP. However, for Outlook/Hotmail, use smtp-mail.outlook.com

•

In the SMTP port number field, the port number should be set to 587 for secure transport.

•

Specify, as needed, to send the email via the appropriate mail account by specifying credentials in the User name and Password fields. As the Office 365 admin, you might have company requirements to allow some users access to another user's mailbox. For example, you might want to enable an assistant to send or read email from their manager's mailbox, or give one of your users the ability to send email on behalf of another user. All users need to provide the SMTP account Send As and Send On Behalf Of permissions to enable the ability to send Simple Mail Transfer Protocol (SMTP) mail. You can configure Send As permissions in the Office 365 admin center (portal.office.com/Admin) at Users > Active users > User > Edit mailbox permissions > Send email from this mailbox.

•

The Specify if SSL is required field determines whether secure transport is used. Typically, this is Yes, except for internal or troubleshooting scenarios.

Email that is sent directly from the server, without user interaction, via SMTP is sent by the Email distributor batch process. That batch process must be started to process the email queue. To start the

www.dynamicscompanions.com Dynamics Companions

- 231 -

DYNAMICS COMPANIONS CERTIFICATION EXAM STUDY GUIDE

EXAM MB-300: MICROSOFT DYNAMICS 365 UNIFIED OPERATIONS CORE

process, open the Email distributor batch pane System administration > Periodic tasks > Email processing > Batch and turn on Batch processing. The default email address for each user is pulled from the Email field on the Users page System administration > Users > Users. An email address should be specified for each user for sign in, so this field should be populated. Users can override this default if needed. The Options page can be opened by going to Settings > User options. The Email provider selection section is on the Account tab. The Email provider ID field allows the user to select the email provider that should be used when sending an email. Selecting an option here is the equivalent of selecting Do not ask again in the How would you like to send email dialog box. Selecting the blank option Prompt for which email provider to use will cause the How would you like to send email dialog box to display when an email is going to be sent. You can configure Send As and Send On Behalf Of permissions in the Office 365 admin center (portal.office.com/Admin) at Users > Active users > User > Edit mailbox permissions > Send email from this mailbox. To allow the user to provide an email address override for the From field of the email, specify an alias in the Email field. By default, the email alias that is associated with the user account is used as the From field in new emails, but this user option email address will override that. When sending email via SMTP, the user needs to have appropriate Send As and Send On Behalf Of permissions configured in Exchange or on the SMTP server. To test your configuration, use the Test email tab and specify an email provider and the recipient alias, and then select the Send test email button.

www.dynamicscompanions.com Dynamics Companions

- 232 -

DYNAMICS COMPANIONS CERTIFICATION EXAM STUDY GUIDE

EXAM MB-300: MICROSOFT DYNAMICS 365 UNIFIED OPERATIONS CORE

Usage scenarios to verify if email is configured correctly Users can see the How would you like to send email dialog box that will list the available options for sending email. Then, the Send email dialog box is opened to allow the user to edit the contents of the email that will be sent.

Send mail via a local mail client Email workflows that are enabled via the SysEmail framework can generate email messages (.eml files) that contain attachments. You can then send these messages via Microsoft Outlook or another email client. 1.

In an internet browser, go to Accounts receivable > Customers > All customers.

Select US-008 Sparrow Retail.

Select Collect > Customer balances > Collections to open the Collections page.

Select Communicate > Email > Statements to contact.

Select OK to accept the default values in the dialog box.

If you're prompted for the mail option to use, clear the Do not ask again check box.

You can change this option from the User options page by selecting the Use an email app, such as Outlook, and then selecting OK.

www.dynamicscompanions.com Dynamics Companions

- 233 -

DYNAMICS COMPANIONS CERTIFICATION EXAM STUDY GUIDE

EXAM MB-300: MICROSOFT DYNAMICS 365 UNIFIED OPERATIONS CORE

If you're using an internet browser on your computer, open the email (.eml) file that is generated. If you're using an internet browser on the VM, copy the file to your computer and open it there.

Note the email address in the To field and the generated workbook attachment.

Send mail via SMTP Email workflows that are enabled via the SysEmail framework can also be created in a simple email dialog box and then sent via Simple Mail Transfer Protocol (SMTP).

www.dynamicscompanions.com Dynamics Companions

- 234 -

DYNAMICS COMPANIONS CERTIFICATION EXAM STUDY GUIDE

EXAM MB-300: MICROSOFT DYNAMICS 365 UNIFIED OPERATIONS CORE

In Finance and Operations, go to the Email parameters page.

Select SMTP settings.

Set the Outgoing mail server to the desired SMTP server, such as smtp.office365.com or smtpmail.outlook.com.

Set the user name and password to an appropriate email account and password.

Leave Specify if SSL is Required turned on and leave SMTP port number set to 587.

Select Save.

In an internet browser, go to Accounts receivable > Customers > All customers.

Select US-008 Sparrow Retail.

Go to Collect > Customer balances > Collections to open the Collections page.

10. Go to Communicate > Email > Statements to contact. 11. Click OK to accept the default values in the dialog box. 12. If you're prompted for the mail option to use, select Use the Microsoft Dynamics 365 for Finance and Operations email client, and then select OK. 13. To receive the test message, change the To address to your email address. 14. Ensure that the account specified in the SMTP settings can Send As and Send On Behalf Of your email account. The easiest way to ensure this is to use your email account in the SMTP settings. 15. Enter a subject and body for the message. 16. Select Send. The message should be delivered in one to five minutes.

Create an email template Link: https://docs.microsoft.com/en-us/learn/modules/implement-common-integration-featuresin-dynamics-365-finance-ops/6-create-email-template By using email templates, users can save time and use standardized texts when sending email. You can transfer information from your organizationâ&#x20AC;&#x2122;s database to the bookmarks in a new document, and then use it in templates that help you communicate efficiently with applicants and candidates. To do this, create a template that contains standard text and some bookmarks (or placeholders) where the system data should be inserted. For example, you can insert address and contact information for an applicant into a Microsoft Word document that you can use when communicating with that applicant. To set up an email template, go to System administration > Setup > Email > System email templates. You can create email message contents in multiple languages. The body could be a simple text or can have HTML tags in the email, as shown in the following figure.

www.dynamicscompanions.com Dynamics Companions

- 235 -

DYNAMICS COMPANIONS CERTIFICATION EXAM STUDY GUIDE

EXAM MB-300: MICROSOFT DYNAMICS 365 UNIFIED OPERATIONS CORE

Power BI in Finance and Operations Link: https://docs.microsoft.com/en-us/learn/modules/implement-common-integration-featuresin-dynamics-365-finance-ops/7-power-bi-fo Microsoft Power BI is a suite of business analytics tools that let you analyze data and share insights. By using Power BI tools, you can explore data and quickly create rich reports and dashboards. You and your colleagues can then use the reports interactively on many devices. Finance and Operations uses Power BI for data exploration. Power BI comprises the Power BI Desktop app, Power BI Service, and Power BI Mobile. You import data and create reports by using the Power BI Desktop app, transforming your data into rich, interactive visualizations. You can connect to, but are not limited to, Microsoft SQL Server, Microsoft Azure SQL Database, Excel, Oracle, and MySQL. Power BI dashboards were created with a business executive role in mind. You can publish your reports and datasets to the Power BI Service to create and share dashboards with your colleagues. You do not have to use the Power BI Desktop app to create reports. You can sign in to Power BI.com, import data, and create reports online. The report items can then be used in dashboards. After publishing the report to Power BI.com, you can then view and interact with reports and dashboards by using the Power BI Mobile app for cross-platform mobile devices. You can use the natural query language to ask questions from your data through Power BI Q&A. This interactive service quickly finds the answers within your data. Before you can add Power BI components into Finance and Operations, you need to configure Finance and Operations to connect with Power BI. To configure the workspaces for Power BI, you need to first

www.dynamicscompanions.com Dynamics Companions

- 236 -

DYNAMICS COMPANIONS CERTIFICATION EXAM STUDY GUIDE

EXAM MB-300: MICROSOFT DYNAMICS 365 UNIFIED OPERATIONS CORE

create an application in Azure AD, grant permissions to Power BI, and then specify Power BI configuration in Finance and Operations. After Power BI is enabled and configured correctly, you can view the Power BI connector in workspaces, as shown in the following figure.

When you select the Get Started button, you can select tiles from workspaces that are available in Power BI, as shown in the following figure.

www.dynamicscompanions.com Dynamics Companions

- 237 -

DYNAMICS COMPANIONS CERTIFICATION EXAM STUDY GUIDE

www.dynamicscompanions.com Dynamics Companions

EXAM MB-300: MICROSOFT DYNAMICS 365 UNIFIED OPERATIONS CORE

- 238 -

DYNAMICS COMPANIONS CERTIFICATION EXAM STUDY GUIDE

EXAM MB-300: MICROSOFT DYNAMICS 365 UNIFIED OPERATIONS CORE

After clicking OK, you can view the tiles in the workspace.

You can add or remove tiles at any time, and you can drill through by selecting one of the tiles to view the detailed report in the embedded Power BI viewer, as shown in the following figure.

You can always open the Power BI content by clicking the Open in Power BI button. Read more about Power BI content in Finance and Operations in the PowerBI.com solutions home page

Set up network printing Link: https://docs.microsoft.com/en-us/learn/modules/implement-common-integration-featuresin-dynamics-365-finance-ops/8-set-up-network-printing

www.dynamicscompanions.com Dynamics Companions

- 239 -

DYNAMICS COMPANIONS CERTIFICATION EXAM STUDY GUIDE

EXAM MB-300: MICROSOFT DYNAMICS 365 UNIFIED OPERATIONS CORE

Finance and Operations provides integrated services and client applications that make it easy to generate, store, and distribute documents that support business activity. You can print documents by using either a local printer or a network-connected device. You can also export Finance and Operations pages and reports directly from the client as PDF files or Microsoft Office documents. Finally, the distributed workload lets you print business documents directly from a mobile device by using network resources. Although printing requirements might vary, all industries typically must create hard copies of business documents by using Finance and Operations. Printing documents on network devices from hosted applications presents a unique set of challenges, such as: •

Print drivers might not be available on the user's device.

•

The user's device might not be connected to the corporate network.

By using a dedicated host and following a few easy steps, system administrators can configure deployments so that users can print directly from business applications on network devices.

Printing scenarios in Finance and Operations applications •

Printing what you see – To print what is currently shown in the browser, when you print, a "print-friendly" version of the webpage is generated for the browser. This is supported by the browser's rendering of the HTML5 client.

•

Interactive printing – You can export a PDF version of the report and download it to the browser to print a precision document on a locally connected device. This uses client applications and Microsoft Office 365 services. To view the PDF files, you need to install Adobe Acrobat Reader.

•

Printing on a network device – You can send a precision document to a domain printer device. The precision document is sent to a client application that runs on a server that is hosted in the customer's domain. This requires support from client applications and from services that are hosted in Microsoft Azure.

In addition to the platform that is deployed to the Azure subscription, Finance and Operations applications provide customers with an integrated, first-party Azure application that helps them easily use domain-hosted devices to print documents. Network printers that are registered for Finance and Operations applications can be used by all legal entities (also known as companies) that are defined in the environment. Network printer settings are company-specific. Therefore, administrators can restrict access, based on the user's active company. For example, users in the active company might have access to all the network printers that are registered by the Document routing agent. However, users in another company won't have access to those printers until access is explicitly enabled for that company.

www.dynamicscompanions.com Dynamics Companions

- 240 -

DYNAMICS COMPANIONS CERTIFICATION EXAM STUDY GUIDE

EXAM MB-300: MICROSOFT DYNAMICS 365 UNIFIED OPERATIONS CORE

Service overview While documents that are produced by the hosted applications are waiting to be printed on a networkconnected device, they are stored in Azure blob storage. The execution sequence is as follows: 1.

The report is generated by Microsoft SQL Server Reporting Services (SSRS) and stored in Azure blob storage. Attached printer settings are stored together with the document.

The Document routing agent queries the Azure Service Bus queue for active jobs.

The document is downloaded by the Document routing agent and spooled to the network printer.

The client-based solution lets customers manage the scale of their printing needs. Customers who have heavy-volume printing workloads can install many Document routing agents to increase the number of concurrent printing operations. Alternatively, some customers require few installations of the Document routing agent to handle their anticipated printing needs.

Install the Document routing agent to enable network printing You can enable network printers for specific companies by using in-client administrative pages. However, to access the network printing resources, you require Active Directory Domain Services (AD DS) authentication. The Microsoft Azure Active Directory (Azure AD) account that is used to configure the Document routing agent must share the same domain as the Azure tenant.

Install the Document routing agent Finance and Operations uses the Document routing agent to manage the spooling of documents to network printer devices. You can obtain the client by using direct links that are embedded in the web application. Use the following procedure to download the application to your local computer. You will then be able to access local and network printers, which are connected to your computer, from a single deployment of Finance and Operations. 1.

Open the Manage network printers page by going to Organization administration > Setup > Network printers.

On the Options tab, in the Application group, select Download document routing agent installer.

If you have not installed Adobe acrobat reader, you need to do so prior to proceeding to the next step.

www.dynamicscompanions.com Dynamics Companions

- 241 -

DYNAMICS COMPANIONS CERTIFICATION EXAM STUDY GUIDE

EXAM MB-300: MICROSOFT DYNAMICS 365 UNIFIED OPERATIONS CORE

Run the downloaded file to begin the installation process.

Complete the setup process.

After the application is installed, you can begin to register local printers as network printers for the Finance and Operations applications.

Configure the Document routing agent Use the following procedure to configure the client application so that it can communicate with the Azure services that host the documents that are in-flight. 1.

Close all browser instances that are running the Finance and Operations application. This resets the local Azure authentication tokens.

www.dynamicscompanions.com Dynamics Companions

- 242 -

DYNAMICS COMPANIONS CERTIFICATION EXAM STUDY GUIDE

EXAM MB-300: MICROSOFT DYNAMICS 365 UNIFIED OPERATIONS CORE

From your computer, run Document Routing by selecting the shortcut on your desktop or by running Microsoft.Dynamics.AX.Framework.DocumentRouting.Agent.exe.

On the toolbar, select Settings.

Note that the Application ID, which is unique to the application, is entered automatically.

In the Finance and Operations URL field, enter the base URL of the Finance and Operations application instance that you are using.

In the Azure AD tenant field, enter the domain name of the Azure AD.

Select Register.

Select Exit.

From your computer, run Document Routing by selecting the shortcut on your desktop or by running Microsoft.Dynamics.AX.Framework.DocumentRouting.Agent.exe.

10. Select Sign In to sign into your account. 11. Now, you have registered the document routing agent. The account must share the same domain as the Azure AD that is associated with the Finance and Operations application. The Document routing agent is now ready to process documents. After you've successfully signed in, the Printers button becomes available on the toolbar.

www.dynamicscompanions.com Dynamics Companions

- 243 -

DYNAMICS COMPANIONS CERTIFICATION EXAM STUDY GUIDE

EXAM MB-300: MICROSOFT DYNAMICS 365 UNIFIED OPERATIONS CORE

Register network printers in Finance and Operations Before you complete this procedure, make sure that you've installed all the network printers on the local host computer. All the printer devices that are installed will be available for service registration. Be sure to select only the printers that you want to expose in the Finance and Operations applications. 1.

On the toolbar, select Printers.

Select the printers to make available in the Finance and Operations applications.

Specify a default name for the printer.

Select OK.

After you've completed this procedure, the selected printer devices are registered in the Finance and Operations application's network printer catalog. System administrators can now enable the printers for access from within the application.

Administer network printers You can use client pages to manage access to the network printers that have been registered by one or more Document routing agents. Network printers are uniquely identified by their path. Therefore, printers are listed one time, even if they have been registered by more than one Document routing agent. Use this procedure to activate the Application Object Server (AOS) network printers. 1.

To open the Manage network printers page, go to Organization administration > Setup > Network printers.

Edit the existing entries that are mapped to each network printer. As part of your changes, edit the connection path.

To include a printer as an option in the Print Destinations field, set the Active field to Yes.

The network printers can now be used in the Finance and Operations application. Client installations of the Document routing agent can be shared by individuals who access the provisioned Finance and Operations environment. Therefore, the Document routing agent must be installed on each computer where a user connects by using a browser. We recommend that you install agents on one or more Print Servers or other domain-hosted clients that have access to network printers. The Document routing agent supports running in the background as a service. You need to ensure that you have downloaded the latest version of the client. The number of supported network printers depends on the number of legal entities and the number of network printers deployed. If you have fifty printers and one legal entity, a single Document routing agent can handle the load. To ensure high availability, consider having more than one routing agent. You can never have too many Document routing agents because it is the mechanism for scaling the network printing service. If you have many printers and legal entities, we recommend that you do some performance testing to determine the number of Document routing agents that you'll need.

www.dynamicscompanions.com Dynamics Companions

- 244 -

DYNAMICS COMPANIONS CERTIFICATION EXAM STUDY GUIDE

EXAM MB-300: MICROSOFT DYNAMICS 365 UNIFIED OPERATIONS CORE

To continue to run the Document routing agent (DRA) as a Microsoft Windows service, you must have the user name and the password of the domain account that is used to run the service. This information must be available after the upgrade is completed. To find the information for the active service account, start the Microsoft Management Console (MMC) Services snap-in, and select Microsoft Dynamics 365 Document Routing Service in the list.

Uninstall an existing Document routing agent To uninstall the DRA, open Programs and Features, and then find and uninstall Microsoft Dynamics 365 for Finance and Operations: Document Routing. During the uninstallation process, if you're prompted to close the Microsoft Dynamics 365 Document Routing Service application, select Automatically close applications and attempt to restart them after setup is complete.

Integrate data from multiple sources into Common Data Service for Apps Link: https://docs.microsoft.com/en-us/learn/modules/implement-common-integration-featuresin-dynamics-365-finance-ops/9-integrate-data-common-data-service You can use Common Data Service to enable the flow of data between Dynamics 365 for Finance and Operations and Dynamics 365 for Sales. For example, customer information in Dynamics 365 for Sales can flow to Dynamics 365 for Finance and Operations. You donâ&#x20AC;&#x2122;t have to manually move the data or use a third-party data integration tool. To better understand using the Common Data Services (CDS), consider the Prospect to cash scenario: The Prospect to cash solution provides direct synchronization across Dynamics 365 for Finance and Operations and Dynamics 365 for Sales. You can download the Dynamics 365, Prospect to Cash solution from AppSource

www.dynamicscompanions.com Dynamics Companions

- 245 -

DYNAMICS COMPANIONS CERTIFICATION EXAM STUDY GUIDE

EXAM MB-300: MICROSOFT DYNAMICS 365 UNIFIED OPERATIONS CORE

The Prospect to cash templates that are available with the data integration feature enable the flow of data for accounts, contacts, products, sales quotations, sales orders, and sales invoices between Dynamics 365 for Finance and Operations and Dynamics 365 for Sales. While data is flowing between Dynamics 365 for Finance and Operations and Dynamics 365 for Sales, you can perform sales and marketing activities in Sales, and you can handle order fulfillment by using inventory management in Finance and Operations.

Exercise â&#x20AC;&#x201C; Work with Microsoft Office integration Link: https://docs.microsoft.com/en-us/learn/modules/implement-common-integration-featuresin-dynamics-365-finance-ops/10-exercise-work-office-integration You need to use and build office integration that involves Microsoft Excel, Word, Document management, and email in Finance and Operations.

Load the Fleet data set 1.

Go to Fleet Management > Setup > Fleet setup.

Select Create.

Static Export to Excel 1.

Go to Fleet Management > Customers > Customer.

www.dynamicscompanions.com Dynamics Companions

- 246 -

DYNAMICS COMPANIONS CERTIFICATION EXAM STUDY GUIDE

EXAM MB-300: MICROSOFT DYNAMICS 365 UNIFIED OPERATIONS CORE

Select Open in Microsoft Office > Export to Excel > Customers.

Download and open the workbook that is generated. Note that the columns in the workbook match the columns in the grid.

Select the first two rows by clicking in the left edge of the row, below the Select all check mark.

Right-click the grid header to open the shortcut menu. Note that both Export all rows and Export marked rows are available as commands.

Select Export marked rows. Note that the columns in the workbook match the columns in the grid, and that the rows that are exported match the rows that you selected.

Generated Open in Excel 1.

Go to Fleet Management > Customers > Customer.

Select Open in Microsoft Office > Open in Excel > Fleet Management Customers (unfiltered).

Download and open the workbook that is generated. This workbook contains the Excel Data Connector App, a binding to the Fleet Management Customer entity, and a pointer to the server that the workbook was generated from.

Select Enable editing to enable the Excel Data Connector App to load. Customer data is read from the OData service on the server and added to the table.

In an internet browser, on the Customer page, select Edit (or press F2) and change the email address of one of the customers.

In Excel, select Refresh. Note that the new email address is shown in Excel.

In Excel, change the email address of one of the customers.

In the Excel app, select Publish.

In an internet browser, select Refresh in the upper right of the page (or press Shift+F5). Note that the new email address is shown on the Customer page.

10. In Excel, select the Settings (gear) button in the lower-right corner of the Excel app. You can use the dialog box that appears to adjust the settings in the current workbook. Note that the Server URL value matches the start of the URL that is shown in an internet browser. Also note that the data refresh and data publish operations are listed. 11. Select Cancel to close the Settings dialog box. 12. Select the Message Center (flag) button in the lower-right corner of the Excel app. The message center dialog box that appears provides information about what is occurring in the Excel app.

Add and remove table columns from an existing table data source in the Excel app 1.

To obtain a workbook that has an existing table data source, such as Fleet management customers, go to Fleet Management > Customers > Customer.

www.dynamicscompanions.com Dynamics Companions

- 247 -

DYNAMICS COMPANIONS CERTIFICATION EXAM STUDY GUIDE

EXAM MB-300: MICROSOFT DYNAMICS 365 UNIFIED OPERATIONS CORE

Select Open in Microsoft Office > Open in Excel > Fleet Management Customers (unfiltered).

Select Enable editing to enable the Excel Data Connector App to load. Customer data is read from the OData service on the server and added to the table.

Open the data source for editing. In Excel, select Design. A list of table and field data sources appears.

Select the Edit (pencil) button next to the existing table data source. The data source details are shown.

Remove fields. In the Selected list, double-click a field. Alternatively, click a field, and then select Remove. To select multiple fields, hold down the Ctrl key while you click the fields. To select all fields, press Ctrl+A.

Add fields. In the Available list, double-click a field. Alternatively, click a field, and then select Add. To select multiple fields, hold down the Ctrl key while you click the fields. To select all fields, press Ctrl+A.

Change the field order. In the Selected list, click a field, and then select Up or Down.

10. Change a field label. In the Selected list, click a field, and then select the Column label field below the list. You can change the label to either a static string or a label identifier that will be translated to the active language (for example '@SYS129977'). 11. To apply the changes that you made to data source fields, select Update to return to the data source list. 12. Select Refresh to make sure that any new fields are filled with data.

Open in Excel Online 1.

Go to Fleet Management > Customers > Customer.

Select Open in Microsoft Office > Open in Excel > Fleet Management Customers.

Select SharePoint.

Browse to the desired Microsoft SharePoint folder.

Select Save. The default behavior is to open the file after it's saved.

Note that the workbook opens in Excel Online. In Excel Online, capabilities of the Excel app, such as refresh and publish, and the design experience, should work just as they work in on-premises Excel instances.

Lookups in the Excel app 1.

Go to Fleet Management > Rentals > Rental.

www.dynamicscompanions.com Dynamics Companions

- 248 -

DYNAMICS COMPANIONS CERTIFICATION EXAM STUDY GUIDE

EXAM MB-300: MICROSOFT DYNAMICS 365 UNIFIED OPERATIONS CORE

Select Open in Microsoft Office > Open in Excel > Fleet Management Rentals.

Open the workbook that is generated.

Select Enable editing to enable the Excel Data Connector App to load and read data.

Select a Drivers license value. Note that a relationship lookup now appears in the Excel app and shows a list of customers. Because relationship lookups are in their first generation, no filtering or sorting is currently supported.

Select another customer in the lookup and note that the Drivers license value changes. Because this field is part of the key, select the original Drivers license value to reset it. Note that the Drivers license, First name, and Last name fields form a multi-part key, but the Excel app doesnâ&#x20AC;&#x2122;t immediately change all parts of the multi-part key.

Select a Start date value. Note that a date picker now appears in the Excel app.

Select another date to change the Start date value.

Select Design and edit the FleetRental data source by adding the Status field as a column in the table binding.

10. When you've finished adding the Status column, select a Status value. Note that an enum list now appears in the Excel app. 11. While focus is in the Status column, move up and down the list of rentals to observe how quickly the enum list changes to reflect the current value. The whole enum list is shown so that the user can quickly view all the available values. 12. Select a different Status value to observe how an enum value can be changed by using a single click.

Exercise - Use the Excel workbook designer Link: https://docs.microsoft.com/en-us/learn/modules/implement-common-integration-featuresin-dynamics-365-finance-ops/11-exercise-excel-workbook-designer You need to use the Excel workbook designer page to create an Open in Excel experience for a company. 1.

Go to Common > Common > Office integration > Excel workbook designer.

Select the FleetCustomer entity.

Add all fields in the list of available fields to the list of selected fields.

Select Create workbook.

Open the workbook that is generated. This workbook contains the Excel Data Connector App, a binding to the Fleet Management Customer entity, and a pointer to the server that the workbook was generated from.

Select Enable editing to enable the Excel Data Connector App to load. Customer data is read from the OData service on the server and added to the table.

www.dynamicscompanions.com Dynamics Companions

- 249 -

DYNAMICS COMPANIONS CERTIFICATION EXAM STUDY GUIDE

EXAM MB-300: MICROSOFT DYNAMICS 365 UNIFIED OPERATIONS CORE

Insert a blank row above the table and enter Fleet Customers as the title.

Rename the worksheet FleetCustomers.

Rearrange some of the fields in the table. Select Design to open the designer experience.

10. Next to the FleetCustomer data source are buttons for editing and deleting the data source. Select Edit to see the field list. 11. Select fields and move them as you require. Set the order for the first three fields to FirstName, LastName, and DriverLicense. 12. Select Update. Note that the field order is changed. 13. Select Done. 14. Select the Settings (gear) button. 15. Select Clear binding data so that the workbook contains no bound data. 16. Select OK. 17. Save the workbook as FleetCustomersBasic.xlsx. 18. In an internet browser, go to Common > Common > Office integration > Document templates. 19. Select New. 20. Browse to the file that you just saved. 21. Select OK. The template is added as a line in the templates table. 22. In the FleetCustomersBasic row, clear the Apply current record filter check box, so that an unfiltered list of customers will be loaded after the template is opened. 23. Change the Template display name value to Fleet Customers Basic. 24. Go to Fleet Management > Customers > Customer. 25. Select Open in Microsoft Office. Note that Fleet Customers Basic is now an option in the Open in Excel section. Select that option. 26. Open the workbook that is generated. 27. Select Enable editing to enable the Excel Data Connector App to load. Customer data is read from the OData service on the server and added to the table binding that you created. Bonus: Try using the designer experience in the Excel add-in to add another data source onto another worksheet.

Check your knowledge Link: https://docs.microsoft.com/en-us/learn/modules/implement-common-integration-featuresin-dynamics-365-finance-ops/12-common-integration-fo-quiz

www.dynamicscompanions.com Dynamics Companions

- 250 -

DYNAMICS COMPANIONS CERTIFICATION EXAM STUDY GUIDE

EXAM MB-300: MICROSOFT DYNAMICS 365 UNIFIED OPERATIONS CORE

Implement common integration features in Dynamics 365 for Finance and Operations knowledge check 1.

Which one of the following allows you to integrate between Dynamics 365 for Sales and Dynamics 365 for Finance and Operations? a.

You need to create a custom connector.

b. The integration is a built-in functionality in Finance and Operations. c. 2.

Common Data Service

Which one of the following printing scenarios can export a PDF version? a.

Printing what you see

b. Printing on a network device c. 3.

Interactive printing

Which one of the following printing scenarios uses the HTML5 client? a.

Printing what you see

b. Printing on a network device c.

Interactive printing

Summary Link: https://docs.microsoft.com/en-us/learn/modules/implement-common-integration-featuresin-dynamics-365-finance-ops/13-common-integration-fo-summary In this module, you have learned how to use Microsoft Office integration in Finance and Operations, configure email (SMTP/Exchange), and to create and maintain email templates to standardize the messages when sending emails to customers. By setting up network printing features, you can use corporate network printers remotely. Finally, this module provided an overview of how to integrate data from multiple sources into Common Data Service for Apps.

www.dynamicscompanions.com Dynamics Companions

- 251 -

DYNAMICS COMPANIONS CERTIFICATION EXAM STUDY GUIDE

EXAM MB-300: MICROSOFT DYNAMICS 365 UNIFIED OPERATIONS CORE

Course MB-300T03: Data migration and preparing for go-live with Dynamics 365 for Finance and Operations Link: https://www.microsoft.com/en-us/learning/course.aspx?cid=MB-300T03 Organizations use Dynamics 365 for Finance and Operations to reduce operational costs and rapidly respond to changing business needs. This solution lets organizations achieve these goals. This course discusses data migration and go-live preparation for Microsoft Dynamics 365 for Finance and Operations.

www.dynamicscompanions.com Dynamics Companions

- 252 -

DYNAMICS COMPANIONS CERTIFICATION EXAM STUDY GUIDE

EXAM MB-300: MICROSOFT DYNAMICS 365 UNIFIED OPERATIONS CORE

Module 1: Prepare Data for Migration and Migrate Data This unit explores integration patterns, scenarios, and solutions for Finance and Operations. Although this unit does not include technical details about how to use or set up every integration pattern or how to work with sample code, it is always wise to be aware of available integration tools. Lessons •

Introduction

•

Understand BYOD feature

•

Perform a test migration and validate output

•

Module summary

When it’s time for data migration, the more you know, the easier it is to control operational complexity and reduce costs. Your customer’s business continuity must be your priority. In this module, you will learn how to prepare data for a successful migration by identifying important factors such as legacy systems, and static and common data. In this module, you learned how to: •

Choose a data integration (import/export) strategy.

•

Identify common migration scenarios and tools in Finance and Operations.

•

Understand the bring your own database (BYOD) feature.

•

Identify relevant (legacy) systems.

•

Identify and import static data that is common between industries.

•

Create and review test plans for data migration.

•

Identify and extract source data.

•

Identify relevant data entities and elements.

•

Generate field mapping between source and target data structures.

•

Perform a test migration and validate output.

•

Support the transition between the existing and migrated systems.

www.dynamicscompanions.com Dynamics Companions

- 253 -

DYNAMICS COMPANIONS CERTIFICATION EXAM STUDY GUIDE

EXAM MB-300: MICROSOFT DYNAMICS 365 UNIFIED OPERATIONS CORE

Prepare data for migration to Dynamics 365 for Finance and Operations Link: https://docs.microsoft.com/en-us/learn/modules/prepare-data-migration-to-dynamics-365finance-ops/index When it’s time for data migration, the more you know, the easier it is to control operational complexity and reduce costs. Your customer’s business continuity must be your priority. Learn how to prepare data for migration by using the data management framework to manage data entities and data entity packages in Dynamics 365 for Finance and Operations. In this module, you will learn how to: •

Choose a data integration (import/export) strategy.

•

Identify common migration scenarios and tools in Finance and Operations.

•

Understand the bring your own database (BYOD) feature.

•

Identify relevant (legacy) systems.

•

Identify and import static data that is common between industries.

•

Create and review test plans for data migration.

•

Identify and extract source data.

•

Identify relevant data entities and elements.

•

Generate field mapping between source and target data structures.

•

Test a data migration and validate output.

•

Support the transition between the existing and migrated systems.

Introduction Link: https://docs.microsoft.com/en-us/learn/modules/prepare-data-migration-to-dynamics-365finance-ops/1-prepare-data-migration-module-introduction When it’s time for data migration, the more you know, the easier it is to control operational complexity and reduce costs. Your customer’s business continuity must be your priority. In this module, you will learn how to prepare data for a successful migration by identifying important factors such as legacy systems, and static and common data. In this module, you will learn how to: •

Choose a data integration (import/export) strategy.

•

Identify common migration scenarios and tools in Finance and Operations. www.dynamicscompanions.com Dynamics Companions

- 254 -

DYNAMICS COMPANIONS CERTIFICATION EXAM STUDY GUIDE

EXAM MB-300: MICROSOFT DYNAMICS 365 UNIFIED OPERATIONS CORE

•

Understand the bring your own database (BYOD) feature.

•

Identify relevant (legacy) systems.

•

Identify and import static data that is common between industries.

•

Create and review test plans for data migration.

•

Identify and extract source data.

•

Identify relevant data entities and elements.

•

Generate field mapping between source and target data structures.

•

Perform a test migration and validate output.

•

Support the transition between the existing and migrated systems.

Select a data integration (import/export) strategy Link: https://docs.microsoft.com/en-us/learn/modules/prepare-data-migration-to-dynamics-365finance-ops/2-data-integration-strategy This unit explores integration patterns, scenarios, and solutions for Finance and Operations. Although this unit does not include technical details about how to use or set up every integration pattern or how to work with sample code, it is always wise to be aware of available integration tools. The following integration patterns are available for Finance and Operations: •

OData

•

Batch data API

•

Custom service

•

Consume external web services

•

Excel integration

OData OData is a standard protocol for creating and consuming data. The purpose of OData is to provide a protocol that is based on Representational State Transfer (REST) for create, read, update, and delete (CRUD) operations. OData applies web technologies such as HTTP and JavaScript Object Notation (JSON) to provide access to information from various programs. OData provides the following benefits: •

Allowing developers to interact with data by using RESTful web services

•

Providing a simple and uniform way to share data in a discoverable manner

•

Enabling broad integration across products

•

Enabling integration by using the HTTP protocol stack

www.dynamicscompanions.com Dynamics Companions

- 255 -

DYNAMICS COMPANIONS CERTIFICATION EXAM STUDY GUIDE

EXAM MB-300: MICROSOFT DYNAMICS 365 UNIFIED OPERATIONS CORE

Batch data API Use the batch data API in scenarios that require one or both Data management package REST API and Recurring integrations. Both APIs support data import scenarios and data export scenarios. For Finance and Operations, we have tried to simplify this process for all parties who are involved, from integration solution builders to customer users. The package API lets you integrate with Finance and Operations by using data packages. The REST API can be used with both cloud and on-premises deployments. The data management framework's package API uses OAuth 2.0 for authorizing access. The process of data migration, and movement into and out of any enterprise system, are critical pieces that any platform must support. Recurring integration does the following: •

Builds on data entities and the Data management framework

•

Enables the exchange of documents or files between Finance and Operations and any third-party application or service

•

Supports several document formats, source mapping, Extensible Stylesheet Language Transformations (XSLT), and filters

•

Uses secure Representational State Transfer (REST) application programming interfaces (APIs) and authorization mechanisms to receive data from, and send data back to, integration systems

Before the integrating client application can consume this endpoint, you need to create an application ID in Microsoft Azure Active Directory (Azure AD) and give it appropriate permission to Finance and Operations. When you create and enable a recurring job, you're prompted to enter the Azure AD application ID that will interact with that recurring job. Therefore, be sure to make a note of the application ID. Lots of effort and planning go into building third-party integrations between an enterprise line of business (LOB) system, such as Microsoft Dynamics 365 for Finance and Operations, and various source systems.

Custom service A developer can create custom services for Finance and Operations. When a developer writes a custom service under a service group, the service group is always deployed on two endpoints: •

SOAP endpoint – Code examples for consuming custom services using SOAP are available in the Microsoft Dynamics AX Integration GitHub repository .

•

JSON endpoint – Code examples for consuming JSON services are available in the Microsoft Dynamics AX Integration GitHub repository .

www.dynamicscompanions.com Dynamics Companions

- 256 -

DYNAMICS COMPANIONS CERTIFICATION EXAM STUDY GUIDE

EXAM MB-300: MICROSOFT DYNAMICS 365 UNIFIED OPERATIONS CORE

Consume external web services A developer consumes web services by adding new class libraries to Dynamics 365 for Finance and Operations.

Excel integration The Microsoft Office integration capabilities provide users with a productive environment that helps them get the job done by using Office products. Microsoft Excel can change and quickly analyze data. The Excel Data Connector app interacts with Excel workbooks and OData services that are created for publicly exposed data entities. The Excel Data Connector add-in enables Excel to become a seamless part of the user experience. The Excel Data Connector add-in is built by using the Office Web add-ins framework. The add-in runs in a task pane.

Synchronous vs. asynchronous integration patterns Processing can be either synchronous or asynchronous. Often, the type of processing that you must use determines the integration pattern that you choose. A synchronous pattern is a blocking request and response pattern, where the caller is blocked until the recipient has finished running the Excel integration and gives a response. An asynchronous pattern is a non-blocking pattern, where the caller submits the request and then continues without waiting for a response. Consider using OData for synchronous and Batch data API for asynchronous integration scenarios.

Common migration scenarios and tools Link: https://docs.microsoft.com/en-us/learn/modules/prepare-data-migration-to-dynamics-365finance-ops/3-common-migration-scenarios-tools The following are two scenarios and recommendations for which integration pattern to use.

Scenario 1: An energy company has field workers who schedule installation jobs for heaters. This company uses Finance and Operations for the back office and third-party software as a service (SaaS) to schedule appointments. When field workers schedule appointments, they must look up inventory availability to make sure that installation parts are available for the job. The real-time data required: Peak data volume is 1,000 records per hour and the Frequency is Ad hoc. This scenario can be implemented by using a custom service integration pattern.

www.dynamicscompanions.com Dynamics Companions

- 257 -

DYNAMICS COMPANIONS CERTIFICATION EXAM STUDY GUIDE

EXAM MB-300: MICROSOFT DYNAMICS 365 UNIFIED OPERATIONS CORE

In Finance and Operations, have a developer create a custom service to calculate the physical on-hand inventory for a given item. In the scheduling application, make a real-time call to a custom service endpoint, through either SOAP or REST, to retrieve inventory information for the selected item.

Scenario 2: A company receives a large volume of sales orders from a front-end system that runs on-premises. Periodically, these orders must be sent to Finance and Operations for processing and management. The real-time data is not required. Peak data volume is 20,000 records per hour and the Frequency is One time every five minutes. This scenario is best implemented by using a batch data APIs integration pattern. In Finance and Operations, determine all the entities that are required for the integration, and make sure that data management is enabled for the entities.

Finance and Operations integration tools Finance and Operations offers tools for data migration, such as: •

Data management workspace

•

Office integration

•

Excel workbook designer

Bring your own database (BYOD) Link: https://docs.microsoft.com/en-us/learn/modules/prepare-data-migration-to-dynamics-365finance-ops/4-bring-your-own-database The BYOD feature lets administrators configure their own database, and then export one or more data entities that are available in Finance and Operations into it. Specifically, this feature lets you complete these tasks: •

Define one or more Microsoft Azure SQL databases that you can export entity data from Finance and Operations into.

•

Export either all the records (full push) or only the records that have changed or been deleted (incremental push).

•

Use the rich scheduling capabilities of the Finance and Operations batch framework to enable periodic exports.

•

Access the entity database by using Transact-SQL (T-SQL), and even extend the database by adding more tables.

•

Export entities into multiple databases. www.dynamicscompanions.com Dynamics Companions

- 258 -

DYNAMICS COMPANIONS CERTIFICATION EXAM STUDY GUIDE

EXAM MB-300: MICROSOFT DYNAMICS 365 UNIFIED OPERATIONS CORE

The BYOD feature is recommended for when you do the following: •

Export data from Finance and Operations into your own data warehouse.

•

Use analytical tools other than Power BI, and those tools require T-SQL access to data.

•

Perform batch integration with other systems.

If you have integration solutions that require direct T-SQL access to the database, BYOD is the recommended upgrade path. Before you can configure the export option and use the BYOD feature, you must create an SQL database for production environments by using Azure portal.

www.dynamicscompanions.com Dynamics Companions

- 259 -

DYNAMICS COMPANIONS CERTIFICATION EXAM STUDY GUIDE

EXAM MB-300: MICROSOFT DYNAMICS 365 UNIFIED OPERATIONS CORE

You should also create a SQL user account for sign-in to the database. Make sure to record and save the server name, database name, and the SQL user ID and password. You will use these values when you configure the entity export option. If you're using the BYOD feature for integration with a business intelligence (BI) tool, consider creating an SQL premium database. Premium databases support clustered columnstore indexes (CCIs). CCIs are in-

www.dynamicscompanions.com Dynamics Companions

- 260 -

DYNAMICS COMPANIONS CERTIFICATION EXAM STUDY GUIDE

EXAM MB-300: MICROSOFT DYNAMICS 365 UNIFIED OPERATIONS CORE

memory indexes that improve the performance of read queries that are typical in analytical and reporting workloads. If you're using the BYOD feature to export data into a staging database or for general integration purposes, you can use a standard database. To configure the entity export, follow this procedure. 1.

Go to the Data management workspace and select the Configure Entity export to database tile.

www.dynamicscompanions.com Dynamics Companions

- 261 -

DYNAMICS COMPANIONS CERTIFICATION EXAM STUDY GUIDE

www.dynamicscompanions.com Dynamics Companions

EXAM MB-300: MICROSOFT DYNAMICS 365 UNIFIED OPERATIONS CORE

- 262 -

DYNAMICS COMPANIONS CERTIFICATION EXAM STUDY GUIDE

EXAM MB-300: MICROSOFT DYNAMICS 365 UNIFIED OPERATIONS CORE

If you've already configured any databases, a list is shown, and you will need to select a database. Then, skip step 3.

To configure a new database, select New, and then enter a unique name and a description for the new database.

Enter the connection string in the following format: Data Source=<logical server name>, 1433; Initial Catalog =<your DB name>; Integrated Security=False; User ID = <SQL user ID>; Password = <password>

Select Validate, and make sure that the connection is successful.

When the validation is passed, the database that you configured for entity export appears in lists of databases.

By default, the Create clustered column store indexes option is enabled. This option optimizes the destination database for selected queries by defining CCIs for entities that are copied from Finance and Operations. However, CCIs are currently supported only on SQL premium databases. Therefore, if you keep this option enabled, you must create a new or select an existing SQL premium database.

By default, the Enable triggers in target database option is disabled. This option sets export jobs to enable SQL triggers in the target database, and lets you hook downstream processes into the trigger to orchestrate actions that must be started after records have been inserted.

www.dynamicscompanions.com Dynamics Companions

- 263 -

DYNAMICS COMPANIONS CERTIFICATION EXAM STUDY GUIDE

EXAM MB-300: MICROSOFT DYNAMICS 365 UNIFIED OPERATIONS CORE

You can now publish one or more entities to the new database by selecting the Publish option on the menu.

After entities are published to the destination database, you can use the Export function in the Data management workspace to move data. The Export function lets you define a Data movement job that contains one or more entities. You can use the Export page to export data from Finance and Operations into many target data formats, such as a comma-separated values (CSV) file. This page also supports SQL databases as another destination. The value of the <logical server name> has a format like <yourSqlAzureServername> .database.windows.net, which can be found in Azure portal by selecting the SQL databases menu. For scenarios in which reporting systems read data from BYOD, there is always the challenge of ensuring that the reporting systems get consistent data from BYOD while the sync from Finance and Operations is in progress. One trigger is supported per bulk insert operation. The size of the bulk insert is determined by the Maximum insert commit size parameter in the Data management framework. You can achieve this result by not having the reporting systems read directly from the staging tables that were created by the BYOD process. The staging tables hold the data while data is being synced from the Finance and Operations instance and hence will be constantly changing. Use the SQL trigger feature to determine when the data sync from Finance and Operations has been completed, and then hydrate the downstream reporting systems.

Test a data migration and validate output Link: https://docs.microsoft.com/en-us/learn/modules/prepare-data-migration-to-dynamics-365finance-ops/5-perform-test-migration-validate-output To prepare for data migration, the first step is to identify relevant (legacy) systems that the customer is currently using. Then, you need to identify and import static data that is common between industries.

Identify relevant (legacy) systems A legacy system is a business solution that has a few common characteristics with current solutions in the market, such as being based on outdated technology or design, being incompatible or difficult and costly to integrate with current systems, and a potential inability of being purchased from vendors because it is unavailable and discontinued. Each legacy system might have a different data export format option that must be considered as part of the planning for data migration, and you should be prepared for data extraction from legacy data sources.

www.dynamicscompanions.com Dynamics Companions

- 264 -

DYNAMICS COMPANIONS CERTIFICATION EXAM STUDY GUIDE

EXAM MB-300: MICROSOFT DYNAMICS 365 UNIFIED OPERATIONS CORE

Identify and import static data that is common between industries Your customer might have different verticals, such as distribution and trade, manufacturing, and retail. Even if you manage a customer’s data migration that is only focused on one specific industry, such as manufacturing, you still need to investigate to determine whether their customers and suppliers who might be in a different industry such as resellers which are retailers who interchange data with your customer. When you plan data migration, you need to identify common data that are not frequently changed, such as country codes, zip or postal codes, states, or regions. Identifying the common static data between different verticals or industries helps reduce the cost and prepare the source data, clean it, and get customer consensus prior to importing the data to Finance and Operations.

Create and review test plans for data migration Your plans for data migration need to be ready to guide you through the process. Make sure that the right system permissions are applied on resources to have a successful data migration. Make sure that you back up the database and source files that you plan to migrate. If you encounter any issues during migration, such as corrupt, incomplete, or missing files, you need to correct the error and restore the database from the backup. You need to extract all data from the source system, and then migrate the data to the target, which is Finance and Operations. Then, you need to clean the data and transform it into the proper format for transfer to Finance and Operations. Finally, load your cleaned and deduplicated data into your Finance and Operations data management, map fields, and import data to Finance and Operations. Make sure to always monitor your data migration during the process so that you can detect and resolve any issues or problems if they arise. Once the migration is complete, ensure that there are no connectivity problems with source and Finance and Operations systems. Your goal is to make sure that all data correctly migrated by performing unit, system, regression, and other applicable tests. Do not forget the simplest method, which is using built-in reports and inquiries in Finance and Operations, and then have the customer’s key stakeholder verify the data and compare the migrated data with their legacy system. For example, assume you are migrating the chart of accounts, posted transactions, and so on. After you migrated data for a specific financial period, you ran the trail balance print, and then asked the CFO (or one of your customer’s financial leaders) to compare the results and match them against the financial report on their legacy system before migrating the next period.

www.dynamicscompanions.com Dynamics Companions

- 265 -

DYNAMICS COMPANIONS CERTIFICATION EXAM STUDY GUIDE

EXAM MB-300: MICROSOFT DYNAMICS 365 UNIFIED OPERATIONS CORE

Identify and extract source data When you and your team have analyzed the data and retrieved relevant information from data sources (like a database) in a specific pattern, it is then time to extract the relevant data. You might need to perform further data processing, which involves adding metadata and other data integration, another process in the data workflow.

Identify relevant data entities and elements You need to know what sources of data are important for the analysis. If the information being analyzed is only related to the scenario at hand, it should be set aside because you should only use data sources that are absolutely relevant to the scenario for migration. You should never bring all the data from multiple data sources to Finance and Operations in one occurrence; rather, you should have a proper plan to guide you according to the business scenario. For example, if you are planning to bring all the purchase orders in to Finance and Operations from a legacy system, there are many related and relevant entities that you should consider as well, such as vendor groups, vendors, tax codes, headers and lines of purchase orders, and many more. Prior to starting the data migration process, identify what data you’re migrating, what format it’s currently in, where it lives, and what format it should be in post-migration. Consider whether the data migration will interfere with normal business operations or will contribute to downtime. If so, you need to plan off hours or weekends for the migration process. Also, remember to perform the database backup prior to starting the data migration. You need to communicate the potential downtime with your customer, so they can plan accordingly. Remember that business continuity always should be your first priority. Often, your source data must be changed and cleaned, or even split into more segments. Data verification helps you check that the data is available, accessible, complete, and in the correct format. This is called data cleansing. The first stage in data cleansing is to define which rules must be carried out manually and which need to be planned as automated. Typically, manual cleansing will be done before migration starts, while automated cleansing might be done before or as part of the migration’s initial phase.

Generate field mapping between source and target data structures First, you need to identify the format of the data source. You can view the formats in Data management from the Configure data source tile.

www.dynamicscompanions.com Dynamics Companions

- 266 -

DYNAMICS COMPANIONS CERTIFICATION EXAM STUDY GUIDE

EXAM MB-300: MICROSOFT DYNAMICS 365 UNIFIED OPERATIONS CORE

In Configure data source, you can create and modify sources of data for migrations. If you have identified the data sources and their relevant entities, you can use different types of data sources depending on the format exported from external systems, some of which are legacy systems.

www.dynamicscompanions.com Dynamics Companions

- 267 -

DYNAMICS COMPANIONS CERTIFICATION EXAM STUDY GUIDE

EXAM MB-300: MICROSOFT DYNAMICS 365 UNIFIED OPERATIONS CORE

Upon adding an entity into the Data management project for either import or export, Finance and Operations creates field mapping between the source data and the target table for each data entity, which matches the schema of the table associated with the data entity.

www.dynamicscompanions.com Dynamics Companions

- 268 -

DYNAMICS COMPANIONS CERTIFICATION EXAM STUDY GUIDE

EXAM MB-300: MICROSOFT DYNAMICS 365 UNIFIED OPERATIONS CORE

The type of the field, and whether it is a required field, are examples of the metadata of the table that is being shown in the Mapping details tab. Here, you can choose to ignore blank values and select a text identifier to properly use the text values from the source data field. Alternatively, you can use the label for the enumerator fields instead of its value.

www.dynamicscompanions.com Dynamics Companions

- 269 -

DYNAMICS COMPANIONS CERTIFICATION EXAM STUDY GUIDE

EXAM MB-300: MICROSOFT DYNAMICS 365 UNIFIED OPERATIONS CORE

Support the transition between the existing and migrated systems Analyzing the data between what is in the legacy system and what has been imported to Finance and Operations is an important part of data migration. This provides an overview of the source data and its corresponding target table that is represented by data entities in Finance and Operations. Itâ&#x20AC;&#x2122;s important to know how each system works and how the data within each system is structured. You also need to validate the information discovered in the analysis phase of each phase in data migration, and then ensure that all data is properly migrated by running certain reports, or inquiries. By validating the data, your team can focus solely on structural manipulation and movement and data assurance.

Check your knowledge Link: https://docs.microsoft.com/en-us/learn/modules/prepare-data-migration-to-dynamics-365finance-ops/6-prepare-data-migration-quiz

Prepare data for migration to Dynamics 365 for Finance and Operations knowledge check 1.

Which of the following enables broad integration between Finance and Operations and other products, systems, and applications? a.

Excel integration

b. Custom service c. 2.

OData

Which of the following enables the exchange of documents or files between Finance and Operations and any third-party application or service? a.

Excel integration

b. Custom service c. 3.

Batch data API

The Excel Data Connector app interacts with Microsoft Excel workbooks through which one of the following? a.

External web services

b. Custom service c. 4.

OData

An energy company has field workers who schedule installation jobs for heaters. This company uses Finance and Operations for the back office and third-party software as a service (SaaS) to

www.dynamicscompanions.com Dynamics Companions

- 270 -

DYNAMICS COMPANIONS CERTIFICATION EXAM STUDY GUIDE

EXAM MB-300: MICROSOFT DYNAMICS 365 UNIFIED OPERATIONS CORE

schedule appointments. When field workers schedule appointments, they must look up inventory availability to make sure that installation parts are available for the job. The real-time data is required. Peak data volume is 1,000 records per hour and the Frequency is Ad hoc. Which one of the following integration patterns should you use? a.

External web services

b. Excel integration c.

Custom service

Summary Link: https://docs.microsoft.com/en-us/learn/modules/prepare-data-migration-to-dynamics-365finance-ops/7-prepare-data-migration-summary This module explained how to identify common migration scenarios and import static data that is common between industries. You learned about some of the tools in Finance and Operations such as Data management and the BYOD feature. As part of choosing a data integration (import/export) strategy, you were able to observe how important it is to identify relevant (legacy) systems, create and review test plans for data migration, in addition to identifying and extracting source data and its relevant data entities and elements. Finally, you learned that an important responsibility for the data migration team includes generating field mapping between source and Finance and Operations data entities, performing a test migration and validating the output, and then supporting the transition between the existing and migrated systems.

www.dynamicscompanions.com Dynamics Companions

- 271 -

DYNAMICS COMPANIONS CERTIFICATION EXAM STUDY GUIDE

EXAM MB-300: MICROSOFT DYNAMICS 365 UNIFIED OPERATIONS CORE

Module 2: Use Data Management In this module, you will get an overview of the basic concepts of the Data management platform. You will also learn how to import and export data in Dynamics 365 for Finance and Operations by using the Data management workspace. Finally, you'll learn how to use the asynchronous recurring integration features of the Data management platform. You can use the data management framework to manage data entities and data entity packages in Finance and Operations. Lessons •

Introduction

•

Understand data management and integration

•

Data management workspace

•

Templates in data management

•

Import, export and copy data into a legal entity

•

Practice Labs

•

Module summary

In this module, you learned how to: •

Identify the correct pattern for a given scenario to use the Data management platform for integration by using data entities.

•

Work with the Data management workspace.

•

Export data from a legal entity.

•

Import data into a legal entity.

•

Work with data import and export jobs.

•

Clean up the staging tables.

www.dynamicscompanions.com Dynamics Companions

- 272 -

DYNAMICS COMPANIONS CERTIFICATION EXAM STUDY GUIDE

EXAM MB-300: MICROSOFT DYNAMICS 365 UNIFIED OPERATIONS CORE

Work with data management in Dynamics 365 for Finance and Operations Link: https://docs.microsoft.com/en-us/learn/modules/work-with-data-management-in-dynamics365-finance-ops/ You can export or import data in Dynamics 365 for Finance and Operations by using the Data management workspace. Validate the data by staging the source data, and then move it to the target tables in the Finance and Operations database. In this module, you will learn how to: •

Identify the correct pattern for a given scenario to use the Data management platform for integration by using data entities.

•

Work with the Data management workspace.

•

Export data from a legal entity.

•

Import data into a legal entity.

•

Work with data import and export jobs.

•

Clean up the staging tables.

Introduction Link: https://docs.microsoft.com/en-us/learn/modules/work-with-data-management-in-dynamics365-finance-ops/1-work-data-management-introduction In this module, you will get an overview of the basic concepts of the Data management platform. You will also learn how to import and export data in Dynamics 365 for Finance and Operations by using the Data management workspace. Finally, you'll learn how to use the asynchronous recurring integration features of the Data management platform. You can use the data management framework to manage data entities and data entity packages in Finance and Operations. In this module, you will learn how to: •

Identify the correct pattern for a given scenario to use the Data management platform for integration by using data entities.

•

Work with the Data management workspace.

•

Export data from a legal entity. www.dynamicscompanions.com Dynamics Companions

- 273 -

DYNAMICS COMPANIONS CERTIFICATION EXAM STUDY GUIDE

•

Import data into a legal entity.

•

Work with data import and export jobs.

•

Clean up the staging tables.

EXAM MB-300: MICROSOFT DYNAMICS 365 UNIFIED OPERATIONS CORE

Data management concepts Link: https://docs.microsoft.com/en-us/learn/modules/work-with-data-management-in-dynamics365-finance-ops/2-data-management-concepts The data management framework consists of the following concepts: •

Data entities – A data entity is a conceptual abstraction and encapsulation of one or more underlying tables. A data entity represents a common data concept or functionality, for example, customers or vendors. Data entities are intended to be easily understood by users who are familiar with business concepts. After data entities are created, you can reuse them through the Excel add-in, use them to define import/export packages, or use them for integrations.

•

Data project – A data project is automatically created when you select Import or Export from the workspace and should have at least one job. It contains configured data entities, which include mapping and default processing options. A data project allows users to configure the entities that should be part of the project, and defines the format that is used for each entity. It allows users to define the mapping that is used from the source file to the staging, and specify the default processing options.

•

Data job – This is a job that contains an execution instance of the data project, uploaded files, schedule (recurrence), and processing options. A data job is used to perform the actual import or export operation. It contains the uploaded files, the schedule or recurrence information, and the processing options to use for the job. A data job is created when the import or export operation is performed. The data job creates an instance of the data project and runs it. If you're doing an ad hoc import or export, then there's typically only one job for each data project. If it is being done multiple times with different data, then you can use the same data project to import data multiple times by using different jobs. Each data project can have one or more data jobs. For instance, if you're doing a single ad hoc data import, then you might have one file that is being imported. In this case, there is a single data project that then has one data job. Another scenario is that you might be importing data using the same data project multiple times, but with different data. In this case, there can be more than one data job for a single data project. Each data job can have one or more job histories. For instance, a data job might be run multiple times after errors have been fixed. The job history tells you the details, such as the time taken to run the job, the number of records processed, and the errors during processing.

www.dynamicscompanions.com Dynamics Companions

- 274 -

DYNAMICS COMPANIONS CERTIFICATION EXAM STUDY GUIDE

•

EXAM MB-300: MICROSOFT DYNAMICS 365 UNIFIED OPERATIONS CORE

Job history – Histories of source to staging and staging to target jobs. Once a job has been run, you can see the job history, which contains the run history for each execution run of the data job and the history of the data move from source to staging and from staging to target. The Job history tab in the Data management workspace shows all job histories for the import and export data projects. From Job history, you can view the run history for the source to staging and staging to target steps. Each project can have multiple jobs, which in turn have executions. By using the job history, you can view the execution details and determine the time it took to run the job, the number of records that were processed, and so on.

•

Data package – Data packages are key concepts for many application lifecycle management scenarios, such as copy configuration and data migration. A single compressed file that contains a data project manifest and data files. This is generated from a data job, and is used for the importing or exporting of multiple files with the manifest. Once a data project is defined, including the data entities and the mapping and sequencing between these data entities, you can then create a data package. The data package can then be used to move the definition of the data project from one environment to another. Users can generate a data package from a data job. To create a data package, go to the Data management workspace, load the project that you want to create the data package for, and then select Download. This generates a zip file.

The zip file contains the package header and the manifest. The manifest defines the settings of the data project. The data package can be used to copy the settings of your data project from one environment to another.

www.dynamicscompanions.com Dynamics Companions

- 275 -

DYNAMICS COMPANIONS CERTIFICATION EXAM STUDY GUIDE

EXAM MB-300: MICROSOFT DYNAMICS 365 UNIFIED OPERATIONS CORE

Data management platform By using the data management framework, you can quickly migrate reference, master, and document data from legacy or external systems. It provides features to import data into a staging environment, perform basic data quality services or validation operations on this data, and allow you to validate and cleanse the data. The data management platform also has features that allow you to map data from input to the target and do pre and post processing on data. Note that if you export data, the source is Finance and Operations, and if you import data, the target is Finance and Operations. The framework is intended to help you quickly migrate data by using the following features: •

You can select only the entities you need to migrate.

•

If an import error occurs, you can skip selected records and choose to proceed with the import by using only the good data, opting to then fix and import the bad data later. You will be able to partially continue and use errors to quickly find bad data.

•

You can move data entities straight from one Finance and Operations system to another, without having to go through Excel or XML.

•

Data imports can be easily scheduled by using a batch, which offers flexibility when it is required to run. For example, you can migrate customer groups, customers, vendors, and other data entities in the system at any time.

The data management framework supports using data entities in the following core data management scenarios: •

Data migration – You can migrate reference, master, and document data from legacy or external systems.

•

Set up and copy configurations – you can use this to copy configuration between companies or environments and configure processes or modules by using the Lifecycle Services (LCS) environment.

•

Integration – This is used where the real-time service-based integration is needed, or when you need an asynchronous integration. The real-time integration does not have a staging area and is directly processed by the services layer.

Data migration This is an initial or ad hoc data load that is performed manually by using the user interface. The scenarios where one uses this pattern could be when a functional user has some data in a source, such as an Excel workbook that needs to be imported from a legacy system to Finance and Operations during data migration.

www.dynamicscompanions.com Dynamics Companions

- 276 -

DYNAMICS COMPANIONS CERTIFICATION EXAM STUDY GUIDE

EXAM MB-300: MICROSOFT DYNAMICS 365 UNIFIED OPERATIONS CORE

Data flow The first step is to load the file from the source to the central storage, such as Azure. Then, the data import/export framework picks up the data from the central storage and then pushes it into the staging tables of Finance and Operations. Then from staging, the data is moved to the target by using data entities that have been defined. This flow of data can be done either row-by-row or by using a set base of the data entities for the entire underlying tables for each data entity. The sequence and order in which the target tables will be populated can be controlled by using the sequence entity feature of Finance and Operations.

Use data entities for data management and integration Link: https://docs.microsoft.com/en-us/learn/modules/work-with-data-management-in-dynamics365-finance-ops/3-data-entities-data-management-integration Data entities provide conceptual abstraction and encapsulation (de-normalized view) of underlying table schema that represent data concepts and functionalities. In this unit, we explain how to use data management and integration by using data entities. After data entities are created, you should be able to reuse them for Excel add-ins, import and export, or integration scenarios. A data entity is an abstraction from the physical implementation of database tables. For example, in normalized tables, a lot of the data for each customer might be stored in a customer table, and then the rest might be spread across a small set of related tables. In this case, the data entity for the customer concept appears as one de-normalized view, in which each row contains all the data from the customer table and its related tables. A data entity encapsulates a business concept into a format that makes development and integration easier. The abstracted nature of a data entity can simplify application development and customization. Later, the abstraction also insulates application code from the inevitable churn of the physical tables between versions. A data entity has the following capabilities: •

It provides a single stack to capture business logic, enable scenarios such as import and export, and integration, and support additional logics by a developer adding code .

•

It becomes the primary mechanism for exporting and importing data packages for Application Lifecycle Management (ALM) and demo data scenarios.

•

It can be exposed as OData services, and then used in tabular-style synchronous integration scenarios and Microsoft Office integrations.

www.dynamicscompanions.com Dynamics Companions

- 277 -

DYNAMICS COMPANIONS CERTIFICATION EXAM STUDY GUIDE

EXAM MB-300: MICROSOFT DYNAMICS 365 UNIFIED OPERATIONS CORE

Entity example A consumer wants to access data that is related to a customer object, but this data is currently scattered across multiple normalized tables, such as DirParty, CustTable, LogisticsPostalAddress, and LogisticsElectronicAddress. Therefore, the process of reading and writing customer data is tedious. Instead, the following customer entity can be designed to encapsulate the entire underlying physical schema into a single de-normalized view. This enables simpler read and write operations, and enables abstraction of any internal interaction between the tables.

Categories of entities Entities are categorized based on their functions and the type of data that they serve. The following are five categories for data entities: •

Parameters

•

Reference

•

Master

•

Document

•

Transactions

Parameters •

Functional or behavioral parameters.

•

Required to set up a deployment or a module for a specific build or customer.

•

Can include data that is specific to an industry or business. The data can also apply to a broader set of customers.

•

Tables that contain only one record, where the columns are values for settings. Examples of such tables exist for Accounts payable (AP), General ledger (GL), client performance options, workflows, and so on.

Reference •

Simple reference data, of small quantity, that is required to operate a business process.

•

Data that is specific to an industry or a business process.

•

Examples include units, dimensions, and tax codes.

Master •

Data assets of the business. Generally, these are the "nouns" of the business, which typically fall into categories such as people, places, and concepts. www.dynamicscompanions.com Dynamics Companions

- 278 -

DYNAMICS COMPANIONS CERTIFICATION EXAM STUDY GUIDE

•

EXAM MB-300: MICROSOFT DYNAMICS 365 UNIFIED OPERATIONS CORE

Complex reference data, of large quantity. Examples include customers, vendors, and projects.

Document •

Worksheet data that is converted into transactions later.

•

Documents that have complex structures, such as several line items for each header record. Examples include sales orders, purchase orders, open balances, and journals.

•

The operational data of the business.

Transactions •

The operational transaction data of the business.

•

Posted transactions. These are non idempotent items such as posted invoices and balances. Typically, these items are excluded during a full dataset copy.

•

Examples include pending invoices.

Configuration keys and data entities Before you use data entities to import or export data, we recommended that you first determine the impact of configuration keys on the data entities that you are planning to use. To learn more about configuration keys in Finance and Operations, refer to the License codes and configuration keys report .

Configuration key assignments Configuration keys can be assigned to one or all of the following artifacts. •

Data entities

•

Tables used as data sources

•

Table fields

•

Data entity fields

Supported integrations Data management by using data entities can support the following integrations: •

Synchronous service (OData) – Data entities enable public application programming interfaces (APIs) on entities to be exposed, which enables synchronous services. This method is used for Office integration and third-party mobile app integrations

•

Asynchronous integration – Data entities also support asynchronous integration through a data management pipeline. This enables asynchronous and high-performing data insertion and

www.dynamicscompanions.com Dynamics Companions

- 279 -

DYNAMICS COMPANIONS CERTIFICATION EXAM STUDY GUIDE

EXAM MB-300: MICROSOFT DYNAMICS 365 UNIFIED OPERATIONS CORE

extraction scenarios. This method is used for interactive file-based import/export and recurring integrations. •

Business intelligence – By using the aggregate measures available in Finance and Operations, built-in controls such as charts and integration with Power Platform, Finance and Operations provides improved and capitative reports to offer insights to business data.

Data migration from legacy or external systems After the initial deployment is up and running, the system implementer will migrate existing data assets of the customer into Finance and Operations, such as: •

Master data (for example, customers and vendors)

•

Subsets of documents (for example, sales orders)

You can use the data management framework to copy configurations between companies or environments, and configure processes or modules by using Lifecycle Services (LCS). Copying configurations is intended to make it easier to start a new implementation, even if your team doesn't deeply understand the structure of data that needs to be entered, data dependencies, or which sequence to add data to an implementation. The data management framework allows you to: Move data between two similar systems. •

Discover entities and dependencies between entities for a given business process or module.

•

Maintain a reusable library of data templates and datasets.

•

Use data packages to create incremental data entities. Data entities can be sequenced inside the packages. You can name data packages, which can be easily identifiable during import or export. When building data packages, data entities can be mapped to staging tables in grids or by using a visual mapping tool. You can also drag-and-drop columns manually.

•

View data during imports, so you can compare data and ensure that it is valid.

Work with the Data management workspace Link: https://docs.microsoft.com/en-us/learn/modules/work-with-data-management-in-dynamics365-finance-ops/4-data-management-workspace This unit explains how to work with the Data management workspace in Finance and Operations. The Data management workspace provides access to important tasks for data management. It also provides information about projects and project execution tasks. After you've created a configuration data project, it appears in the Data projects grid in the Data management workspace.

www.dynamicscompanions.com Dynamics Companions

- 280 -

DYNAMICS COMPANIONS CERTIFICATION EXAM STUDY GUIDE

EXAM MB-300: MICROSOFT DYNAMICS 365 UNIFIED OPERATIONS CORE

For each project, the type of configuration (import or export) and the project category (Project, Configuration, Integration, or Other) are shown. Use the options to the left of the grid to filter by the appropriate project. The project definition is shared across legal entities

To open a project, select the project, and then select Load project to open the Import or Export page. Use the Delete button to delete the selected projects.

You can also download the project definitions by using the Download button. Use Job history to find more details about the projects that you've run. Use the data range filters to filter by the dates when data projects were run. You can view execution details by selecting a job and then using the Execution details menu.

www.dynamicscompanions.com Dynamics Companions

- 281 -

DYNAMICS COMPANIONS CERTIFICATION EXAM STUDY GUIDE

EXAM MB-300: MICROSOFT DYNAMICS 365 UNIFIED OPERATIONS CORE

For export tasks, you can also download the data from the workspace by using the Download page button. The available projects in the Data management workspace are as follows: •

Export

•

Import

•

Copy into legal entity

The All projects option is simply a filter to decide which type of project in the workspace to work with.

Sequencing Two types of sequencing should be considered when you are working with data entities. •

Sequencing data entities within a data package

•

Sequencing the order of data package imports

www.dynamicscompanions.com Dynamics Companions

- 282 -

DYNAMICS COMPANIONS CERTIFICATION EXAM STUDY GUIDE

EXAM MB-300: MICROSOFT DYNAMICS 365 UNIFIED OPERATIONS CORE

Sequence data entities within a data package 1.

When a user adds data entities to a data project, by default, a sequence is set for the order in which the entities will load. The first entity added to the project will be set as the first entity to load, the next entity added will be second, the next entity will be third, and so on.

For example, if a user added two entities in this order, Sales tax codes and Sales Tax groups, then Sales tax codes is assigned an entity sequence of 1.1.1, and Sales tax groups is assigned an entity sequence of 1.1.2. The sequence level indicates that the second entity will not start the import process until the first level is finished.

To view or edit a sequence, select the Entity sequence button on the Action Pane of the data project.

In the Definition group entity sequence, you can view the execution units and the sequence. You can change sequence by selecting the data entity in the list, setting a different Execution unit or Sequence in level, and then selecting Update selected. After selecting Update selected, the entity will move up or down in the entity list.

To continue with the example in step 2, to successfully import sales tax codes and groups, the sales tax codes and details have to be loaded before sales tax groups can be imported. Sales tax codes and groups are all in Execution unit = 1, but the sequences are in the order that they will be imported. Other related sales tax entities that are not dependent upon other data entities being loaded are included in the package. For example, the sales tax exempt numbers entity is set in its own Execution unit = 2. This data entity will start loading immediately because there are no dependencies on other entities loading before it.

www.dynamicscompanions.com Dynamics Companions

- 283 -

DYNAMICS COMPANIONS CERTIFICATION EXAM STUDY GUIDE

EXAM MB-300: MICROSOFT DYNAMICS 365 UNIFIED OPERATIONS CORE

Finance and Operations can determine the sequences of selected data entities in a project by selecting the Auto sequence button.

Sequence data package imports To successfully load data, it's important to set the correct order for importing data packages because of dependencies that exist within and across modules. The numbering format that has been created for the data packages within Lifecycle Services (LCS) are as follows: •

First segment: Module

•

Second segment: Data type (setup, master, transaction)

•

Third segment: Sequence number

When you are in a project, either as import or export, the Entity sequence button is only available in Standard view.

Mapping When you are working with data entities, mapping an entity to a source is automatic. The automatic mapping of fields can be overridden, if needed. To view how an entity is mapped, locate the tile for the entity in the project, and then select View map.

www.dynamicscompanions.com Dynamics Companions

- 284 -

DYNAMICS COMPANIONS CERTIFICATION EXAM STUDY GUIDE

EXAM MB-300: MICROSOFT DYNAMICS 365 UNIFIED OPERATIONS CORE

The Data management framework provides a mapping visualization view (default) and a mapping details view. A red asterisk (*) identifies any required fields in an entity. These fields must be mapped for you to be able to work with the entity. Other fields can be unmapped as required when you are working with the entity. â&#x20AC;˘

To unmap a field, highlight the field in either column (Entity or Source), select Delete selection, and then select Save. After the changes are saved, close the form to return to the project.

After import, you can also edit the field mapping from source to staging by using the same process.

www.dynamicscompanions.com Dynamics Companions

- 285 -

DYNAMICS COMPANIONS CERTIFICATION EXAM STUDY GUIDE

EXAM MB-300: MICROSOFT DYNAMICS 365 UNIFIED OPERATIONS CORE

Regenerate a map If you have extended an entity (added fields) or if the automatic mapping appears to be incorrect, the mapping of the entity can be regenerated in the Mapping page. 1.

To do this, select Generate source mapping. A message will display asking, "Do you want to generate the mapping from scratch?"

Select Yes to regenerate the mapping.

Generate data If you have fields in entities that you want the system to generate data for on import, instead of providing the data in the source file, you can use the auto-generated functionality in the mapping details for the entity. Please note that the following image shows the export project; therefore, the auto-generated mapping is not available because the Finance and Operations data entities are the source data of your project.

www.dynamicscompanions.com Dynamics Companions

- 286 -

DYNAMICS COMPANIONS CERTIFICATION EXAM STUDY GUIDE

EXAM MB-300: MICROSOFT DYNAMICS 365 UNIFIED OPERATIONS CORE

However, notice that in the import project, the data source is coming from other systems, such as those legacy applications. Finance and Operations uses the business logics of each data entity, discovers the dependencies, and sequences the data entities based on their relationships and dependencies. For example, if you want to import customers and customer address information, but the address information was not previously imported with the Global Address Book (GAB) entities, you can have the entity auto-generate the party number upon import and the GAB information will be created. To access this functionality, view the map of the entity, and then select the Mapping details tab. Select the fields that you want to auto-generate. This will change the source field to Auto.

www.dynamicscompanions.com Dynamics Companions

- 287 -

DYNAMICS COMPANIONS CERTIFICATION EXAM STUDY GUIDE

EXAM MB-300: MICROSOFT DYNAMICS 365 UNIFIED OPERATIONS CORE

Using Standard and Enhanced views for tiles Link: https://docs.microsoft.com/en-us/learn/modules/work-with-data-management-in-dynamics365-finance-ops/5-standard-enhanced-views-tiles Currently there are two views available to work with in data management projects, the Standard and Enhanced views. When you are in a project either as import or export, the Entity sequence button is only available in Standard view. Both views show all available tiles in the Data management framework. However, the Enhanced view gives more detailed information and control over the project than the Standard view. The following image shows the tiles that are available in the Standard view.

www.dynamicscompanions.com Dynamics Companions

- 288 -

DYNAMICS COMPANIONS CERTIFICATION EXAM STUDY GUIDE

www.dynamicscompanions.com Dynamics Companions

EXAM MB-300: MICROSOFT DYNAMICS 365 UNIFIED OPERATIONS CORE

- 289 -

DYNAMICS COMPANIONS CERTIFICATION EXAM STUDY GUIDE

EXAM MB-300: MICROSOFT DYNAMICS 365 UNIFIED OPERATIONS CORE

The following image shows the tiles that are available in the Enhanced view.

Prior to managing data import and export, you need to configure these tiles to successfully create, manage, and run the jobs to perform the data management activities.

www.dynamicscompanions.com Dynamics Companions

- 290 -

DYNAMICS COMPANIONS CERTIFICATION EXAM STUDY GUIDE

EXAM MB-300: MICROSOFT DYNAMICS 365 UNIFIED OPERATIONS CORE

Use templates in data management Link: https://docs.microsoft.com/en-us/learn/modules/work-with-data-management-in-dynamics365-finance-ops/6-templates-data-management Default templates are delivered together with each new release of Finance and Operations. Our long-term goal is to provide the templates in Lifecycle Services (LCS) so that you can push them to an instance of Finance and Operations. However, for the current releases, select the Templates tile in the Data management workspace, and then select Load default templates to load the templates. To see the Load default templates menu, you must use Enhanced view. We recommend using the Enhanced views to have more features and flexibility while working with your projects. After the templates are loaded, you can change them to suit your business requirements. If you ever want to retrieve the original default templates, you can use the Load default templates button to add them back to your system. The templates will then be replaced with the latest versions. If you've made changes to the templates, you can make a copy of the old templates by exporting them. Note that system administrator access is required to load default templates and import templates. This requirement helps guarantee that all entities are correctly loaded into the template. For the newly deployed environment of Finance and Operations, the default templates are not loaded. We recommend that you select the Load default templates button to view the default templates.

www.dynamicscompanions.com Dynamics Companions

- 291 -

DYNAMICS COMPANIONS CERTIFICATION EXAM STUDY GUIDE

EXAM MB-300: MICROSOFT DYNAMICS 365 UNIFIED OPERATIONS CORE

When the Load default templates dialog box appears, you can select single, multiple, or all templates to be loaded into your environment.

www.dynamicscompanions.com Dynamics Companions

- 292 -

DYNAMICS COMPANIONS CERTIFICATION EXAM STUDY GUIDE

www.dynamicscompanions.com Dynamics Companions

EXAM MB-300: MICROSOFT DYNAMICS 365 UNIFIED OPERATIONS CORE

- 293 -

DYNAMICS COMPANIONS CERTIFICATION EXAM STUDY GUIDE

EXAM MB-300: MICROSOFT DYNAMICS 365 UNIFIED OPERATIONS CORE

Levels 10 to 22 are reserved for shared system entities so that those entities are processed first. Almost all systems also use the company-specific general ledger entities. Therefore, level 25 is reserved for those entities. These levels represent the minimum basic setup that is required for most shared data in a configuration. After the basic setup is completed, many entities can be loaded in parallel across all the modules. These entities don't have to be loaded in silos by module. Instead, you can set up bands of dependencies between the data for different entities. Entities that have no dependencies are added to band 30 in this example. Band 40 is added for entities that have a dependency on the entities in band 30. The same process is continued for bands 50 to 90. After organizing the basic entities so that they can be processed in parallel, the remaining entities are organized by module, in the order that the modules should be processed in. However, many entities have many dependencies, some of which are complex. For example, the Vendor posting profiles entity might require Vendors or Items entities. Although the Vendor posting profiles entity is in the Accounts payable module, it must be processed after the Product management module. In that case, if Vendors entities are 1.130.10 and Items entities are 1.300.10, the Vendor posting profiles entity must be moved so that it's after that sequence (for example, 1.310.20). Note The sequences that we have implemented are a guideline, not a requirement. There is no required relationship between a level and a module. You can rearrange the entities if the sequence doesn't work for your implementation. To add your own templates to a configuration, you can follow the preceding guidelines to help guarantee that your template is correctly merged into a project that uses default templates.

Templates that have the same entity Some entities are required in more than one template. For example, you must have payment terms in both the Accounts payable and Accounts receivable templates. However, you might require only the Accounts receivable template. We added the entity to both templates for situations where you require only one of them. A data project can include only one instance of an entity. If you add a template, and the template contains an entity that already exists in a data project, the entity in that template replaces the entity that is currently in the project. You can use this capability to override the default templates without changing them. For example, the worker field hasn't been mapped in your data project, but you have your own template that adds workers. In this case, you can build a template that includes the entities that have the worker field. In that template, you can map the worker field. Any entities in the data project that don't have the field mapped will then be replaced.

www.dynamicscompanions.com Dynamics Companions

- 294 -

DYNAMICS COMPANIONS CERTIFICATION EXAM STUDY GUIDE

EXAM MB-300: MICROSOFT DYNAMICS 365 UNIFIED OPERATIONS CORE

Merged templates We have created larger templates that cover multiple module areas. You can use the larger templates, or any combination of smaller templates, to build a data project. The following combined templates are available: •

System and Shared – Include system setup, global address book, shared general ledger, and workflow.

•

Financials – Includes general ledger, bank, accounts payable, tax, accounts receivable, fixed assets, and budgeting.

•

Supply chain management – Includes inventory management, product management, procurement, sales and marketing, limited warehouse management, production control, and costing.

•

Expense and Project Management – These templates aren't included in a larger template. However, they are designed so that they can easily be merged into a project that uses other templates.

•

Workers – Includes the entities needed to add workers and re-map entities where the worker mapping was removed.

Master data Many default templates include entities for master data, such as customers, vendors, and released products. These entities are included to indicate the correct sequence of entities that you will require after you've loaded parameters and reference data. Master entities are most often sequenced in the module bands that are numbered 100 and above. In the grid, the entity category for these entities will be Master. If you don't want to include master data or any other entities in your configuration, remove those entities from your project.

Enable change tracking for entities Change tracking enables incremental export of data from Finance and Operations by using Data management. In an incremental export, only records that have changed are exported. To enable incremental export, you must enable change tracking on entities.

If you don't enable change tracking on an entity, you can only enable a full export each time. For bring your own database (BYOD) use cases, change tracking can also track deletes, if the entity supports this.

www.dynamicscompanions.com Dynamics Companions

- 295 -

DYNAMICS COMPANIONS CERTIFICATION EXAM STUDY GUIDE

EXAM MB-300: MICROSOFT DYNAMICS 365 UNIFIED OPERATIONS CORE

Export, import, and copy data into a legal entity Link: https://docs.microsoft.com/en-us/learn/modules/work-with-data-management-in-dynamics365-finance-ops/7-export-import-copy-data This unit explains how to copy data into a legal entity, and how to import and export data in Finance and Operations.

Data import and export jobs To create and manage data import and export jobs in Finance and Operations, you can use the Data management workspace. By default, the data import and export process creates a staging table for each entity in the target database. Staging tables let you verify, clean up, or convert data before you move it. The following are steps to import or export data. 1.

Create an import or export job, where you will complete the following tasks: •

Define the project category.

•

Identify the entities to import or export.

•

Set the data format for the job.

•

Sequence the entities so that they are processed in logical groups and in an order that makes sense.

•

Determine whether to use staging tables.

Validate that the source data and target data are mapped correctly.

Verify the security for your import or export job.

Run the import or export job.

Validate that the job ran as expected by reviewing the job history.

Clean up the staging tables.

Create an import or export job A data import or export job can be run one time or as many times as needed. We recommend that you take the time to select an appropriate project category for your import or export job. Project categories can help you manage related jobs. When you select an entity, you must select the format of the data that will be exported or imported. You can define formats by using the Data sources setup tile. A source data format is a combination of Type, File format, Row delimiter and Column delimiter. Entities can be sequenced in a data template or in import and export jobs. When you run a job that contains more than one data entity, you must make sure that they are correctly sequenced. Primarily, you sequence entities to address any functional dependencies among entities. If entities don’t have any functional dependencies, they can be scheduled for parallel import or export. www.dynamicscompanions.com Dynamics Companions

- 296 -

DYNAMICS COMPANIONS CERTIFICATION EXAM STUDY GUIDE

EXAM MB-300: MICROSOFT DYNAMICS 365 UNIFIED OPERATIONS CORE

Verify the security for your import or export job Access to the Data management workspace can be restricted so that non-administrator users can access only specific data jobs. Access to a data job implies full access to the run history of that job and access to the staging tables. Therefore, you need to make sure that appropriate access controls are in place when you create a data job. Use the Applicable roles menu to restrict the job to one or more security roles. Only users in those roles will have access to the job. You can also restrict a job to specific users. Securing a job by users instead of roles provides more control when multiple users are assigned to a role. A job can be secured by roles, users, and legal entity at the same time. Data jobs are global in nature. Therefore, if a data job was created and used in a legal entity, the job will be visible in other legal entities in the system. This default behavior might be preferred in some application scenarios. For example, an organization that imports invoices by using data entities might provide a centralized invoice processing team that is responsible for managing invoice errors for all divisions in the organization. In this scenario, it’s useful for the centralized invoice processing team to have access to invoice import jobs from all legal entities. Therefore, the default behavior meets the requirement from a legal entity perspective. However, an organization might want to have invoice processing teams for each legal entity. In this case, a team in a legal entity should have access only to the invoice import job in its own legal entity. To meet this requirement, you can configure legal entity–based access control on the data jobs by using the Applicable legal entities menu inside the data job. After the configuration is done, users can view only jobs that are available in the legal entity that they are currently signed in to. To view jobs from another legal entity, users must switch to that legal entity.

Clean up the staging tables You can clean up staging tables by using the Staging clean up feature in the Data management workspace. You can use the following options to select which records should be deleted from which staging table: •

Entity – If only an entity is provided, all records from that entity’s staging table are deleted. Select this option to clean up all the data for the entity across all data projects and all jobs.

•

Job ID – If only a job ID is provided, all records for all entities in the selected job are deleted from the appropriate staging tables.

•

Data projects – If only a data project is selected, all records for all entities and across all jobs for the selected data project are deleted.

www.dynamicscompanions.com Dynamics Companions

- 297 -

DYNAMICS COMPANIONS CERTIFICATION EXAM STUDY GUIDE

EXAM MB-300: MICROSOFT DYNAMICS 365 UNIFIED OPERATIONS CORE

Exercise â&#x20AC;&#x201C; Explore the Data management workspace Link: https://docs.microsoft.com/en-us/learn/modules/work-with-data-management-in-dynamics365-finance-ops/8-exercise-explore-data-management-workspace In this exercise, you will examine some of the features in the Data management workspace that have been discussed in this unit.

Before you begin To get the most benefit from this and other exercises in this module, we recommend that you have the standard sample data available in Finance and Operations that is installed by using Lifecycle Services (LCS). 1.

Go to All workspaces > Data management.

Select the Templates tile.

Refresh the page. Note if any templates are available.

Select the Load default templates button.

Select the Load all button.

In the list, find and select the desired record, such as 020 - GL Shared.

View available entities for General ledger shared data.

In the list, find and select the desired record, such as Supply chain management.

View available entities for General ledger shared data.

10. Expand the Template details section. 11. In the list, find and select the desired record, such as Barcode setup. 12. Select the Discover dependencies button. This shows all dependencies of the selected entity. 13. Close the Discover dependencies page. 14. Close the Templates page. 15. Select Data entities. View available entities in the Finance and Operations. 16. Select any of the entities of your choice, such as Accountants. 17. Select Entity structure to see the data source. Here, you can enable or disable running business logic in your project. For instance, for data migration, you might have modified the settings of certain configurations to meet customer requirements; however, the legacy data would violate the new rule, so you might need to make the decision to turn off the rule for historical data. 18. Select Target fields. View and edit the target fields, such as enabling or disabling the Table configuration key status. 19. Close the Target fields page. 20. Close the Entity structure page.

www.dynamicscompanions.com Dynamics Companions

- 298 -

DYNAMICS COMPANIONS CERTIFICATION EXAM STUDY GUIDE

EXAM MB-300: MICROSOFT DYNAMICS 365 UNIFIED OPERATIONS CORE

21. Select Entity model view. This allows you to have better visibility by grouping entities for each category and sub category of nodes representing Module, and also by grouping the entity models. 22. In the tree, expand All\AccountsPayable. 23. In the tree, select All\AccountsPayable\Transaction. 24. In the tree, expand All\GeneralLedger. 25. In the tree, select All\GeneralLedger\Document. 26. Close the Entity model view page. 27. Select Entity category view. 28. In the tree, expand All\Configuration. 29. In the tree, select All\Configuration\SystemAdministration. 30. In the tree, expand All\Reference. 31. In the tree, select All\Reference\AccountsReceivable. 32. Close the Entity category view page. 33. Select the Staging cleanup tile. 34. In the Entity field, enter or select a value, such as 1099 fields. 35. Select OK. 36. Select the Data task automation tile. 37. Select Load default tasks to open the drop dialog. 38. From the drop down, enter or select a value, such as MS_Sample. 39. Select Load. 40. Select Cancel. 41. Close the Data task automation page. 42. Select the Configure data source tile. Here, you can view, edit, and create data types such as CSV, Excel, and Package. 43. Close the page.

Exercise - Export and import data to Finance and Operations Link: https://docs.microsoft.com/en-us/learn/modules/work-with-data-management-in-dynamics365-finance-ops/9-exercise-export-import-data In this exercise, you will export some data and then import it to Finance and Operations. 1.

Go to All workspaces > Data management.

Select Export.

In the Name field, type Export Item groups. www.dynamicscompanions.com Dynamics Companions

- 299 -

DYNAMICS COMPANIONS CERTIFICATION EXAM STUDY GUIDE

EXAM MB-300: MICROSOFT DYNAMICS 365 UNIFIED OPERATIONS CORE

Select Add entity.

In Source data format, select Excel.

In the Target data format field, enter Excel.

In the Entity name field, enter Item groups.

Click Add.

Select Filter.

10. In the Criteria field, enter or select TV&Video. 11. Select OK. 12. Select Applicable legal entities. 13. Select New. 14. In the Data area field, enter or select USMF. 15. Select Save. 16. Close the page. 17. Select Export. 18. Select Close. 19. Refresh the page. 20. Close the page. 21. Close the Execution details page. 22. Close the Project page. 23. In the list, select the highlighted Export Item groups. 24. Select Download package. 25. Select Yes. 26. Close the page. 27. Go to Cost management > Inventory accounting policies setup > Item groups. 28. Select New. 29. In the Item group field, type Imported. 30. In the Name field, type Item group. 31. Select Save. 32. Close the page. 33. Go to All workspaces > Data management. 34. Select Import. 35. In the Name field, type Import Item groups. 36. In the Source data format field, enter or select Package. 37. Select Import.

www.dynamicscompanions.com Dynamics Companions

- 300 -

DYNAMICS COMPANIONS CERTIFICATION EXAM STUDY GUIDE

EXAM MB-300: MICROSOFT DYNAMICS 365 UNIFIED OPERATIONS CORE

38. Select Close. 39. Refresh the page.

Check your knowledge Link: https://docs.microsoft.com/en-us/learn/modules/work-with-data-management-in-dynamics365-finance-ops/10-work-data-management-quiz

Work with data management in Dynamics 365 for Finance and Operations knowledge check 1.

Which one of the following data management concepts contains a data project manifest and data files? a.

Data entities

b. Data project c. 2.

Data package

In which one of the following data management frameworks can you perform asynchronous integration by using data entities? a.

Data migration

b. Set up and copy configurations c. 3.

Integration

Which activity is performed using data entities? a.

Pushing data from source to central storage

b. Pushing data from central storage to staging c. 4.

Pushing data from staging to target

For the import or export operation, users need to configure the entities that are being imported, define the default processing options, and define the mapping definition. Where are these operations performed? a.

Data Projects

b. Data Jobs c.

Job History

d. Data Packages

www.dynamicscompanions.com Dynamics Companions

- 301 -

DYNAMICS COMPANIONS CERTIFICATION EXAM STUDY GUIDE

EXAM MB-300: MICROSOFT DYNAMICS 365 UNIFIED OPERATIONS CORE

Summary Link: https://docs.microsoft.com/en-us/learn/modules/work-with-data-management-in-dynamics365-finance-ops/11-work-data-management-summary In this module, you have learned about the basic concepts of the Data management platform in Finance and Operations, and examined integration scenarios that used data entities. Additionally, you were able to observe how easy it was to use data management functionality to perform complex tasks of data migration, such as import and export data. This module also showed you how to benefit from data import and export jobs, and then clean up the staging tables prior to each new project run as a best practice.

www.dynamicscompanions.com Dynamics Companions

- 302 -

DYNAMICS COMPANIONS CERTIFICATION EXAM STUDY GUIDE

EXAM MB-300: MICROSOFT DYNAMICS 365 UNIFIED OPERATIONS CORE

Module 3: Perform User Acceptance Testing In order to test and evaluate the customer solution prior to the go-live, you need to have an environment of Dynamics 365 for Finance and Operations, that has all the configurations, possible customization via extensions. It is always beneficial to have a methodology to ensure the creation and testing is organized and planned properly for a short, efficient, and role focused test case scenarios. Lessons •

Introduction

•

Create and perform test cases for User Acceptance

•

Practice Lab

•

Module summary

In this module you learned about: •

How to understand the correlation between test cases and business requirements

•

Best practices for recording test cases

•

Task recorder

•

How to create a Scenario Acceptance Testing BPM library

•

How to synchronize and configure your test plan in Azure DevOps

•

How to execute your tests

www.dynamicscompanions.com Dynamics Companions

- 303 -

DYNAMICS COMPANIONS CERTIFICATION EXAM STUDY GUIDE

EXAM MB-300: MICROSOFT DYNAMICS 365 UNIFIED OPERATIONS CORE

Perform user acceptance testing (UAT) in Dynamics 365 for Finance and Operations Link: https://docs.microsoft.com/en-us/learn/modules/perform-uat-in-dynamics-365-finance-ops/ After all the customer requirements have been addressed by either configuration, customization, and integration, you need to know how to perform user acceptance testing (UAT) in Dynamics 365 for Finance and Operations to validate the solution. This is an important step as part of the go-live preparation. In this module, you will learn about: •

Test cases and business requirements

•

Best practices for recording test cases

•

Task recorder

•

How to create a BPM library

•

How to synchronize and configure your test plan in Azure DevOps

•

How to execute your tests

Introduction Link: https://docs.microsoft.com/en-us/learn/modules/perform-uat-in-dynamics-365-financeops/01-perform-uat-introduction To test and evaluate the customer solution prior to the go-live, you need to have an environment of Dynamics 365 for Finance and Operations, which has all the configurations, and possible customizations via extensions. It is always beneficial to have a methodology to ensure the creation and testing is organized and planned properly for a short, efficient, and role focused test case scenarios. To validate the solution which may have been customized by extensions or identifying possible issues with functionality of Finance and Operations caused by wrong configuration, you need to create test cases, so they can be used by you as a functional consultant and end users to sign off the user acceptance documents. You can use the task recorder and business process modeler (BPM) to create user acceptance test libraries. The task recorder is a powerful tool to record test cases, and you organize them by business processes using BPM.

www.dynamicscompanions.com Dynamics Companions

- 304 -

DYNAMICS COMPANIONS CERTIFICATION EXAM STUDY GUIDE

EXAM MB-300: MICROSOFT DYNAMICS 365 UNIFIED OPERATIONS CORE

You can use BPM to distribute test libraries to your customers via Dynamics Lifecycle Services (LCS) and LCS solutions. You can also use BPM to author and distribute test libraries across different projects and teams. Because BPM can be synchronized with Azure DevOps (formerly known as Visual Studio Team Services), test cases are automatically created (including test steps) in your Azure DevOps project. Azure DevOps can then serve as your test configuration and test management tool where you can create targeted test plans and test suites, manage the execution of tests and investigate results.

Create user acceptance test libraries by using task recordings and BPM Link: https://docs.microsoft.com/en-us/learn/modules/perform-uat-in-dynamics-365-financeops/02-create-uat-libraries The business process modeler (BPM) is an LCS tool to describe a hierarchy of business processes and user tasks. LCS also allows Microsoft partners and customers to author and distribute BPM libraries across LCS projects via the Asset library.

Create a BPM library You can browse a BPM library that is a global library or a corporate library. However, before you can edit and work with a BPM library, it must be part of your project LCS. Libraries that are distributed by Microsoft appear under Global libraries, whereas libraries that are published by your organization appear under Corporate libraries. Note that BPM localization is not supported. If you edit in the BPM client in any language other than US English, your changes will only display when you view the BPM in the language in which the changes were made. To view any changes made in US English, you must synchronize with Visual Studio Team Server before the changes will display. There are several ways to create a BPM library. To create a library, you need to logon to LCS and select the Business process modeler tile, and then create a new library. The library can also be created by using the Microsoft Excel import functionality.

www.dynamicscompanions.com Dynamics Companions

- 305 -

DYNAMICS COMPANIONS CERTIFICATION EXAM STUDY GUIDE

EXAM MB-300: MICROSOFT DYNAMICS 365 UNIFIED OPERATIONS CORE

Record test cases and save to BPM Link: https://docs.microsoft.com/en-us/learn/modules/perform-uat-in-dynamics-365-financeops/03-record-test-cases-save-to-bpm After you have created a BPM library, you'll need to use the task recorder to create your test cases and then upload the cases to BPM. There are several ways to do this. If you're using a BPM library that already has all the necessary task recordings (test cases) attached, you can skip this step. Otherwise, follow the instructions below to create new task recordings.

www.dynamicscompanions.com Dynamics Companions

- 306 -

DYNAMICS COMPANIONS CERTIFICATION EXAM STUDY GUIDE

EXAM MB-300: MICROSOFT DYNAMICS 365 UNIFIED OPERATIONS CORE

To enable the effective execution of your tests using automation tools, make sure all your task recordings start on the main dashboard of Finance and Operations. For end-to-end processes that are performed by more than one user, we recommend that you divide your task recordings into user-specific tasks. This simplifies the maintenance of test cases and allows you to execute test cases in the context of security roles, which is a best practice.

Create and save a new task recording 1.

Go to Settings > Task recorder.

Click Create recording.

Enter a name for the recording, and then click Start.

www.dynamicscompanions.com Dynamics Companions

- 307 -

DYNAMICS COMPANIONS CERTIFICATION EXAM STUDY GUIDE

www.dynamicscompanions.com Dynamics Companions

EXAM MB-300: MICROSOFT DYNAMICS 365 UNIFIED OPERATIONS CORE

- 308 -

DYNAMICS COMPANIONS CERTIFICATION EXAM STUDY GUIDE

EXAM MB-300: MICROSOFT DYNAMICS 365 UNIFIED OPERATIONS CORE

When the recording is complete, in the Task recorder pane, click Stop.

To save the task recording to an attached BPM, click Save to Lifecycle Services.

Select the library that you want to save the recording to, and then click OK. This automatically saves the recording into Lifecycle services, if you already have a business library then identify that in System administration > Setup > System Parameters and Help tab.

If you also wish to save it on your computer, select Save to this PC. The extension of the recording file is AXTR.

Upload an AXTR file to BPM If you have saved your recordings (AXTR files) to your PC, follow these steps to upload them to BPM. 1.

In Lifecycle Services (LCS), in your project, on the Business process libraries page, select the library to upload the task recording to.

In the right pane, click Upload.

Click Browse to find and select the file to upload, and then click Upload.

Save an existing task recording to BPM 1.

To attach an existing task recording, sign into the client.

Go to Settings > Task recorder.

Select Edit Recording and attach the file by either saving directly to LCS or downloading the AXTR and then uploading to BPM.

www.dynamicscompanions.com Dynamics Companions

- 309 -

DYNAMICS COMPANIONS CERTIFICATION EXAM STUDY GUIDE

EXAM MB-300: MICROSOFT DYNAMICS 365 UNIFIED OPERATIONS CORE

Guidelines for recording test cases Follow these guidelines when authoring and recording your test cases, especially if you are planning to automate test execution. The process and tools described in this article apply to business process acceptance tests. They are not meant to replace component and unit testing that is typically owned by developers. •

Author a limited number of test cases that, when combined, cover complete end-to-end processes.

•

Focus on business processes that have been customized.

•

An individual test case (recording) should cover one or two business tasks only, typically executed by one person. This simplifies task recording maintenance. Do not combine a complete end-toend business process such as "Procure to Pay" or "Order to Cash" into one large task recording. o

•

A test case should have at least one validation. Try to validate critical fields that cover the impact of other fields. o

•

For example, instead of having RFQ > Purchase Order > Product Receipt > Vendor Invoice > Vendor Payment as one test case, divide the process into three or four test cases. You will have the opportunity to combine these tests into an ordered test suite later.

For example, validation of totals on sales or purchase orders cover the unit price/quantity/discount/tax.

Avoid printing a report in a test case. If a test case needs to print a report, it should be selected on screen.

www.dynamicscompanions.com Dynamics Companions

- 310 -

DYNAMICS COMPANIONS CERTIFICATION EXAM STUDY GUIDE

â&#x20AC;˘

EXAM MB-300: MICROSOFT DYNAMICS 365 UNIFIED OPERATIONS CORE

80+ % of test cases should be of transactions or source documents. Master data should be limited to up to 20% of test cases only.

Synchronize and configure your test plan in Azure DevOps Link: https://docs.microsoft.com/en-us/learn/modules/perform-uat-in-dynamics-365-financeops/04-synchronize-configure-test-plan An acceptance test library is your starting point. It typically contains all test cases (task recordings) of an application organized by business processes. During a test pass, you usually do not need to run all test cases. The test cases you select depends on the phase of your implementation or the nature of the update you are planning to apply to your production environment. Azure DevOps enables you to organize your test cases in test plans and test suites. A test plan contains one or more test suites (a subset of your test library). Test cases can belong to more than one test suite. When you have selected your acceptance testing BPM library, synchronize it with Azure DevOps and create your test plan and test suites.

Sync with Azure DevOps Synchronize your BPM library with your Azure DevOps project. For more information, refer to Synchronize BPM libraries with Azure DevOps . After configuration is complete, synchronize the BPM library with an Azure DevOps project. 1.

On the Business process libraries page, on the tile for the library that you want to synchronize, select the ellipsis button (...), and then select Azure DevOps sync. You can also start Azure DevOps synchronization from the toolbar in a BPM library. Select the ellipsis button (...), and then select Azure DevOps sync.

After Azure DevOps synchronization is complete, select the ellipsis button (...), and then select Sync test cases. When this step is complete, your task recordings will become test cases in Azure DevOps and a link will appear under the Requirements tab.

In addition to the test steps, the task recording XML file is attached to the Azure DevOps test case. This file will be needed if you want to automate test execution.

Run your tests Link: https://docs.microsoft.com/en-us/learn/modules/perform-uat-in-dynamics-365-financeops/05-run-your-tests

www.dynamicscompanions.com Dynamics Companions

- 311 -

DYNAMICS COMPANIONS CERTIFICATION EXAM STUDY GUIDE

EXAM MB-300: MICROSOFT DYNAMICS 365 UNIFIED OPERATIONS CORE

To run your tests you will need to create a test plan and test suite in Azure DevOps. This will allow you to run an ordered suite of test cases and easily manage, investigate, and track the results. 1.

Sign into Azure DevOps and select the project and test plan that you want to test in.

On the toolbar, select Test >Test Plans.

In the left pane, select +, and then select Static suite.

Enter a name for the suite.

Click Add existing and query the tag LCS:Test Cases.

Click Run > Add test cases.

Select the test case to view details and the attached XML file.

You should create various test suites under the same test plan and then use custom queries to add specific test cases to a test suite. A test case can belong to more than one test suite.

Run manual test cases When you have a test suite, you are ready to use it for regression testing after updates have been made to your Finance and Operations application in a sandbox or test environment. You can run the test cases in your test suite manually or play the task recordings that are part of the test suite and use Azure DevOps to mark the test cases as passed or failed.

Azure DevOps also provides a tool namedTest Runner, to manage manual test case execution. For more information about using Test Runner, see Run manual tests . We recommend that you take advantage of Azure DevOps as it provides a rich set of management features not only for testing but for result management and mitigation.

www.dynamicscompanions.com Dynamics Companions

- 312 -

DYNAMICS COMPANIONS CERTIFICATION EXAM STUDY GUIDE

EXAM MB-300: MICROSOFT DYNAMICS 365 UNIFIED OPERATIONS CORE

Run automated test cases The Dynamics 365 Unified Operations platform provides developers with tools to author test cases based on task recordings and use Azure DevOps to manage the automated execution of these test cases. Developers can use the build and test automation capabilities of build and test environments. For more information, see the Continuous delivery home page . Functional power users can automate the execution of their test cases using the Regression Suite Automation Tool. Download the tool and user manual from Dynamics 365 for Finance and Operations, Regression Suite Automation Tool.

Investigate test runs When an automated run is complete, on the Azure DevOps toolbar, select Test > Runs (or Test Plans > Runs) to investigate your test run. Select the desired test run to investigate test case failures and errors. You can also go to your test suite in Azure DevOps to see the latest results associated with your test cases. For more information on testing and test management in Azure DevOps, see the Azure DevOps Documentation .

Data task automation Link: https://docs.microsoft.com/en-us/learn/modules/perform-uat-in-dynamics-365-financeops/06-data-task-automation Data task automation in Finance and Operations lets you repeat many types of data tasks and validate the outcome of each task. Data task automation is useful for projects that are in the implementation phase. For example, you can automate the creation and configuration of data projects. You can also configure and trigger the execution of import/export operations, such as the setup of demo data and golden configuration data, and other tasks that are related to data migration. You can also create automated testing of data entities by using task outcome validation. We recommend the following approach for data task automation: 1.

Identify the data-related tasks that will benefit from automation - We recommend that implementation teams review their configuration management plan and data migration plan to identify potential data tasks for automation, and also to identify data entity test cases.

Define tasks - Tasks are defined in an XML manifest. You can keep your manifest under source control as part of configuration management in your application lifecycle management (ALM) strategy.

www.dynamicscompanions.com Dynamics Companions

- 313 -

DYNAMICS COMPANIONS CERTIFICATION EXAM STUDY GUIDE

EXAM MB-300: MICROSOFT DYNAMICS 365 UNIFIED OPERATIONS CORE

Put the data packages that are related to data task automation in the Shared asset library of LCS - You can also use a specific LCS project as you require. Data task automation manager can consume packages from any sandbox and/or production environment that is related to the LCS project. Note: The user account that runs Data task automation manager in Finance and Operations must have access to LCS and to the LCS project that is referenced in the manifest for data packages.

Although data task automation can be run in any environment in the cloud, we recommend that you not run any import/export tasks that use integration application programming interfaces (APIs) in a production environment. Data task automation that involves integration APIs should be used only for automated testing.

Run the data tasks, and then review the outcomes - Data task automation manager provides the success or failure outcome for each task. It also provides insights into the reason why a task failed.

For more information refer to Data task automation .

Exercise - Build test scripts to test business functionality Link: https://docs.microsoft.com/en-us/learn/modules/perform-uat-in-dynamics-365-financeops/07-exercise-build-test-scripts After you have created a BPM library, you'll need to use Task recorder to create your test cases and then upload the cases to BPM. Next, you will need to create a test plan and test suite in Azure DevOps. This will allow you to execute an ordered suite of test cases and easily manage, investigate, and track the results.

Create a BPM library 1.

In LCS, on the Business process libraries page, select New library.

Enter a name for the new library, and then select Create.

Copy a library 1.

Open the Business process libraries page.

On the tile for the library that you want to copy, select the ellipsis button (...), and then select Copy.

Enter a name for the library, and then click Create.

www.dynamicscompanions.com Dynamics Companions

- 314 -

DYNAMICS COMPANIONS CERTIFICATION EXAM STUDY GUIDE

EXAM MB-300: MICROSOFT DYNAMICS 365 UNIFIED OPERATIONS CORE

Import a section of another library 1.

Open the Business process libraries page, and then open the library you want to edit.

Go to the line you would like to import to and select Import.

Select As child or As sibling.

In the pane, choose the library you would like to import from and click Import.

Add a new process 1.

In the BPM library, select an existing process.

Select Add process. You can select to add the process as a child or a sibling of the selected process node. In this way, you can create a semantic hierarchy of business processes.

Edit the properties of a process 1.

In the BPM library, select the process node to edit.

In the right pane, on the Overview tab, click Edit mode.

Enter a name and description for the process node.

Select the industries and the countries or regions that the process applies to. You can also add keywords and links. Keywords let you define categories, work streams, or other metadata. Links (URLs) let you reference external sites or documentation.

When you've finished editing the properties, click Save.

Move a process 1.

Select the process node to move, and then click Move process. You can select to move the process up or down, or you can select Move to see more options.

If you selected Move, you can browse the hierarchy, select a node to move the process to, and then select Move as child or Move as sibling. To cancel the move operation, click Cancel.

Browse a BPM library 1.

On the Business process libraries page, double-click the tile for the library that you want to browse

In the BPM library, select a process to view its sub steps.

Use the buttons on the toolbar to add, delete, or import processes as a child or a sibling. You can also select Collapse all to view only parent processes.

www.dynamicscompanions.com Dynamics Companions

- 315 -

DYNAMICS COMPANIONS CERTIFICATION EXAM STUDY GUIDE

EXAM MB-300: MICROSOFT DYNAMICS 365 UNIFIED OPERATIONS CORE

Record test cases and save to BPM 1.

Open the Finance and Operations client and sign in.

Select the company that you want to use while recording.

Go to Settings > Task recorder.

Click Create a new recording.

Enter a name for the recording, and then click Start. Recording begins the moment that you click Start.

When the recording is complete, in the Task recorder pane, click Stop.

To save the task recording to an attached BPM, click Save to Lifecycle Services.

Select the library that you want to save the recording to, and then click Save.

Select Save to this PC.

10. In LCS, in your project, on the Business process libraries page, select the library to upload the task recording to. 11. Locate and select the process to upload the task recording to. 12. In the right pane, click Upload. 13. Click Browse to find and select the file to upload, and then click Upload.

Save an existing task recording to BPM 1.

Open the Finance and Operations client and sign in.

Select the company that you want to use while recording.

Go to Settings > Task recorder.

Select Edit Recording and attach the file by either saving directly to LCS or downloading the AXTR and then uploading to BPM.

www.dynamicscompanions.com Dynamics Companions

- 316 -

DYNAMICS COMPANIONS CERTIFICATION EXAM STUDY GUIDE

EXAM MB-300: MICROSOFT DYNAMICS 365 UNIFIED OPERATIONS CORE

Sync with Azure DevOps 1.

On the Business process libraries page, on the tile for the library that you want to synchronize, select the ellipsis button (...), and then select Azure DevOps sync.

You can also start Azure DevOps synchronization from the toolbar in a BPM library. Select the ellipsis button (...), and then select Azure DevOps sync.

After Azure DevOps synchronization is complete, select the ellipsis button (...), and then select Sync test cases.

When this step is complete, your task recordings will become test cases in Azure DevOps and a link will appear under the Requirements tab.

In addition to the test steps, the task recording XML file is attached to the Azure DevOps test case. This file will be needed if you want to automate test execution.

Create a test suite in Azure DevOps 1.

On the toolbar, select Test > Test Plans.

In the left pane, select +, and then select Static suite.

Enter a name for the suite.

Click Add existing and query the tag LCS:Test Cases.

Click Run > Add test cases.

Select the test case to view details and the attached XML file.

Check your knowledge Link: https://docs.microsoft.com/en-us/learn/modules/perform-uat-in-dynamics-365-financeops/08-perform-uat-quiz

Perform user acceptance testing (UAT) in Dynamics 365 for Finance and Operations knowledge check 1.

Manage and distribute BPM libraries is part of which phase of the user acceptance tests processes in Finance and Operations? a.

Create user acceptance test library

b. Synchronize and configure your test cases in AzureDevOps c.

Run your tests

www.dynamicscompanions.com Dynamics Companions

- 317 -

DYNAMICS COMPANIONS CERTIFICATION EXAM STUDY GUIDE

EXAM MB-300: MICROSOFT DYNAMICS 365 UNIFIED OPERATIONS CORE

Which one of the following considerations is part of the guidelines for recording test cases in Finance and Operations when creating an individual test case (recording)? a.

An individual test case (recording) should cover one or two business tasks only, typically performed by one person.

b. An individual test case (recording) should cover all business tasks, typically performed by one person. c.

An individual test case (recording) should cover all business tasks, typically performed by multiple roles and different personnel.

Which one of the following considerations is as part of the guidelines for recording test cases in Finance and Operations when creating individual test cases and working with transactions and source documents? a.

80+% of test cases should be with transactions or source documents. Master data should be limited to up to 20% of test cases.

b. 80+% of test cases should be Master data. 20% of test cases should be from transactions or source documents. c. 4.

100+% of test cases should be from transactions or source documents.

When running data task automation, which one of the following access control rights must a user have? a.

Access to LCS and to the LCS project that is referenced in the manifest for data packages.

b. Access to the LCS project. c.

Access to LCS data packages and asset libraries.

Summary Link: https://docs.microsoft.com/en-us/learn/modules/perform-uat-in-dynamics-365-financeops/09-perform-uat-summary In this module you learned how to build test cases to test business functionality without the need for development skills. The main purpose of user acceptance testing (UAT) is to verify that specific business scenarios work as you expect. The goal is to catch anything that doesn't work correctly before you go to the production environment without a need of a developer to code.

www.dynamicscompanions.com Dynamics Companions

- 318 -

DYNAMICS COMPANIONS CERTIFICATION EXAM STUDY GUIDE

EXAM MB-300: MICROSOFT DYNAMICS 365 UNIFIED OPERATIONS CORE

Module 4: Prepare to Go Live All your hard work becomes a success by moving the implemented solution in Dynamics 365 for Finance and Operations to the production environment. This is a crucial and final stage of your exciting experience of completing an implementation. You want a happy customer, a quality solution, and peace of mind during this important phase, which is known as go live. You cannot guarantee your success without knowing how to prepare for Finance and Operations go live and the final stage of implementation. Lessons •

Introduction

•

Get ready to go live

•

Module summary

In this module, you will have learned how to: •

Prepare for go live.

•

Complete the Lifecycle Services (LCS) methodology.

•

Perform User acceptance testing (UAT) for your solution.

•

Understand the FastTrack Go-live assessment.

•

Request the production environment.

www.dynamicscompanions.com Dynamics Companions

- 319 -

DYNAMICS COMPANIONS CERTIFICATION EXAM STUDY GUIDE

EXAM MB-300: MICROSOFT DYNAMICS 365 UNIFIED OPERATIONS CORE

Prepare to go-live with Dynamics 365 for Finance and Operations Link: https://docs.microsoft.com/en-us/learn/modules/prepare-go-live-in-dynamics-365-financeops/ All your hard work becomes a success by moving the implemented solution in Dynamics 365 for Finance and Operations to the production environment. You want a happy customer, a quality solution, and peace of mind during this important phase, which is known as go live. Learn how to prepare to go live with a Finance and Operations project by using Microsoft Dynamics Lifecycle Services (LCS). In this module, you will learn how to: •

Prepare for go live

•

Complete the Lifecycle Services (LCS) methodology

•

Perform User acceptance testing (UAT) for your solution

•

Understand the FastTrack Go-live assessment

•

Request the production environment

Introduction Link: https://docs.microsoft.com/en-us/learn/modules/prepare-go-live-in-dynamics-365-financeops/1-prepare-go-live-introduction All your hard work becomes a success by moving the implemented solution in Dynamics 365 for Finance and Operations to the production environment. This is a crucial and final stage of your exciting experience of completing an implementation. You want a happy customer, a quality solution, and peace of mind during this important phase, which is known as go live. You cannot guarantee your success without knowing how to prepare for Finance and Operations go live and the final stage of implementation. In this module, you will learn how to: •

Prepare for go live.

•

Complete the Lifecycle Services (LCS) methodology.

•

Perform User acceptance testing (UAT) for your solution.

•

Understand the FastTrack Go-live assessment.

www.dynamicscompanions.com Dynamics Companions

- 320 -

DYNAMICS COMPANIONS CERTIFICATION EXAM STUDY GUIDE

•

EXAM MB-300: MICROSOFT DYNAMICS 365 UNIFIED OPERATIONS CORE

Request the production environment.

Understand the go-live process Link: https://docs.microsoft.com/en-us/learn/modules/prepare-go-live-in-dynamics-365-financeops/2-understand-go-live-process The go-live process is shown in the following image.

The go-live process consists of the following actions, which should be considered as sequential steps in a checklist: 1.

Update go-live date in LCS: Throughout project implementation, make sure that the milestone dates are continuously kept up-to-date. You need to start this step, at the latest, two to three months prior to go live. You need to closely engage with customer key stake holders during this period in case anything unusual happens

Complete and send Pre go-live checklist: You can perform this task after all User Acceptance Tests (UATs) are completed and signed off by key stakeholders. All Finance and Operations customers must complete a go-live assessment with the Microsoft FastTrack team before their production environment can be deployed. This assessment should be successfully completed before you request your production environment. If you aren't familiar with Microsoft FastTrack, refer to Microsoft FastTrack for Dynamics 365 overview . You can also download the checklist from Installation ＆ Setup Guides page .

Project assessment (Fast Track Essentials): The architect will deliver the assessment after the checklist is received and will then continue reviewing until questions are clarified and mitigations are in place, if applicable. It should take a few days for the initial report, plus additional time for mitigation, if required. This task is a responsibility of a FastTrack Architect. Project workshop (FastTrack): A FastTrack Architect uses a project workshop to coordinate activities for assessment.

www.dynamicscompanions.com Dynamics Companions

- 321 -

DYNAMICS COMPANIONS CERTIFICATION EXAM STUDY GUIDE

EXAM MB-300: MICROSOFT DYNAMICS 365 UNIFIED OPERATIONS CORE

Release for production deployment: If the production deployment request has already been submitted, deployment will start. However, we request that you only submit the production request after the assessment has successfully completed. You should perform this task upon a successfully completed assessment.

Request production deployment: This is a self-service task and the responsibility of your customer, though it can be done with your help. The customer should request the production deployment and submit it to Microsoft only after the FastTrack Architect has finished the assessment. As an earlier part of this step, the sizing team should have informed the customer about the topology needed in a pricing option. Automatic sizing is based on a subscription estimate by default, while manual sizing is based on exception. In the case of automatic sizing, the timing for sizing is immediate, but it could take longer if it requires further clarification of the subscription estimate. Finally, the Dynamics Service Engineering (DSE) team performs the deployment, which can take up to 48 hours to complete. The Status field in LCS reflects the deployment progress. Any questions that you might have about your request will be posted as comments on the service request.

Submit deployable package installation request: Your customer should be aware that applying packages causes system downtime. All relevant services will be stopped, and they won't be able to use the environments while the package is being applied. You should plan accordingly and perhaps perform this task during off hours. For package installation, depending on number of packages, it could take a minimum of five hours lead time and four hours downtime for each package. Generally, 95 percent of the updates are applied in less than one hour; however, we still recommend that you provide a downtime window of four hours in case a rollback is required for any reason. When the package deployment succeeds, the environment will be available as soon as the package deployment has finished, which means that the longer downtime window does not have any negative effect on system availability.

Submit request to copy database from sandbox (if applicable): You need to follow the instructions exactly as they are documented in Refresh database . Also, you need to request copy database to restore it to the sandbox environment. Once requested, Dynamics Service Engineering (DSE) will copy the production database and make it available in the LCS projectâ&#x20AC;&#x2122;s asset library. Note that it might need five hours lead time and result in two hours downtime. Generally, the database copy is completed in less than one hour. We still recommend that you provide a downtime window of two hours in case a rollback is required for any reason.

Production ready: In this task, you and your customer can take control of the production environment after all previous steps have been completed. Depending on the project, some cutover activities might need to be performed.

www.dynamicscompanions.com Dynamics Companions

- 322 -

DYNAMICS COMPANIONS CERTIFICATION EXAM STUDY GUIDE

EXAM MB-300: MICROSOFT DYNAMICS 365 UNIFIED OPERATIONS CORE

Go live: Depending on the project, the customer can go live with Finance and Operations, which is hosted in the production environment.

Complete the LCS methodology Link: https://docs.microsoft.com/en-us/learn/modules/prepare-go-live-in-dynamics-365-financeops/3-complete-lcs-methodology After you have prepared to go live, it is time to take Finance and Operations to the production environment. Completing the LCS methodology is a major milestone in each implementation project, and it is the cutover to the production environment. To help ensure that the production environment is used for live operations, Microsoft will provision the production instance only when the implementation is approaching the Operate phase, after the required activities in the LCS methodology are completed. For more information about the environments in your subscription, refer to the Licensing guide . Customers must complete the Analysis, Design and develop, and Test phases in the LCS methodology before the Configure button that is used to request the production environment becomes available. To complete a phase in LCS, you first need to complete every required step in that phase. When all steps in a phase are completed, you can complete the whole phase. You can always reopen a phase later if you need to make changes. If you require more help, refer to Lifecycle Services for Finance and Operations customers . The process of completing a step has two parts: 1.

Performing the actual work, such as a fit-gap analysis or user acceptance testing (UAT).

Selecting the corresponding step in the LCS methodology as completed.

It's good practice to complete the steps in the methodology as you make progress with the implementation. Avoid waiting until the last minute. Be thorough, rather than simply clicking through all the steps to quickly get a production environment. It's in the customer's best interest to have a solid implementation.

Perform user acceptance testing (UAT) for your solution Link: https://docs.microsoft.com/en-us/learn/modules/prepare-go-live-in-dynamics-365-financeops/4-perform-user-acceptance-testing During the UAT phase, you need to test all the business processes that you've implemented, and any customizations that you've made, in a sandbox, or standard acceptance test environment, in the

www.dynamicscompanions.com Dynamics Companions

- 323 -

DYNAMICS COMPANIONS CERTIFICATION EXAM STUDY GUIDE

EXAM MB-300: MICROSOFT DYNAMICS 365 UNIFIED OPERATIONS CORE

implementation project. To help ensure a successful go live, you should consider the following as you complete the UAT phase: •

Test that cases cover the entire scope of requirements.

•

Test by using migrated data. This data should include master data and opening balances, even if they aren't yet final.

•

Test by using the correct security roles (default roles and custom roles) that are assigned to users.

•

Make sure that the solution complies with any company-specific and industry-specific regulatory requirements.

•

Document all features and obtain approval and sign-off from the customer.

Regardless of whether the instance of Finance and Operations used for testing is a cloud-hosted environment or a downloaded virtual hard disk (VHD), testing cannot be considered complete because it might have also been used by a developer or other user for demo and training. The following are the reasons why testing cannot be considered complete: •

The topology of the Tier-1 environments differs from the topology of your production environment. It's important that you test all functionality on a Tier-2 or higher sandbox environment in the Microsoft-managed subscription. It's especially important that you test integrations, printing functionality, workflow functionality, and warehouse and retail devices in the sandbox environment.

•

System performance can't be measured when you do the UAT on local virtual machines (VMs) or VMs that are privately hosted.

•

To prevent delays during the cutover process, it's important that the team experience the servicing in LCS during implementation. This servicing includes the processes of applying deployable packages, creating service requests, and moving databases between environments.

FastTrack go-live assessment Link: https://docs.microsoft.com/en-us/learn/modules/prepare-go-live-in-dynamics-365-financeops/5-fasttrack-go-live-assessment Microsoft FastTrack for Microsoft Dynamics 365 for Finance and Operations is a customer success service that is designed to help you move smoothly and confidently to Finance and Operations so that you can realize business value faster. When participating in the FastTrack program, you receive guidance about implementation best practices, planning for successful rollouts, and expanding capabilities. However, you can implement at your own pace. You also have access to Microsoft engineering resources who are committed to making your experience with Finance and Operations a success. All Finance and Operations customers need to complete a go-live review with the Microsoft FastTrack team before their production environment can be deployed. This assessment should be successfully

www.dynamicscompanions.com Dynamics Companions

- 324 -

DYNAMICS COMPANIONS CERTIFICATION EXAM STUDY GUIDE

EXAM MB-300: MICROSOFT DYNAMICS 365 UNIFIED OPERATIONS CORE

completed before you request your Production environment. If you aren't familiar with Microsoft FastTrack, go to Microsoft FastTrack for Finance and Operations . About eight weeks before go live, the FastTrack team will ask you to fill in a go-live checklist: •

If you have 150 or more seats, and a Microsoft solution architect is assigned to your project, the solution architect will contact you.

•

If you have 20–149 seats, the checklist will be sent to you via email.

You can also download the FastTrack pre-go-live checklist from Installation & Setup Guides . The project manager or a key project member needs to complete the go-live checklist during the pre-golive phase of the project. Typically, the checklist is completed four to six weeks before the proposed golive date, when UAT is completed or almost completed. After the checklist is submitted, a Microsoft solution architect will review the project and provide an assessment that describes the potential risks, best practices, and recommendations for a successful go live of the project. In some cases, the solution architect might highlight risk factors and ask for a mitigation plan. When the assessment is completed, the solution architect will indicate that you're ready to request the production environment in LCS. If you request the production environment before the assessment is completed, the deployment will remain in the Queued state until the assessment is successfully completed. You can cancel an environment deployment request while it is in a Queued state by following these steps: 1.

Click Queued.

On the Customer sign-off tab, click Clear sign-off.

This will set the environment back into a state of Configure and allow you to make changes to the configuration, such as selecting a different data center or environment topology.

Request the production environment Link: https://docs.microsoft.com/en-us/learn/modules/prepare-go-live-in-dynamics-365-financeops/6-request-production-environment After you've completed the analysis, design and develop, and test phases in the LCS methodology, and the go-live assessment has concluded that the project is ready, you can request your production environment. We recommend that you select a service account, for example a generic user account, as the Admin user of the environments that you deploy. If you use a named user account, you might not be able to access an environment if that user isn't available. The following are scenarios where the Admin user needs to access an environment:

www.dynamicscompanions.com Dynamics Companions

- 325 -

DYNAMICS COMPANIONS CERTIFICATION EXAM STUDY GUIDE

EXAM MB-300: MICROSOFT DYNAMICS 365 UNIFIED OPERATIONS CORE

•

First sign-in to any environment after initial deployment – In this case, the Admin user is the only user who can access the environment.

•

First sign-in to a sandbox environment after a database refresh from the production environment – In this case, all user accounts except the Admin account are unable to sign in.

Your production environment should be deployed to the same datacenter where your sandbox environments are deployed. After you've signed off on the request for the production environment, Microsoft is responsible for deploying the production environment for you. The Microsoft service level agreement (SLA) for deployment of a production environment is 48 hours. The production environment can be deployed at any time within 48 hours after you submit the request, provided that your usage profile doesn't require additional information. You can view the progress of the deployment in LCS. Typically, the status of the production environment request remains Queued for a few hours before it's changed to Deploying. When you submit the deployment request, a service request for the Microsoft Dynamics Service Engineering (DSE) team is automatically created. You can view this service request in the Service requests list in LCS. If the DSE team has questions that prevent them from deploying the production environment, they will add a comment to the service request. For example, the DSE team might ask that you update the subscription estimate or change the datacenter. In some cases, you might have to clear the sign-off from the production deployment request to make changes. You can clear the sign-off only while the status of the production environment request is Queued. To clear the sign-off, click the Queued button. The status of the request is returned to Configure. You can then make any changes that are required and sign off again.

Check your knowledge Link: https://docs.microsoft.com/en-us/learn/modules/prepare-go-live-in-dynamics-365-financeops/7-prepare-go-live-quiz

Prepare to go-live with Dynamics 365 for Finance and Operations knowledge check 1.

Your customer is ready to go live and request to deploy the production environment. What must be done first? a.

You must deploy a new environment and call it production.

b. Contact Dynamics Service Engineering (DSE). c.

Complete a go-live review with the Microsoft FastTrack team.

www.dynamicscompanions.com Dynamics Companions

- 326 -

DYNAMICS COMPANIONS CERTIFICATION EXAM STUDY GUIDE

EXAM MB-300: MICROSOFT DYNAMICS 365 UNIFIED OPERATIONS CORE

Your customer is ready to go live and request to deploy the production environment by contacting the Microsoft FastTrack team. What happens next? a.

Your production environment is deployed by the Microsoft FastTrack team.

b. Your production environment is deployed by Dynamics Service Engineering (DSE). c. 3.

The Microsoft FastTrack team reviews the project and provides an assessment.

Your customer requests a copy database to be restored to a sandbox environment. Who is responsible for this process? a.

SQL Server administrator

b. Microsoft FastTrack team c.

Dynamics Service Engineering (DSE)

Summary Link: https://docs.microsoft.com/en-us/learn/modules/prepare-go-live-in-dynamics-365-financeops/8-prepare-go-live-summary You have now learned how to prepare for a successful go live by completing the LCS methodology and making sure that the customer has performed and signed off on all user acceptance tests. •

You also learned about the FastTrack go-live assessment and how to assist the customer to request the production environment.

www.dynamicscompanions.com Dynamics Companions

- 327 -

DYNAMICS COMPANIONS CERTIFICATION EXAM STUDY GUIDE

EXAM MB-300: MICROSOFT DYNAMICS 365 UNIFIED OPERATIONS CORE

Index ABC Models Revenue ........................................................................................... 97 Value ............................................................................................... 157 Accounting currency ....................................................................... 160 Accounts payable 19, 24, 66, 105, 129, 154, 159, 161, 278, 294 Accounts receivable19, 105, 129, 154, 159, 161, 189, 190, 233, 235, 294 Attributes .............................................................................................. 89 Basic budgeting .................................................................................. 89 Batch number .................................................................................... 210 Budget .......................................................................... 89, 92, 130, 166 Budget control .................................................................................... 89 Budget register entry ...................................................................... 130 Budgeting ............................................................................. 19, 89, 130 Calendars ............................................................................................ 169 Cash and bank management ....................................... 19, 130, 159 Chart of accounts ............................................................................... 89 Checks .................................................................................................... 85 Collections agent................................................................................ 19 Color ..................................................................................................... 215 Compose working times ................................................................ 169 Configuration........................................................... 34, 279, 281, 299 Cost accounting .................................................................. 19, 96, 106 Cost control............................................................................... 120, 123 Cost management..................................................................... 19, 300 Credit ...................................................................................... 19, 96, 106 Credit and collections ....................................................... 19, 96, 106 Currency .............................................................................. 89, 100, 163 Customer account ............................................................................ 105 Customer account statement ....................................................... 105 Customer bank remittance............................................................ 130 Customers....19, 85, 90, 105, 121, 122, 129, 130, 133, 149, 155, 233, 235, 241, 246, 247, 248, 249, 250, 323, 325 Data management .... 8, 123, 256, 258, 261, 264, 266, 268, 271, 272, 273, 274, 275, 276, 279, 280, 282, 285, 288, 291, 295, 296, 297, 298, 299, 300, 302 Display dimension ............................................................................ 210 Electronic Reporting (ER) ................................................. 81, 86, 106 Financial reports ....................................... 57, 92, 99, 100, 102, 104 Fiscal calendars ....................................................... 89, 155, 160, 168 Fixed asset group ............................................................................. 216 Fixed assets ........................................................................ 19, 216, 217 General ledger 19, 89, 92, 93, 99, 100, 102, 104, 126, 128, 278, 298 Health..................................................................................................... 59 Human resource (HR)...................................................................... 131 Inventory management ..............................................................17, 23 Inventory on-hand ........................................................................... 120 Item groups............................................................................... 299, 300 Jobs ....................................................................................................... 301 Levels.................................................................................................... 294 Lifecycle Services (LCS) ....3, 8, 10, 12, 26, 27, 28, 29, 30, 32, 33, 34, 35, 36, 37, 38, 40, 42, 46, 47, 48, 49, 50, 51, 53, 55, 56,

www.dynamicscompanions.com Dynamics Companions

- 328 -

57, 58, 59, 60, 62, 63, 65, 66, 67, 69, 70, 71, 72, 73, 74, 75, 76, 77, 83, 95, 98, 121, 147, 170, 215, 246, 276, 280, 284, 291, 298, 305, 309, 312, 314, 316, 317, 318, 319, 320, 321, 322, 323, 324, 325, 326, 327 Localization ........................................................................................ 162 Location ............................................................................................... 158 Main accounts ..................................................................... 87, 91, 160 Master plan ....................................................................................22, 23 Master planning............................................................................22, 23 Period types Opening ......................................................................................... 196 Operating .............................. 155, 157, 159, 160, 162, 163, 171 Priorities ..........................................................................................70, 76 Production manager ......................................................................... 97 Production status Created........................................................................................... 101 Started ................................................................ 3, 14, 26, 140, 237 Project management and accounting ................................ 23, 133 Public Sector (PS) ............................................................................... 18 Purchasing policies .......................................................................... 165 Reporting currency ................................................................... 96, 160 Request change ................................................................................ 144 Request for quotations (RFQ)....................................................... 310 Reservation ........................................................................................... 55 Resource.................................................................... 65, 133, 168, 169 Resources ........................................................................................18, 20 Sales order ................................................................................. 120, 167 Sales tax............................................................................................... 283 Sales tax codes .................................................................................. 283 Sales tax groups................................................................................ 283 Service.... 7, 34, 51, 52, 53, 71, 95, 102, 103, 219, 220, 221, 236, 241, 245, 251, 322, 326, 327 Size ........................................................................................................ 215 Skills .................................................................................................... 3, 10 Standard work day in hours .......................................................... 169 Stopped ............................................................................................... 140 Tax ......................................................................................... 19, 171, 283 Tools ......................................................................... 10, 26, 28, 56, 313 Transfer ...........................................................131, 231, 234, 255, 256 Transportation management.......................................................... 23 Value stream ...................................................................................... 171 Value streams .................................................................................... 157 Vendor collaboration ...................................................................... 120 Vendor invoice .................................................................. 57, 129, 148 Vendor posting profiles ................................................................. 294 Vendors ........57, 90, 98, 105, 120, 129, 132, 148, 165, 173, 174, 294, 310 Voucher transactions ...................................................................... 100 Warehouse .....................................................................................23, 98 Work in Progress (WIP) .................................................................... 97 Working time ............................................................................ 168, 169 Working time templates ................................................................ 168 Working times ................................................................................... 169

DYNAMICS COMPANIONS

EXAM MB-300: MICROSOFT DYNAMICS 365 UNIFIED OPERATIONS CORE About the Author

CERTIFICATION EXAM STUDY GUIDE CERTIFICATION EXAM STUDY GUIDE

EXAM MB-300: MICROSOFT DYNAMICS 365 UNIFIED OPERATIONS CORE

Murray Fife is an Author of over 25 books on Microsoft Dynamics including the Bare Bones Configuration Guide series. These guides comprise of over 15 books which step you through the setup and configuration of Microsoft Dynamics including Finance, Operations, Human Resources, Production, Service Management, and Project Accounting.

This study guide contains all the exam prep content, including walkthroughs, practice exercises and sample Questions following core courses that are recommended for the MB-300 certification. Course MB-300T01: Core common features of Dynamics 365 for Finance and Operations Module 1: Get Started with Dynamics 365 for Finance and Operations Module 2: Get Started with Lifecycle Services Module 3: Use Lifecycle Services to Design and Plan Module 4: Overview of Reporting and Analytics Module 5: Build and Test Mobile Apps Module 6: Create, Maintain and Use Workflows

If you are interested in contacting Murray or want to follow his blogs and posts then here is all of his contact information:

Course MB-300T02: Core configuration in Dynamics 365 for Finance and Operations Module 1: Set Up and Configure Legal Entities Module 2: Manage users and security Module 3: Perform Personalization Module 4: Implement Common Integration Features

Email: Twitter:

murray@murrayfife.com @murrayfife

Facebook: Google: LinkedIn:

facebook.com/murraycfife google.com/+murrayfife linkedin.com/in/murrayfife

Blog: Amazon:

atinkerersnotebook.com amazon.com/author/murrayfife

Course MB-300T03: Data migration and preparing for go-live with Dynamics 365 for Finance and Operations Module 1: Prepare Data for Migration and Migrate Data Module 2: Use Data Management Module 3: Perform User Acceptance Testing Module 4: Prepare to Go Live

www.dynamicscompanions.com Dynamics Companions

Visit www.dynamicscompanions.com for more books, eBooks, resources and downloads

- 329 -